By Dave Hodges |

August 21, 2013

I would like to believe that if I were to ever to decide to sell my pride, my integrity and my future, that it would come at a steep price and not for table scraps. Unfortunately, half of the working population in America is allowing itself to be destroyed for mere table scraps that are being handed down by the elite.

Indeed, America is being destroyed from within and the destruction is going according to plan. There are more Americans dependent on the federal government than ever before in our country’s history and the net result spells disaster because these rates are unsustainable.

Not only do Americans no longer make anything, over half of all work-eligible  Americans no longer work. The number of Americans receiving food assistance has surpassed the number of full-time private sector workers in the United States. There are 97 million full-time workers in the U.S. and a mind-boggling 101 million American receive food benefits.  Currently, a record 47 million Americans participate in food stamps. The Food Stamps program has a monthly average of 46.7 million participants, or 22.5 million households. Food stamps alone had a budget of $88.6 billion in FY 2012.  The USDA describes Food Stamps as the “largest program in the domestic hunger safety net.”

The USDA also offers nutrition assistance for pregnant women, school children and seniors.  The National School Lunch program provides 32 million students with low-cost or no-cost meals daily; 10.6 million participate in the School Breakfast Program; and 9 million receive benefits from the Woman, Infants and Children program each month, the latter designed for low-income pregnant, breastfeeding, and postpartum women and children younger than five years old. Over 3 million children at day care centers receive snacks through the Child and Adult Care Food Program. There’s also a Special Milk Program for schools and a Summer Food Service Program, through which 2.3 million children received aid in July 2011 during summer vacation. And there are dozens of other programs that you and I are paying for.

But wait, it gets worse as the Department of Agriculture estimates that the 101,000,000 on welfare currently participate in at least one of the 15 separate food programs offered by the USDA. The USDA estimates the cost of these food programs to exceed at least $114 billion in fiscal year 2012.

The population of the U.S. is 315 million people. This means nearly a third of every man, woman and child in the United States receives some form of food aid from the government. The USDA says the number of Americans on food stamps is a “historically high figure that has risen with the economic downturn.”  It is more accurate to say that America has been economically conquered by the communists who paved the way for Obama to be put into power.

The Net Effect of the Welfare State

The net effect of this massive welfare state is obvious. First, these people pay no tax, contribute nothing of value to society and constitute an extreme burden to the prosperity and potential of the country. This burden is exacerbated by the fact the elite and their corporations pay no tax.

Some people understandably need to be on public assistance, but many do not. However, when we see 5 and 6 generations of welfare recipients from the same family, something is terribly wrong. When we review some of the old footage of the reasons why people voted for Obama, they said things like they were going to pay for their bills with “Obama money”, or he gave me an “Obama phone.” Obama appeals to people and organizations who get a disproportionate share of the people’s money (e.g. bailouts) and Obama appeals to the something for nothing crowd (e.g. Obama phone recipients). Prior to the 1960′s people in distress got help from the Church, or the Salvation Army, not public money. Look at how long people in this country “game” the system.




Nearly half of all welfare recipients in this program are receiving taxpayer money for two years or longer. This is outrageous! Is the government seriously telling us that people cannot find a job in 1, 2 or 5 years or more?

If someone is unemployed for more than two years, it is time to find any job that the welfare recipient can perform, even if that means shoveling excrement in a sinkhole in Louisiana. Society does not owe any able-bodied person a living.

I am sick of working my rear end off so half the country does not have to work. I am weary of paying massive taxes so Wall Street can realize more profits. And it is all part of the plan. If the government can control the resources of half the country, then they control half the country by default.

Many of these people on welfare are capable of working. While receiving welfare payments, all able-bodied people should be made to sweep the streets and pick up dog feces in the park in order to get a share of what you and I earn. Instead, we get far too many bums who play the system, generation after generation.

I know, I know, here come the allegations of racism. Whenever the underclass is busted for their slovenly ways, the race card gets played. Ladies and gentlemen, this is not about race. The following chart breaks down the racial composition of welfare recipients. You race card players might be surprised at the demographic breakdown.



Whites and blacks are equally partaking in the welfare system, so please spare me the racism comments. Ineptitude, laziness and gamesmanship runs equally through all types of human beings.

Personal Dignity Sold for Table Scraps

Where is the pride in one’s own accomplishments? Where has the satisfaction gone which was once associated with building a life that has meaning rather than being a blood sucker that lives off the efforts of others?

Obama is winning in creating a passive America in which criminal regimes like his can thrive and I am sick of it. Half of the working population in this country on some form of welfare? Really? And people are seriously defending this lunacy?

When somebody is paying your bills for weeks, then it turns into months, followed by years and then generations, that person/family is robbed of all their pride and self-respect. Just remember, when someone else is supporting you day after day and year after year, that someone owns you. And spare me the nonsense that I am being heartless towards the elderly and handicapped. Nobody is arguing that the elderly and handicapped do not deserve our help, they do. However, half of the country is not handicapped or elderly. And if half of the country is legitimately out of work with no options, then this country needs to begin a revolution against the establishment.

Please tell me why should I fund an Obama phone, while that same able bodied person is allowed to sit on their butt? All the able-bodied people need to be required to do public work projects before getting a dime of my money and they should be drug tested prior to the application process. If we were to do these things, just watch the unemployment and welfare rates dramatically decrease. But to the majority of the Obama supporters, work is a four letter word.

What does not surprise me is that so many sold out to the globalists. What does surprise me is how cheaply they were bought and paid for.

Obama and his minions are laughing at us. They know that government-dependent people will vote to take our guns away, accept carbon taxes and passively accept the death panels of Obamacare. They know that these ignorant people will never challenge the dumbing down of our American education system.  Obama knows that the helpless in this country will never rise up against the establishment in anger. Obama knows that he was the right man at the right time who was brought forth to destroy this country once and for all. Everything is going according to plan as half of us are selling our futures for table scraps.


What most Americans fail to realize is that the destruction of America has been planned for and is currently underway. The craziness coming out of Washington is not the result of incompetent politicians. Rather, the politicians are doing the bidding of Wall Street in order to accomplish a complete take down of this country. This is being accomplished in such a stealth manner, that the American people will have no idea what’s happening to them until it is too late.

A Rookie Leads America Down the Primrose Path

The fact that this country was ignorant enough and gullible enough to elect a man with such a questionable background with no accomplishments, to his name, which would represent anything of value, is reason enough to say that America made her own bed and now must lie in it.

Amazingly, Obama only served one term in the State Senate of Illinois and only a partial term in the U.S. Senate prior to being elected president. Don’t you wish you could virtually start at the top with almost no experience like Obama did? What was this country thinking when they elected a man that very few knew anything about and a man who had done virtually nothing except raise hell in Chicago as a “community organizer?”  The fact of the matter was that Obama was fast-tracked to become president because he had an agenda.  His agenda was to purposely destroy the American economy.

In order to achieve this goal, Obama subsequently drew from his experiences derived from the days of his communist laden youth which culminated in him following the strategies of Cloward and Piven and the Weatherman Underground.

The Authors of the Obama Blueprint

Please allow me introduce you to the people whose writings inspired Obama to complete the task of collapsing of our economic system, Richard Cloward and Francis Fox Piven. Cloward and Piven authored the Cloward-Piven strategy which has been a long time coming and is now fully in place in the United States.


Cloward and Piven present at the signing of NAFTA. This plot has been a long time coming.

Cloward and Piven present at the signing of NAFTA. This plot has been a long time coming.


This isn’t some conspiracy theory being set forth as these two former Columbia professors wrote about collapsing the economy and how they planned to do it in the article they co-authored in the 1960′s called, “Mobilizing the Poor: How it Could Be Done.” Six months after the initial publication, it was published in The Nation, under the title “The Weight of the Poor: A Strategy to End Poverty.”

Both publications were inspired by their belief in “social justice and fundamentally transformative change in America.” Interesting choice of words don’t you think?  Didn’t Obama say something about fundamentally transforming America during his election campaign in 2008?

Inspired by the riots in LA in 1965, Cloward and Piven wrote and published their article which outlined the best way to bring about the kind of extreme radical social change that would economically destroy America. In their estimation, the plan would be designed to overwhelm the system by the implementation of a massive welfare state and by overloading the government bureaucracy with so many impossible demands the system would eventually collapse.

There are presently 97 million full-time working Americans as compared to 101 million Americans receiving some form of welfare. One would have to conclude that Cloward and Piven eventually achieved their goal of overwhelming the American economy through Obama’s presidency.

Cloward, Piven and the Weatherman Underground

Mix in a little homicidal terrorism, and the Weatherman Underground fully embraced Cloward and Piven’s strategies. TARP, representing the greatest wealth transfer in American history, is another example of collapsing the system and the plan had its roots in the partnership of philosophy between the Weathermen and Cloward and Piven. TARP was largely written by the Apollo Alliance, whose alumni include Obama appointee, Van Jones. In New York, the Apollo Alliance is headed by Weather Underground co-founder, Jeff Jones, who was a partner and close friend to Bill Ayers in the radical terrorist group and in whose living room Barack Obama launched his political career in Chicago.

George Soros is the source of funding for most of these radical groups.  Soros and Jeff Jones also went into one of the poorest sections of New York and gave away hundreds of thousands of dollars worth of our stimulus money.

The ACORN connections are infamous. These “community organizers” are receiving untold billions in taxpayer money, despite massive voter registration fraud and corruption. Still, Congress won’t turn off the spicket. Does it sound like someone is trying to overload the system in the spirit of Cloward and Piven?

Obama Has Been Groomed for the Presidency For a Long Time

Comrade Obama’s ascension to the presidency has been a long time in the making. Interestingly, Barack Obama’s past associates especially the communist terrorists which funded his Harvard legal education and ultimately launched his political career as an Illinois state senator, namely, Bill Ayers and Bernadine Dohrn, have been in lockstep with Obama his entire adult life. However, Dohrn and Ayers were not the first to indoctrinate Obama with the Marxist communist philosophy. For that information, we have to begin with Frank Marshall Davis.

Obama’s real father, Frank Marshall Davis, was a member of the Communist Party and a former Soviet Agent who was under FBI investigation for a total of 19 years.  In 1948, Davis moved from Chicago to Hawaii leaving behind a colleague named Vernon Jarrett, father-in-law of Senior White House adviser, Valerie Jarrett. Yes, the Jarrett’s are communists as well. Both Jarrett and Davis wrote for a left-wing newspaper called the Chicago Defender in which they espoused a communist  takeover of the United States Government which contained many of Cloward and Piven’s strategies. In 1971, Davis, according to Joel Gilbert, was reunited with his then nine-year-old son, Barack Obama, and schooled him in the ways of being a good communist for the next nine years.

Adding more fuel to this communist fire, it is interesting to note that both Senior White House Advisers, David Axelrod and Valerie Jarrett were both “Red Diaper Babies, in which they were the sons and daughters of well-to-do parents who desired to live under communism and lived out their dreams through their children’s revolutionary activities. Other notable red-diaper babies also include such notables as Rahm Emanuel and Eric Holder. The Obama administration is just one big happy “red” family aren’t they?

Valerie Jarrett’s situation is particularly interesting in that her family and the Ayers family have been multi-generational friends which also included a marriage between the two families. Much of the Obama administration is a nest of communists and this should gravely concern every American citizen.

Following the nine years of mentoring and parenting by Frank Davis, Obama made some very important communist connections which ultimately led to him obtaining an impressive college education financed by some very familiar communist activists’, namely, Bill Ayers and Bernardine Dohrn.


Bill Ayers, the father of Obama's political career.


The Prairie Fire book was co-authored by Dohrn and Ayers, and, quite unbelievably, it was dedicated to Sirhan Sirhan, Robert Kennedy’s assassin. While appearing on The Common Sense Show, former FBI informant, the late Larry Grathwohl, revealed that he testified in a court of law that Ayers and Dohrn had direct involvement in a terrorist plot which killed San Francisco police sergeant, Brian V. McDonnell, by a bomb made and planted by these Weathermen Underground terrorists.

Grathwohl also revealed that he asked Ayers, in a meeting of about 25 well-to do Weatherman, most with advanced degrees from Ivy League Universities, what the Weathermen planned to do when they achieved their goal of a communist take over the government. Grathwohl stated that Ayers paused for a moment and then said that it was likely that about 50 million Americans will have to be re-educated in concentration camps located in the American Southwest and that about 25 million would have to be eliminated, meaning that they would have to be murdered. Bill and Bernardine’s Weather Underground also had the support of Cuba, East German intelligence and the North Vietnamese. I believe that in Obama’s second term, and with the power granted to him by the NDAA, that he is very capable of fulfilling Ayers’ promise to Grathwohl to incarcerate 50 million innocent Americans.

During the Vietnam war era, Ayers championed black civil rights and he and Dohrn further chastised white society for their treatment of blacks. Grathwohl also revealed that Ayers wanted to support the beginning of a race war by killing whites, from supposed black villains, and then blaming whites in order to begin a race war. How eerily similar does this sound to the Charles Manson Family and their Helter Skelter plans to execute that very same objective? Perhaps we now know why Obama’s Justice Department were the ones that would not let go of the Trayvon Martin case. This is the same strategy of creating racial division, just applied in a different generation.

While Grathwohl was infiltrating the Weathermen, Ayers ordered FBI infiltrator, Grathwohl, to blow up a Detroit police substation to which Grathwohl said that a nearby restaurant , where many blacks ate would suffer many casualties. Ayers replied that some have to die for a revolution to proceed. This is the man who was the father of Obama’s political career.

Ayers and Dohrn raised a son, Chesa Boudin, who worked for Hugo Chavez , the communist dictator formerly in charge of Venezuela. Chesa Boudin was the child of Kathy Boudin and David Gilbert, members of a Weather Underground spin-off group who went to prison for an armored car robbery that resulted in the murders of two police officers and a security guard. Dohrn served seven years in prison for her role in the robbery and this is the reason that she is ineligible to become bar certified as an attorney. Is anyone else uncomfortable with the fact that Ayers and Dohrn were the ones primarily responsible for educating Obama with communist funds and then subsequently launched his political career from their living room? Well, it’s true, please read on.

Who Paid for Obama’s College Education?

Allen Hulton, a 39 year veteran of the postal service, provided a sworn affidavit to Maricopa County, Arizona sheriff investigators, led by Sheriff Joe Arpaio, in an effort to determine whether or not the former foreign college student, Barack Obama, was eligible to be placed on Arizona’s 2012 election ballot. After reviewing Hulton’s affidavit, it was apparent that Ayers and Dohrn were in fact the de facto adoptive parents to this foreign student destined to become the first illegitimate President of the United States. As a result, Obama was treated to the finest Ivy League education that communist backed money could buy as Hulton maintains that the Ayers told him that he was financing the education of a promising foreign student at Harvard. Hulton also testified that he met Obama while at the Ayer’s home and he asked Obama what he going to do with all his education, to which Obama politely answered, “I am going to become the President.” Readers should take note that this is an affidavit, and is formally considered to be evidence, not conjecture or hearsay. There can be no other conclusion that the communist terrorist, Bill Ayers, began grooming Obama to become America’s first communist President during Obama’s college years. Their relationship continues to the present time and it’s on record that Ayers visited the White House in August of 2009.

We also know that Obama’s communist affiliations continued well into his adulthood because of the good work of Joel Gilbert  who discovered that Obama was active with a Weathermen Underground  support group known as The May 19th Communist Organization, in New York. Perhaps, this is why Ayers was visiting the White House.

Frank Chapman, a communist activist and a member of the communist front group known as the World Peace Council. Chapman clearly used the term “mole” to describe Obama. He said Obama’s political climb and subsequent success in the 2008 Democratic presidential primaries was “a dialectical leap ushering in a qualitatively new era of struggle.” Chapman further stated that, “Marx once compared revolutionary struggle with the work of the mole, who sometimes burrows so far beneath the ground that he leaves no trace of his movement on the surface. This is the old revolutionary ‘mole,’ not only showing his traces on the surface but also breaking through. The Communist Party USA backs Obama to the hilt.” It is clear that Obama is their man!

Crisis Creation

Cloward and Piven instructed activists, such as the one’s in the Weathermen Underground, that if a crisis did not exist, promote or manufacture one by exaggerating some threatening predicament. Global warming and healthcare would certainly fit the description, wouldn’t it?

Obamacare is turning America into a nation of part time workers to avoid the regulations and taxes associated with the program and this will undoubtedly bankrupt most small businesses.

The primary agenda of bringing on an economic collapse was achieved through the development of contrived economic crises designed to weaken the economy. Does this make anyone else think of the free trade agreements, NAFTA and CAFTA, in which we have seen millions of jobs leaving for overseas labor market after Wall Street got Congress to do away with American jobs by eliminating tariffs’. Say goodbye to the poster child for this plan, Detroit. However, Detroit is not alone, St. Louis and Cleveland will be the next major cities to declare bankruptcy. The Cloward and Piven designed collapse is occurring right here, right now.

And then of course, we come full circle to the explosion of the American welfare state in which half of the work eligible population are on some form of welfare. Please tell me what business could survive with half of its employees still getting paid while producing nothing? The same principle applies to a country as well.

Cloward and Piven as well as the Weatherman Underground have conspired through the ages to bring down America. Obama’s administration is following Cloward and Piven’s plan to collapse the government through the destruction of the economy and through the use of free trade agreements. Nothing short of a miracle can save this country from economic destruction.  President Obama is your mortal enemy. He represents forces which have declared war on America.


The Deliberate Dumbing Down of America

Recently, I conducted a survey of a cross-section of Americans in which I asked the following two questions:

(1) Please describe the two key elements of a free trade agreement .

In my rubric, the correct answer would have included (1) the owners of manufacturing relocate their factories in foreign cheap labor markets; (2) the owners of manufacturing are able to ship their foreign goods back into America duty free (i.e. without tariffs).

(2) Describe one group who wins and one group who loses as a result of free trade agreements.

In the rubric, the correct answer would have identified the winner as the owners of the means of production who take advantage of the fact that tariffs do not apply to them and they have dramatically lowered their labor costs as a result. Respondents should have identified the loser in a free trade agreement as the person who loses their job because of the growth of cheap, foreign labor.

The Results Demonstrate Abject Ignorance

Out of 200 respondents who answered question one, only 2% (n=4) of those surveyed identified the two elements of a free trade agreement. Most of the respondents (45%) expressed the opinion which essentially stated or implied that free trade agreements are good for America because “we are free to trade with whoever we want.”

Out of 200 respondents, over half (57%) believes that America is better off for having free trade agreements. About the same number (55%) could not identify one group that loses as a result of a free trade agreement except for those “who don’t want to participate.”

It is interesting to note that all participants have incomes of under $150,000. Over half of the participants have income of under $60,000. The data shows that these people are the most vulnerable to free trade agreements.

I have concluded that Americans do not even know what has hit them as we continue our slide into third world status. Yes, America you have almost arrived to third world status. If one takes away the top 1% in our country, we are a third world country. When more of us are on welfare (101 million people) than are working (97 million people), we have become a welfare state. A welfare state is representative of absolute poverty. At this rate, our poverty will soon rival the poverty rates of any third world nation.

If I were to make a sports analogy, our team is behind by 20 point in the 4th quarter and the players and their fans think that they are winning.

FYI On Free Trade Agreements

NAFTA and CAFTA have removed millions of jobs from our country. Eighty six percent of our manufacturing base is gone. From a national defense perspective, this is a prescription for destruction because in a protracted military conflict, factories are typically converted to war production centers in times of war.  Now that our manufacturing base is gone, the implication is clear that for the first time in our history, we are vulnerable to being militarily occupied.

Ignorance Abounds

In our recent history, being classified as middle class implied someone who was educated, lived in relative comfort and had a good degree of discretionary income. Today, what is left of the American middle class represents a growing trend in functional illiteracy, a woeful level of ignorance about current events, massive debt, little to no savings and a lifestyle that can best be described as one that is hanging on for dear life.

I’m not talking about the temporarily unemployed or the disabled. I am talking about absolutely able-bodied people who are capable of work and who will not work. Here are some examples of their rationale for staying on welfare.

“As a working poor, I would like more hours, can’t find them. As far as working the welfare recipients for their benefits, I’m sure the capable ones would go to work if they could make a reasonable amount of wages. Minimum wage(or lower), is not enough to live on, it has not come close to keeping up with expenses in the last 50 years.”

The above person is capable of working full-time. If his present employer isn’t providing enough hours to make ends meet, then get a second job. If this person is typing a response to an article on the internet defending his use of welfare, he could instead be typing his resume to send out instead. Is there any reason why the above person is not at least getting a job in telemarketing?

According to some welfare recipients, they are performing a patriotic duty by helping to create a brand new economy by being one of those who administer benefits to those who will not work.

“I guess it never occurred to the author that these social programs create jobs. If we stopped “welfare” tomorrow, how many people will find themselves out of work?”

There is a hidden pearl of wisdom in the above response from a presumed user of welfare in that there is even a secondary economy emerging to administer the benefits for those who will not work. Isn’t this akin to a Ponzi scheme? And with all Ponzi schemes, they always come crashing down.

Then of course we get people who are addicted to the system and engage in denial to lessen the psychological sting of having a life that produces nothing and only exists because of the indentured servitude of American taxpayers.

“Here’s the problem with the whole theory that millions of people are dependent on government. It’s simply not true.”

Cloward and Piven Have Won

The free trade agreements destroyed millions of American jobs and drove tens of millions of Americans to welfare. Many forget the cumulative effect of a free trade agreements. Not only did millions of people lose their jobs, but the reduction of spending power from the millions who are unemployed impacts the well-being of those in the service industries. The ripple effect from the free trade agreements explains how over half the potential work population in the United States end up on welfare.

Welfare has replaced the jobs lost to the free trade agreements. If 101 million Americans simply lost their jobs as a result of NAFTA and CAFTA, there would have been a revolution. Instead, the globalists have instituted a system of learned helplessness, in which people are conditioned to believe that their actions don’t make a difference because government will always take care of them.

Bad News On the Horizon

The cold hard fact is that over half the country is unemployed and underemployed and it is about to get a whole lot worse. Obamacare is going to turn America into a nation of part-time workers.  Further, there are many more free trade agreements on the horizon.

The Free Trade Area of the Americas is being implemented as we speak. This agreement creates a free trade agreement from the tip of South America to the North Pole. It also erases all borders with regard to immigration

HR 1777 is a bill making its way through Congress which provides for American taxpayer dollars to be used to build the necessary infrastructure to construct factories in Africa’s 54 countries. I have dubbed HR 1777 the ‘African Free Trade Agreement.” More jobs lost to another free trade agreements.

There is one more monolithic free trade agreement which is being brought online through administrative fiat called the Trans Pacific  Partnership (TPP) and its impact will be bigger than NAFTA.

The amount of free trade agreements is inversely correlated to the number of remaining American jobs. In a few short years, there will be no American economy as we know it and very few people are standing up and protesting.  Why?

Welfare: The New American Way of Life

The Cloward and Piven disciple, President Obama, is following the plan to collapse America to the letter as seven out of every eight jobs that have been emerged since his inauguration, have been part-time jobs.

The Cato Institute states that a New York welfare recipient earns more money than a first year teacher. Why work? Who cares if this president, who was bred and groomed by known communists such as Bill Ayers, are dismantling this country piece by piece.

At one time, I believed that if we in the truthful media could raise enough awareness, we could stem the tide. I no longer believe that to be the case. There is no way to rally the nation I would now call the United States of Idiocracy. The coming conflict will  need new leaders and that is what the alternative media is creating.

One person wrote a comment to one of my articles which I fear is prophetic in which he said:

“First we tried the “soap box” and we found out that didn’t work.
Second, we tried the “ballot box” well that didn’t work either.
Third, the only box left is the “ammo box”.

Before you civil war advocates jump up and down and say “it’s about time,” I would invite you to read Sherman’s March to the Sea. There are very few winners in a civil war and most of you reading these words have grown too soft to endure the hardships that would accompany a civil war.

The fundamental question remains, how do we convince the tens of millions of able bodied people on welfare to not accept their fate and stand up for their rights, when a new study by the Cato Institute demonstrates that 13 states pay welfare benefits of more than $15 per hour and 35 states pay welfare benefits which exceed minimum wage? The short answer is that we will not hear from them until their welfare benefits are cut off when the system collapses. Then all hell will break loose.



Michael Snyder
Economic Collapse

August 22, 2013

If you could stay home and relax all day and actually make more money than you do at your current job, would you do it?

That sounds crazy, but this is actually a very real dilemma for millions upon millions of Americans.  According to a shocking new study that was just released by the Cato Institute, people on welfare are actually better off than minimum wage workers in 35 U.S. states.  And in 13 states, those on welfare actually do better than those making $15 an hour.  So why bother?  It is very difficult to find a job in this economy, especially a good one.  As I mentioned yesterday, seven out of every eight jobs that have been “created” since Barack Obama has been president have been part-time jobs.  Why slave away flipping burgers, stocking shelves for some retail giant or working for some temp agency when you could just sit home and make more money collecting government checks?  Yes, there is definitely a minority of Americans that hate the idea of becoming dependent on the government and would never want to take advantage of the system like that, but that minority seems to be shrinking.  At this point, about half the country gets money from the government each month anyway, so why not collect “your share”?  If someone is offering to give you something for free, it is only human nature to be at least a little bit tempted.  And right now the federal government is making it extremely tempting to give up on work entirely and become a permanent welfare check collector.

Before people start getting really upset, let me once again reiterate that most of the people that are receiving financial assistance from the government actually need it.  Not everyone is abusing the system, and not everyone is using their food stamps to buy lobster.

Poverty in the United States has absolutely exploded in recent years, and our economy simply does not produce enough jobs for everyone anymore.  We certainly do not want those without jobs to go hungry or to be sleeping in the streets.

But what we have today is a situation where there is a huge incentive in many states to actually give up on work entirely and become a dependent of the state instead.

According to the Cato Institute, someone in the state of New York that goes on welfare can bring home more in money and benefits than an entry-level school teacher makes in an entire year…

The federal government funds 126 separate programs targeted towards low-income people, 72 of which provide either cash or in-kind benefits to individuals. (The rest fund community-wide programs for low-income neighborhoods, with no direct benefits to individuals.) State and local governments operate more welfare programs. Of course, no individual or family gets benefits from all 72 programs, but many do get aid from a number of them at any point in time.

Today, the Cato institute is releasing a new study looking at the state-by-state value of welfare for a mother with two children. In the Empire State, a family receiving Temporary Assistance for Needy Families, Medicaid, food stamps, WIC, public housing, utility assistance and free commodities (like milk and cheese) would have a package of benefits worth $38,004, the seventh-highest in the nation.

While that might not sound overly generous, remember that welfare benefits aren’t taxed, while wages are. So someone in New York would have to earn more than $21 per hour to be better off than they would be on welfare. That’s more than the average statewide entry-level salary for a teacher.

If you are going to live off of welfare, the key is to pick the right state.  Not all states offer the same level of benefits.

In some states, you have to make far more than the minimum wage before it pays not to be on welfare.  In fact, there are 12 different states where you actually have to make more than $15 an hour before you start doing better than welfare recipients…

Nationwide, our study found that the wage-equivalent value of benefits for a mother and two children ranged from a high of $60,590 in Hawaii to a low of $11,150 in Idaho. In 33 states and the District of Columbia, welfare pays more than an $8-an-hour job. In 12 states and DC, the welfare package is more generous than a $15-an-hour job.

Of course not all welfare recipients take advantage of all of the programs that they are eligible for.  But if you do know how to work the system, you can live very comfortably at the expense of the government in many states.

So what is the solution?

Well, it would be great if we had enough jobs for everyone, but that is definitely not the case.  In fact, the U.S. economy is probably going to continue to lose good jobs in the years ahead if current trends continue.

Unfortunately, that also means that poverty and dependence on the government are likely going to continue to grow, especially when the next major wave of the economic collapse strikes.

If you want to get an idea of where we are headed, just look atDetroit.  Once upon a time, Detroit actually had the highest per capita income in the entire country.  But now it is a rotting, festering, bankrupt hellhole where tens of thousands of stray dogs freely roam the streets…

As many as 50,000 stray dogs roam the streets and vacant homes of bankrupt Detroit, replacing residents, menacing humans who remain and overwhelming the city’s ability to find them homes or peaceful deaths.

One Humane Society official that recently visited the city to help deal with the dog crisis described what she witnessed as “almost post-apocalyptic“…

The number of strays signals a humanitarian crisis, said Amanda Arrington of the Humane Society of the United States, based in Washington. She heads a program that donated $50,000 each to organizations in Detroit and nine other U.S cities to get pets vaccinated, fed, spayed and neutered.

Arrington said when she visited Detroit in October, “It was almost post-apocalyptic, where there are no businesses, nothing except people in houses and dogs running around.”

“The suffering of animals goes hand in hand with the suffering of people.”

But don’t laugh at Detroit.

The rest of the country is going down the exact same path.

Just recently, Charles Nenner told Newsmax TV that another recession is rapidly approaching that that it is “going to be bad”…

Technical analyst Charles Nenner didn’t mince words when asked about the United States facing another recession.

“It’s going to be bad,” Nenner told Newsmax TV in an exclusive interview.

And it looks like the folks in Washington are getting very concerned about all of the economic warnings signs that we have been seeing as well.

Just this week, Barack Obama “held a special, closed door meetingwith the heads of the U.S. government’s financial, monetary and oversight agencies. It included members of the Federal Reserve, the FDIC, the CFTC, the SEC, and the Federal Housing Finance Agency.”

So why did Obama gather all of the top financial officials for a secret closed door meeting?

John Embry told King World News that he thinks it is because the administration is deeply alarmed about what is happening in the financial markets…

I firmly believe the reason the President has called this meeting today is because if interest rates in the U.S. continue to rise, it could really unleash something disastrous. We are talking here about the possibility of a meltdown. It’s interesting that the President would call in that many big hitters, the head of every significant financial agency in the United States, as well as the Fed and the Comptroller of the Currency, etc — this is a very large meeting today.

I’ve always believed that the global financial crisis of 2008 was just the opener. We have now bought the better part of 5 years now through unlimited money creation. But as we head into this next massive, and what I believe will be a larger round of destabilization, I want KWN readers around the world to understand that the central planners don’t have the same weapons to fight this global financial crisis. This is why I believe they are desperately attempting right now, today in this meeting, to stave off this crisis.

And the truth is that our “leaders” in Washington have good reason to be concerned.  If interest rates keep going up rapidly we are going to be in for a world of hurt.

Sadly, most Americans seem to have already forgotten how painful 2008 was, and that was only a preview of coming attractions.

The worst economic crisis in the history of the United States is on the horizon, and most people are going to be absolutely blindsided by it.

I hope that you are getting prepared while you still can.




“There Is a Crisis Unfolding Somewhere in the Background”


(AFP OUT) U.S. President Barack Obama speaks during a cabinet meeting at the White House on November 4, 2010 in Washington, DC. Obama has invited Republican leadership to the White House for a bipartisan meeting on November 18.


Mac Slavo
Aug 22, 2013

If there’s one thing we know about how the US government operates, it’s that the American people are often the last to know about serious problems that may be taking place behind the scenes.

This week, in a move that has spooked a lot of economic and financial analysts, President Barack Obama held a special, closed door meeting with the heads of the U.S. government’s financial, monetary and oversight agencies. It included members of the Federal Reserve, the FDIC, the CFTC, the SEC, and the Federal Housing Finance Agency.

This has left many wondering what is really going on – and if a serious event is about to take place yet again.

I guess I’m always unnerved as a result of what happened in April, the last time the President of the United States had a meeting with all of the bank heads, and two days later the price of gold was smashed for over $200.

Now, the President is meeting with all of the heads of the various agencies, institutions, the Fed, and all of the other key money entities in the United States today.  What’s that all about?

But clearly if the President is having this meeting, there is a crisis unfolding somewhere in the background, and it could very well relate to the dollar, interest rates, and the massive derivatives market associated with interest rates…

This surge in interest rates may have already seriously destabilized the entire financial system, and that’s why there is this meeting taking place in the White House today.  The fact is that the vast majority of derivatives in the global financial system are related to interest rates.

Now, the entire financial system may be on the precipice of some sort of catastrophic event unfolding because of what we have already seen in the bond market, and how the derivatives are so heavily intertwined.  Meaning, we may be on the verge of another disastrous derivatives meltdown.

John Embry – King World News via Steve Quayle

Ahead of the 2008 collapse, as the pillars of our financial system were undergoing a controlled detonation, the Chairman of the Federal Reserve assured us the crisis had been contained. Experts and pundits on television were screaming to investors that everything was fine and to keep buying the dips.

Behind the scenes, however, President Bush, the Federal Reserve, and the world’s leading financial institutions were scrambling to figure out how to keep the whole thing from falling apart. As former US Treasury Secretary Hank Paulson noted, we were on the brink of a historic collapse, and they knew it well ahead of time.

The American people were not as fortunate. Most of us came to the realization things had taken a turn for the worse only after 50% of our wealth had been wiped out in a stock market and housing crash.

Today, like before, all of the experts in Washington and the mainstream media are making a point to reassure us that we are in the midst of an economic recovery. However, key economic indicators suggest otherwise. We are seeing a plunge in global shipping, a halt in consumer spending, and perhaps most importantly, a significant rise in interest rates and the US government’s borrowing costs.

Now, as the President meets with a veritable who’s who of government finance, lending and monetary policy one can’t help but think something is amiss.



Published on Aug 27, 2013



Greg Palast
August 22, 2013

When a little birdie dropped the End Game memo through my window, its content was so explosive, so sick and plain evil, I just couldn’t believe it.

The Memo confirmed every conspiracy freak’s fantasy: that in the late 1990s, the top US Treasury officials secretly conspired with a small cabal of banker big-shots to rip apart financial regulation across the planet. When you see 26.3 percent unemployment in Spain, desperation and hunger in Greece, riots in Indonesia and Detroit in bankruptcy, go back to this End Game memo, the genesis of the blood and tears.

The Treasury official playing the bankers’ secret End Game was Larry Summers. Today, Summers is Barack Obama’s leading choice for Chairman of the US Federal Reserve, the world’s central bank. If the confidential memo is authentic, then Summers shouldn’t be serving on the Fed, he should be serving hard time in some dungeon reserved for the criminally insane of the finance world.

The memo is authentic.

I had to fly to Geneva to get confirmation and wangle a meeting with the Secretary General of the World Trade Organisation, Pascal Lamy. Lamy, the Generalissimo of Globalisation, told me,

“The WTO was not created as some dark cabal of multinationals secretly cooking plots against the people… We don’t have cigar-smoking, rich, crazy bankers negotiating.”

Then I showed him the memo.

It begins with Larry Summers’ flunky, Timothy Geithner, reminding his boss to call the Bank bigshots to order their lobbyist armies to march:

“As we enter the end-game of the WTO financial services negotiations, I believe it would be a good idea for you to touch base with the CEOs…”

To avoid Summers having to call his office to get the phone numbers (which, under US law, would have to appear on public logs), Geithner listed the private lines of what were then the five most powerful CEOs on the planet. And here they are:

Goldman Sachs: John Corzine (212)902-8281

Merrill Lynch: David Kamanski (212)449-6868

Bank of America: David Coulter (415)622-2255

Citibank: John Reed (212)559-2732

Chase Manhattan: Walter Shipley (212)270-1380

Lamy was right: They don’t smoke cigars. Go ahead and dial them. I did, and sure enough, got a cheery personal hello from Reed – cheery until I revealed I wasn’t Larry Summers. (Note: The other numbers were swiftly disconnected. And Corzine can’t be reached while he faces criminal charges.)

It’s not the little cabal of confabs held by Summers and the banksters that’s so troubling. The horror is in the purpose of the “end game” itself.

Let me explain:

The year was 1997. US Treasury Secretary Robert Rubin was pushing hard to de-regulate banks. That required, first, repeal of the Glass-Steagall Act to dismantle the barrier between commercial banks and investment banks. It was like replacing bank vaults with roulette wheels.

Second, the banks wanted the right to play a new high-risk game: “derivatives trading”. JP Morgan alone would soon carry $88 trillion of these pseudo-securities on its books as “assets”.

Deputy Treasury Secretary Summers (soon to replace Rubin as Secretary) body-blocked any attempt to control derivatives.

But what was the use of turning US banks into derivatives casinos if money would flee to nations with safer banking laws?

The answer conceived by the Big Bank Five: eliminate controls on banks in every nation on the planet — in one single move. It was as brilliant as it was insanely dangerous.

How could they pull off this mad caper? The bankers’ and Summers’ game was to use the Financial Services Agreement (or FSA), an abstruse and benign addendum to the international trade agreements policed by the World Trade Organisation.

Until the bankers began their play, the WTO agreements dealt simply with trade in goods – that is, my cars for your bananas. The new rules devised by Summers and the banks would force all nations to accept trade in “bads” – toxic assets like financial derivatives.

Until the bankers’ re-draft of the FSA, each nation controlled and chartered the banks within their own borders. The new rules of the game would force every nation to open their markets to Citibank, JP Morgan and their derivatives “products”.

And all 156 nations in the WTO would have to smash down their own Glass-Steagall divisions between commercial savings banks and the investment banks that gamble with derivatives.

The job of turning the FSA into the bankers’ battering ram was given to Geithner, who was named Ambassador to the World Trade Organisation.

Bankers Go Bananas

Why in the world would any nation agree to let its banking system be boarded and seized by financial pirates like JP Morgan?

The answer, in the case of Ecuador, was bananas. Ecuador was truly a banana republic. The yellow fruit was that nation’s life-and-death source of hard currency. If it refused to sign the new FSA, Ecuador could feed its bananas to the monkeys and go back into bankruptcy. Ecuador signed.

And so on – with every single nation bullied into signing.

Every nation but one, I should say. Brazil’s new President, Inacio Lula da Silva, refused. In retaliation, Brazil was threatened with a virtual embargo of its products by the European Union’s Trade Commissioner, one Peter Mandelson, according to another confidential memo I got my hands on. But Lula’s refusenik stance paid off for Brazil which, alone among Western nations, survived and thrived during the 2007-9 bank crisis.

China signed – but got its pound of flesh in return. It opened its banking sector a crack in return for access and control of the US auto parts and other markets. (Swiftly, two million US jobs shifted to China.)

The new FSA pulled the lid off the Pandora’s box of worldwide derivatives trade. Among the notorious transactions legalised: Goldman Sachs (where Treasury Secretary Rubin had been co-chairman) worked a secret euro-derivatives swap with Greece which, ultimately, destroyed that nation. Ecuador, its own banking sector de-regulated and demolished, exploded into riots. Argentina had to sell off its oil companies (to the Spanish) and water systems (to Enron) while its teachers hunted for food in garbage cans. Then, Bankers Gone Wild in the Eurozone dove head-first into derivatives pools without knowing how to swim – and the continent is now being sold off in tiny, cheap pieces to Germany.

Of course, it was not just threats that sold the FSA, but temptation as well. After all, every evil starts with one bite of an apple offered by a snake. The apple: the gleaming piles of lucre hidden in the FSA for local elites. The snake was named Larry.

Does all this evil and pain flow from a single memo? Of course not: the evil was The Game itself, as played by the banker clique. The memo only revealed their game-plan for checkmate.

And the memo reveals a lot about Summers and Obama.

While billions of sorry souls are still hurting from worldwide banker-made disaster, Rubin and Summers didn’t do too badly. Rubin’s deregulation of banks had permitted the creation of a financial monstrosity called “Citigroup”. Within weeks of leaving office, Rubin was named director, then Chairman of Citigroup – which went bankrupt while managing to pay Rubin a total of $126 million.

Then Rubin took on another post: as key campaign benefactor to a young State Senator, Barack Obama. Only days after his election as President, Obama, at Rubin’s insistence, gave Summers the odd post of US “Economics Tsar” and made Geithner his Tsarina (that is, Secretary of Treasury). In 2010, Summers gave up his royalist robes to return to “consulting” for Citibank and other creatures of bank deregulation whose payments have raised Summers’ net worth by $31 million since the “end-game” memo.

That Obama would, at Robert Rubin’s demand, now choose Summers to run the Federal Reserve Board means that, unfortunately, we are not far from the end of the game.






by Tyler Durden | ZeroHedge

… A broad-based tax cut, for example, accommodated by a program of open-market purchases to alleviate any tendency for interest rates to increase, would almost certainly be an effective stimulant to consumption and hence to prices. Even if households decided not to increase consumption but instead re-balanced their portfolios by using their extra cash to acquire real and financial assets, the resulting increase in asset values would lower the cost of capital and improve the balance sheet positions of potential borrowers. A money-financed tax cut is essentially equivalent to Milton Friedman’s famous “helicopter drop” of money

- Ben Bernanke, Deflation: Making Sure “It” Doesn’t Happen Here, November 21, 2002

Previously we showed that despite an unprecedented surge in developed world debt over the past decade, and especially in the last five years since the onset of the Great Financial Crisis (currently at 450% debt/GDP), there has been only a nominal increase in economic growth as measured by G7 GDP as well as CPI-measured inflation. This has happened despite (or rather due to) a historic expansion in G7 central bank balance sheets, whose bankers first launched a policy of ZIRP, and subsequently replaced it with Quantitative Easing whereby trillions in reserves were injected in the banking system offset by the purchases of Treasurys, MBS and other “high quality collateral” (which has been soaked up to such an extent, the TBAC, led by Citi’s Matt King, takes every opportunity to warn and complain about it in the quarterly refunding presentations).

One direct result of such intervention has been the reflation of capital markets asset bubbles across the world, and especially in the US, where the S&P500 is trading just shy of all time highs, and yet as highlighted previously, the “wealth effect” generated by this monetary pathway has led solely to the enrichment of the wealthiest decile of the population, and to a income gap in the US that is now at record wides, and worse even than during the “roaring 20s.”

While in other times it would be safe to say such a monetary framework would and could continue indefinitely, or at least until this particular bubble burst once more (or the social fabric tears with other more severe consequences), recent developments and especially a key phrase from none other than Barack Obama uttered a month ago, namely that “we have to turn the page on the bubble-and-bust mentality that created this messis why some believe an Obama-appointed Larry Summers could pull the punchbowl earlier than expected. After all, it is becoming increasingly more accepted even in the corridors of the status quo, that QE has failed completely at anything besides stabilizing the financial system in 2009 and then ramping equities to new highs. This fits in with the recent realization that over the next year, the Fed will “taper” its open-ended QE and ultimately bring its injection of “flow” into the capital markets to a stop.

But while QE may be ending, it certainly does not mean that the Fed is halting its effort to “boost” the economy. In fact, as Deutsche Bank’s Jim Reid suggests, the end of QE may well be simply a redirection, whereby the broken monetary pathway, one which uses banks as intermediaries to stimulate inflation (supposedly a failure according to the economist mainstream), i.e., “second-round effects”, is bypassed entirely and replaced with Plan Z, aka “Helicopter Money” mentioned previously as an all too real monetary policy option by none other than Milton Friedman and one Ben Bernanke. This is also known as the nuclear option.

Reid’s summation on why contrary to prevailing sentiment, the Fed may proceed with Helicopter Money, in order to achieve one simple target: target Nominal GDP, inflation be damned, is as follows: “Throughout the modern history of monetary economics one policy has been put forward as a monetary “super drug” (or deadly poison depending on your view). That is “helicopter money”. It has long been seen as being too powerful to control and thus beyond the scope of contemplation. However in the past decade such policy has slowly emerged from the shadow of heterodoxy.”

If dropping interest rates to zero was Unorthodox Policy #1 and QE was Unorthodox Policy #2 then it seems very possible Helicopter Money will be Unorthodox Policy #3. Whether this new level of expansionism, with all the hopes and theoretic power it is supposed to hold, can generate growth of the red-hot rather than lukewarm kind remains to be seen.

However in so much as it could potentially raise nominal GDP, it may become an increasingly more attractive policy option around a global economy (especially DM) economy that faces many natural and structural growth concerns in the year ahead. Forcing the nominal economy to grow into the problems of the bubble era could be the most realistic policy choice over the remainder of the decade.

So yes: while on one hand some may perceive that the Fed’s tapering is an indication that the central bank may be withdrawing from active micro management of the economy, there is a distinct possibility that as a result of the administration’s displeasure with the explicit effects of QE so far which have led to the Obama-noted asset bubbles, yet which have failed to boost growth and inflation to a degree deemed acceptable, and more importantly, necessary to slowly but surely inflate away the massive G7 debt overhang (the abovementioned 450% debt/GDP), what may be lying just over the horizon with the appointment of Larry Summers, over that of Janet Yellen, is the diametric opposite of what conventional wisdom believes: instead of a hawk, Summers may well be the dove to end all doves, and unleash Bernanke’s helicopters.

In doing so four birds with one stone: i) it would alleviate the liquidity problem arising from the QE “reserve for collateral” as a result of an unprecedented surge in gross Treasury issuance to fund the fiscal component of the tax-cut, ii) it would put an end, at least initially, to the equity bubble as the bulk of the liquidity would no longer find its way directly into capital markets first and foremost, iii) it would represent a “money-financed tax cut” that would flow through to consumers much faster than the current broken Dealer-mediated indirect pathway, and iiii) it would boost the popularity of an administration that suddenly finds itself at a record low approval rating as money, quite literally, falls from the skies.

Of course, what it would also do, because it would mean inflation would suddenly “unanchor” itself from long-term expectations of a modest 2% rise, is send inflation rates soaring, thereby accelerating the Fed’s centrally-managed systemic collapse into a monetary singularity that ends concurrently with the dollar’s reserve status…. and a relatively straightforward impact on all “hard”, non-fiat based assets.


Read on.

From DB’s “A Nominal Problem”, by Jim Reid

Are the Helicopters Coming?

What monetary policy has done so far

The old unorthodoxy is now orthodoxy. Central banks have sent interest rates to lows never seen in centuries of existence. Once they hit these zero-lower bounds central banks embarked on programmes of quantitative easing, expanding their balance sheets by multiples of their pre-GFC levels and via purchases of assets previously seen as beyond the spectrum of viable central bank assets (for example MBS and longterm government bonds). As we write the US and Japanese central banks continue to expand their balance sheets by enormous quantities, even if the former seems close to paring some of this back.

So on many historical measures monetary policy is already extremely and aggressively accommodative. However the world’s economies are not running at what is deemed to be a sufficiently high nominal rate. [I]f central banks objective frameworks are changed to allow them to be more accommodative in the face of continued economic disappointment, greater policy activism will be demanded of them.

Throughout the modern history of monetary economics one policy has been put forward as a monetary “super drug” (or deadly poison depending on your view). That is “helicopter money”. It has long been seen as being too powerful to control and thus beyond the scope of contemplation. However in the past decade such policy has slowly emerged from the shadow of heterodoxy.

So what is helicopter money? What are the dangers? And could it really be put into action, possibly as the policy to make central bank nominal GDP targets credible.

Helicopter Money

To explain what helicopter money is we first turn to two heavy-weights of the monetary policy world – Milton Friedman, a giant of 20th century economic and monetary thinking, and Fed Chairman Ben Bernanke, one of the most powerful and influential central bankers in world history.

Friedman proffered helicopter money as a once and for all change in the nominal quantity of money. He gave the policy its “helicopter” moniker through a now famous example where he asked what the impact would be if the government sent out helicopters which dropped a $1000 in bills from the sky. Given that the drop doesn’t change economic agent’s desires to hold cash, each agent will try and spend their excess real cash holdings. Given that no one wants to accept more cash at the current price level (each agent is trying to reduce their cash holdings), prices are bid up until a new equilibrium is found. The result is a jump in prices and nominal GDP.

In the early 2000s Ben Bernanke discussed how such a helicopter drop might be enacted in reality, specifically in reference to the zero-lower-bound deflation-ridden “Lost Decade” Japanese economy. Bernanke argued that the most effective policy for the Japanese economy was helicopter money, or what he called a “money financed tax cut” and suggested channels through which it could increase prices and real GDP. He argued in a 2002 speech (Deflation: Making Sure “It” Doesn’t Happen Here) that fiscal and monetary (central bank) authorities should co-ordinate through a broad-based tax cut accommodated by a programme of open market purchases to alleviate any tendency for interest rates to increase stimulating consumption and prices. Even if it didn’t help consumption it would boost asset prices as households rebalanced portfolios.

Also relevant to today is comments made by Bernanke in 2003 on the likely effectiveness of helicopter money in Japan when he stresses that with such a policy, “The health  of the banking sector is irrelevant to this means of transmitting the expansionary effect of monetary policy, addressing the concern of BOJ officials about ‘broken’ channels of monetary transmission.”

The message is clear – if done on an adequate scale helicopter money has the power to raise prices and nominal GDP even in the face of the severe economic headwinds and dislocations (such as a badly damaged banking system) seen post-2008. It flows naturally from Friedman’s famous statement that “inflation is always and everywhere a monetary phenomenon.” If a central bank really wants inflation-driven nominal GDP growth, it can have it. Indeed the combination of NGDPT and Helicopter Money appears to be a potent potential policy package for today’s moribund economies.

Route One Policy – Helicopter Money vs. QE

A major benefit of a policy of helicopter money over current quantitative easing policies is its greater potential directness. Quantitative Easing is reliant upon second-round effects to affect the real economy. When the Fed purchases government securities it hopes that its purchases will (a) force investors and financial institutions to rebalance their portfolios towards riskier assets (such as loans to businesses or corporate bonds) by driving treasury yields lower and (b) it will raise financial asset prices increasing wealth. It is hoped that once the Fed has lowered borrowing costs and raised financial asset prices these first round effects will feed into second round effects of greater consumer spending and business investment, only then boosting economic activity. From this two points stand out to us about QE. First its economic effects are secondary to its financial asset effects. Second it is reliant upon the financial and more specifically the banking system to act as the transmission mechanism for its economic impact. If banks, when the Fed purchases government securities off of them and credits them with reserves, simply hold onto these reserves instead of lending them out much of the impact of QE will never survive to the desired “second round” economic effects.

This is exactly what has happened. As the Fed has expanded its asset purchase programme, banks have held onto their reserves. In a much talked about paper presented by economist Robert Hall at the August 2013 Jackson Hole get together, “These countries [US and other advanced economies] have been in liquidity traps, where monetary policies that normally expand the economy by enlarging the monetary base are ineffectual. Reserves have become near-perfect substitutes for government debt, so open-market policies of funding purchases of debt with reserves have essentially no effect”. This followed from Michael Woodford’s 2012 paper, also presented at a Jackson Hole meet in 2012, that, “once the interest-rate lower bound is reached, bank reserves and other very short-term riskless claims should become essentially perfect substitutes, so that increases in reserves that come about through central-bank purchases of riskless short-term assets should have no effect.”

What these papers are saying is that at the zero-lower bound (ZLB) QE’s main effect will be to increase banks reserve holdings and so will have little actual economic effect. All of the impact of QE will be lost in the first-round financial effects. Figure 96 and Figure 97 show that this has been the case. Fed asset purchases have increased the monetary base, however most of the increase has remained stuck in excess reserves. Figure 96 shows that the rate at which the Fed’s (and other major central banks) monetary base has been turned into actual money supply through bank lending activity has collapsed (lower money multiplier) and Figure 97 shows how any increases in the money supply which have been achieved have had an incredibly dampened effect on actual nominal activity (lower money velocity).

From these charts it seems fair to argue that much of the impact of QE has indeed been lost in the financial and banking system, distorted as it is by postcrisis balance sheet rebuilding, adaptation to new regulations and rates at the zero lower bound and so never making it to the actual economy.

For helicopter money on the other hand, as we’ve already highlighted via Ben Bernanke’s own words, “the health of the banking sector is irrelevant to this means of transmitting the expansionary effect of monetary policy.” The reason is simple – helicopter money bypasses the banking system and puts money straight into consumers’ and businesses’ pockets. Where the first round effects of quantitative easing hit the financial system and then through the financial system the second round effects reach consumers and businesses, helicopter money first hits consumers/businesses and then through them the financial system.

Helicopter money achieves this direct impact by directly increasing the cash of consumers and businesses through (say) a money-financed tax cut.

Importantly this money has very high “economic power” as it is very likely it will be spent (on consumption or investment) because the central bank has purchased permanently the debt created to finance the tax cut meaning no current or future debt liability has been incurred and so higher taxes in the future shouldn’t be expected. As Bernanke stated in 2003, after a helicopter money policy, “essentially, monetary and fiscal policies together have increased the nominal wealth of the household sector, which will increase nominal spending and hence prices.” All of this is achieved without any involvement of the banking sector, which is “irrelevant”.

All the data we have points to the developed world’s financial and banking system unable and/or unwilling to put their grown central bank reserves to work in the real economy. All unconventional monetary policy to date has fallen foul of this fact. Helicopter money won’t.

Indeed to our eyes this debate gets to the heart of what central banks fundamentally can and cannot do, chiefly that they seem to have the ability to control only one economic variable at a time. During the 1970s central banks successfully supported high nominal growth at the cost of runaway inflation. In the 1980s they successfully strangled inflation at the cost of sharp falls in real economic activity. In the Great Moderation of the 1990s and early 2000s they kept a lid on inflation and inflation expectations at the expense of a series of asset bubbles. Post-2009 central banks have successfully avoided deflation and kept inflation around their targeted levels, but allowed continuing slack and unemployment in their economies. Maybe helicopter money and a combined nominal GDP target might allow for stable, slack eliminating, nominal GDP growth. Of course there is a question of what it might leave uncontrolled…

A double-edged sword?

In spite of the theoretical power of helicopter money it has and continues to face strong opposition. Indeed, fast-forward 9 years from 2002’s Professor Bernanke to 2011’s Chairman Bernanke and we see the quote, “monetary policy can be a powerful tool, but it is not a panacea for the problems currently faced by the US economy.” This reasoning can be seen as coming straight out of a 2003 Fed Policy Paper presented to the FOMC (which by then included Bernanke among its numbers) by Vincent Reinhart which concluded on money-financed tax cuts and other “extreme” policy measures that, “You can see why I put this list last. These options would change how we are viewed in financial markets, involve credit judgments of a form we are not used to, perhaps smack of desperation, and pulls us into a tighter relationship with other parts of the government.”

The message is simple – helicopter money is a step too far for central bank policy. It risks creating unintended consequences (“change how we are viewed in financial markets”) and asset market mispricing (“involve credit judgments of a form we are not used to”) as well as possibility abandoning the independence of the Fed (“a tighter relationship with other parts of the government”).

As with all economic decisions, there is a trade-off. And as with all trade-offs, priorities and preferences change. There is an argument that helicopter money could put the world’s economies back on a stronger nominal GDP growth track, boost spending, increase confidence and reduce debt burdens. But it could well do so at the risk of financial market mispricing (i.e. asset bubbles) and letting the inflation genie out of its bottle after three decades ensuring it stayed in it.

NGDPT and Helicopter Money pose Deeper Questions then Any Framework and Policy Yet Used

In a world which, to our eyes, continues to be weighed down by uneroded debt burdens; nominal GDP targeting and helicopter money could be the logical next step in today’s monetary-stimulus heavy economies. More than that, it could be successful in a way that its less radical predecessors have not been.

However the decision to go down the path of helicopter money would pose deeper questions and possibly far greater risks then any policy enacted so far. It is still our view that aggressive expansionary monetary policy post-2008 put “capitalism on hold”, saving the economy from undergoing the type of creative destruction debt liquidation and businesses failure Schumpeter pointed out as being at the very core of capitalism. In turn this has prevented the type of rejuvenation that might have been expected “post-crisis”. Maybe the scale of the GFC meant such activism was a necessary and unavoidable response as the alternative would likely have been a socially divisive depression.

With so much previously unforeseen unorthodox monetary policy conducted since 2008, it’s impossible to rule out NGDP targeting or even helicopter money. Perhaps the closest thing we have to this at the moment is in Japan. Perhaps this will be a test case for such policy that might herald its global adoption or consignment to the economic graveyard.

Monetary policy and growth

It is an open question whether pushing monetary policy aggression to a whole new stratosphere can generate sustainable real growth. The evidence from Japanese monetary policy in the 1990s and 2000s and US/UK/EA policy post-2008 certainly points to aggressive monetary policy putting capitalism on hold and embedding deep-set structural problems, and not generating growth. If dropping interest rates to zero was Unorthodox Policy #1 and QE was Unorthodox Policy #2 then it seems very possible Helicopter Money will be Unorthodox Policy #3. Whether this new level of expansionism, with all the hopes and theoretic power it is supposed to hold, can generate growth of the red-hot rather than lukewarm kind remains to be seen.

However in so much as it could potentially raise nominal GDP, it may become an increasingly more attractive policy option around a global economy (especially DM) economy that faces many natural and structural growth concerns in the year ahead. Forcing the nominal economy to grow into the problems of the bubble era could be the most realistic policy choice over the remainder of the decade.



Published on Aug 12, 2013



Published on Feb 11, 2013


The American people are now facing a very serious situation. On January 17, 2013, the Government Accountability Office, the nonpartisan investigative arm of Congress released its annual audit of the U.S. government. The report covered fiscal years 2011 and `12. The conclusion of the report was this, “Absent policy changes, the federal government continues to face an unsustainable fiscal path.”

If the U.S. government does not stop the wild spending and develop serious, meaningful budget reform, and if the Federal Reserve does not stop printing money to monetize the government’s debt, the U.S. economy and the U.S. dollar will collapse. That means that all of your savings, all of your investments, your home and everything else will be destoyed before your eyes.

The mainstream media is not going to tell you what is going on.  The federal government will never be able to pay back the debt that it owes.  Members of Congress and the White House are aware of this.  Other foreign countries that the United States owes money to such as Russia and China are also aware of this.  So it’s now up to the Federal Reserve to keep the system going by printing money and extending the time of default out far enough so that some future world war can happen to justify the need to take total control over the United States through martial law.  Millions of Americans will not survive this.  After the take over of America, a world government will be created with a single world army, and a new world currency. It will still be controlled by the same powerful group of elite people, but this way they escape the blame for everything and keep their power over the masses, which is exactly the type of control that they want.



By Susan Jones
February 11, 2014

( – On the same day House Speaker John Boehner said he would bring a “clean” debt ceiling bill to the House floor — and join Democrats in voting for a 13-month extension of the debt limit — the head of the Congressional Budget Office declared that the “large and growing federal debt” could eventually increase the risk of a  “fiscal crisis.”



“The large budget deficits recorded in recent years have substantially increased federal debt, and the amount of debt relative to the size of the economy is now very
high by historical standards,” Elmendorf told the Senate Budget Committee.

“CBO estimates that federal debt held by the public will equal 74 percent of GDP at the end of this year and 79 percent in 2024 (the end of the current 10-year projection period). Such large and growing federal debt could have serious negative consequences, including restraining economic growth in the long term, giving policymakers less flexibility to respond to unexpected challenges, and eventually increasing the risk of a fiscal crisis (in which investors would demand high interest rates to buy the government’s debt).

Elmendorf also estimated that the economy will grow at a “solid pace” in 2014 and for the next few years. But he said the unemployment rate will probably remain above 6 percent until late 2016.

“Moreover, the rate of participation in the labor force — which has been pushed down by the unusually large number of people who have decided not to look for work because of a lack of job opportunities — is projected to move only slowly back toward what it would be without the cyclical weakness in the economy.”

(In testimony before a House panel last week, Elmendorf said Obamacare subsidies that help low-income people buy expensive health insurance are a “disincentive for people to work.” He said the Affordable Care Act “will reduce the total number of hours worked in the economy by between one-and-a-half and two percent from 2017 to 2024.” That represents a decline in the number of full-time-equivalent workers of about 2.0 million in 2017, rising to about 2.5 million in 2024.)

Beyond 2017, Elmendorf said CBO expects economic growth to “diminish to a pace that is well below the average seen over the past several decades.” He said the anticipated slowdown reflects long-term trends, such as slower growth in the labor force due to the aging of the population.



Published on Nov 27, 2013



Written by  William F. Jasper | The New American
August 29, 2013

The annual meeting of central bankers in Jackson Hole, Wyoming, this past week (August 22-24), sponsored by the Federal Reserve, elicited a collective yawn from the establishment media. Since Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke had announced earlier that he would not be attending — the first time in 24 years a Fed chairman has missed the annual confab — most media reports downplayed the significance of the conference and focused on speculation over how soon the Fed might begin its announced “tapering” program (Will it be in September, December, or January?), and by how much (Will it be a reduction of $10 billion/month, or $15 billion, or $20 billion?). An even bigger diversion was the speculation over the anticipated departure of Bernanke from the Fed and who his replacement is likely to be — with Fed Vice Chairman Janet Yellen and former Treasury Secretary Lawrence Summers leading the short list of candidates.

No Watchdogs Allowed; Only Fed-friendly Media Lapdogs Admitted

However, with the global economy teetering on the brink and the world’s central bankers engaged, along with their commercial bank partners, in vastly expanding their powers and robbing their customers and taxpayers of trillions of dollars, it is easy to see why they would welcome the diversionary coverage provided by the dozen selected reporters (from Fox, Wall Street Journal, Reuters, AP, New York Times, Bloomberg, et al) who were admitted to the conference.

The Fed conference roster lists these privileged lapdogs as official “Media Attendees”:

Binyamin Appelbaum, correspondent, the New York Times

Peter Barnes, senior Washington correspondent, Fox Business Network

Steven K. Beckner, senior correspondent,  Market News International

Martin Crutsinger, correspondent, the Associated Press

Pedro da Costa, correspondent, Reuters

Robin B. Harding, U.S. economics editor, Financial Times

Nell Henderson, correspondent, the Wall Street Journal

Steve Liesman, senior economics reporter, CNBC

Victoria McGrane, correspondent, Dow Jones Newswires

Michael McKee, economics editor, Bloomberg TV

Neil Irwin, columnist, the Washington Post

Josh Zumbrun, reporter, Bloomberg News 

“They’re going to take money wherever they can”

Famed investor/author and commodities tycoon Jim Rogers, however, sounded a very different tune from the “nothing new happening, don’t worry, all is well” theme that underscored the MSM treatment of the secretive banker huddle in Wyoming, at the ranch/conference center developed by John D. Rockefeller early in the last century.

According to Rogers, the “be happy” message is camouflaging the fact that “They’re going to take money wherever they can. … They’re going to take our bank accounts and retirement accounts.” 

The “they” he refers to are the central bankers and their Insider commercial banker colleagues — and national governments, which serve as the collection agencies for the bankers. “This is the first time in recorded history all the banks are printing money at the same time. … This is the first time we’ve had massive debasement, and it’s going to end very badly no matter what they say,” Rogers said in a remote video interview with Greg Hunter of

“Whether they keep printing or stop printing money globally, it is going to end badly,” Rogers continued. “Banks are not going to be lending.  Financial markets are going to go down.  Currency markets are going to be in great turmoil.  It’s not going to be any fun.”  And if the money printing continues, Rogers says, “You’ve got bubble in some sectors, you have inflation, and then you have interest rates going up… and it’s a mess because printing money is artificial.  It’s never worked.”  As the economy slows down, Rogers predicts, “They’re going to take money wherever they can. … They’re going to take our bank accounts and retirement accounts.”  Rogers concludes by saying, “We’ve had perilous times, and it’s going to get worse. … It’s coming, be worried, be careful.”

Again, the “they” that Rogers is warning about taking your savings account, your pension, and your 401K are the very same members of the global theft cartel — banking and government Insiders — that the MSM lapdogs are holding up as the saviors of the global economic system.

IMF’s Lagarde: Central Banks are “Heroes” of Financial Crisis  

A condition of a journalist’s admission to the Fed’s highly prized soiree, it seems, is that he/she agree to function as a Fed propagandist, dutifully retailing the official narrative that central bankers are engaged in a great heroic effort to “stabilize” the faltering world economy, and that they deserve our unalloyed gratitude.

This was a major theme of International Monetary Fund (IMF) Managing Director Christine Lagarde, who told the assembled notables:

In many respects, central banks have been the heroes of the global financial crisis. Compared with conventional monetary policy, the unconventional monetary policies of the past few years have been bolder in ambition and larger in scale. These exceptional actions helped the world pull back from the precipice of another Great Depression.

“The challenge for today’s generation of policymakers is to rethink and reimagine how to get our economies back to work,” said Lagarde. “One of the most striking aspects of that has been the willingness of central banks in advanced economies to ‘dive into the deep end’ of the policymaking pool.”

Even more striking has been the supine servility with which the U.S. Congress and other national legislative bodies and executives have accepted these criminal usurpations of power by the central banks.

As Lagarde, Bernanke and their ilk “rethink and reimagine” the world, it is one in which they are totally unencumbered by constitutional, legal, and moral limits; they are at complete liberty to ‘dive into the deep end’ of the policymaking pool and craft whatever world they wish. Thus, Bernanke and his Fed colleagues simply decide on their own to begin “buying” $85 billion Treasury securities and mortgage backed securities (MBS) a month — with counterfeit money they’ve spun out of thin air. And, together with their global banking confreres, they shift hundreds of billions and even trillions of dollars into bailouts for European and U.S. banks.

Madame Lagarde, of course, is at the center of the ongoing global effort to “supersize” the IMF, that is, transforming it into a global Federal Reserve, but with even greater powers and completely unaccountable to Congress or any national government (see here, and here). As we reported last year, in a January 23, 2012 speech to the German Council on Foreign Relations, Lagarde called for the major member nations to pony up a trillion-dollar “firewall” slush fund for the IMF.

In addition to the many Federal Reserve officials and central bankers, this year’s Jackson Hole affair included the usual complement of insider economists and academics. Among those in attendance were:

Fahad Abdullah Almubarak, governor, Saudi Arabian Monetary Agency

Erdem Basçi, governor, Central Bank of the Republic of Turkey

Charles R. Bean, deputy governor, Bank of England

Marek Belka, president, National Bank of Poland

Alan S. Blinder, professor, Princeton University

Josef Bonnici, governor, Central Bank of Malta

Claudio Borio, deputy head of Monetary and Economic Department, Bank for International Settlements

Lael Brainard, under secretary for International Affairs, U.S. Department of the Treasury

James B. Bullard, president and chief executive officer, Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis

Marco Buti, director general, European Commission

Agustín Carstens, governor, Bank of Mexico

Stephen Cecchetti, economic adviser, Bank for International Settlements

Norman Chan, chief executive, Hong Kong Monetary Authority

Terrence J. Checki, executive vice president, Federal Reserve Bank of New York

Luc Coene, governor, National Bank of Belgium

Susan M. Collins, dean and professor, University of Michigan Ford School of Public Policy

Carlos da Silva Costa, governor, Bank of Portugal

Panicos O. Demetriades, governor, Central Bank of Cyprus

John Duca, vice president and senior policy advisor, Federal Reserve Bank of Dallas

William C. Dudley, president, Federal Reserve Bank of New York

Barry Eichengreen, professor, University of California, Berkeley

Martin Feldstein, professor of economics, Harvard University

Stanley Fischer, former governor, Bank of Israel

Donald L. Kohn, senior fellow, Brookings Institution

Arvind Krishnamurthy, professor, Northwestern University

Randall Kroszner, professor, University of Chicago

Alan Krueger, professor, Princeton University

Haruhiko Kuroda, governor, Bank of Japan

Christine Lagarde, managing director, International Monetary Fund

Sabine Lautenschlaeger, deputy president, Deutsche Bundesbank

John Taylor, professor, Stanford University

Linda Tesar, professor, University of Michigan

Christian Thimann, counsel to the Executive Board, European Central Bank

Prasarn Trairatvorakul, governor, Bank of Thailand

José Darío Uribe Escobar, governor, Central Bank of Colombia

Rodrigo Vergara, governor, Central Bank of Chile

Annette Vissing-Jorgensen, professor, University of California, Berkeley

Christopher J. Waller, senior vice president and director of research, Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis

Meredith Whitney, chief executive officer, Meredith Whitney Advisory Group, LLC

Janet Yellen, vice chairman, board of governors, Federal Reserve System

Kei-Mu Yi, senior vice president and director of research, Federal Reserve Bank of Minneapolis

Shenghui Zhang, chief representative, U.S. Office of the Peoples Bank of China

(For a complete official list of the conference attendees see here.)



By Greg Hunter’s 

August 26, 2013

Famed investor Jim Rogers says, “This is the first time in recorded history all the banks are printing money at the same time. . . .   This is the first time we’ve had massive debasement, and it’s going to end very badly no matter what they say.”  Rogers, who has written books on global investing, says, “Whether they keep printing or stop printing money globally, it is going to end badly.”  If money printing stops, Rogers contends, “Banks are not going to be lending.  Financial markets are going to go down.  Currency markets are going to be in great turmoil.  It’s not going to be any fun.”  And if the money printing continues, Rogers says, “You’ve got bubble in some sectors, you have inflation, and then you have interest rates going up.  Currency markets are in turmoil, and it’s a mess because printing money is artificial.  It’s never worked.”  As the economy slows down, Rogers predicts, “They’re going to take money wherever they can. . . . They’re going to take our bank accounts and retirement accounts.”  Rogers concludes by saying, “We’ve had perilous times, and it’s going to get worse. . . It’s coming, be worried, be careful.”  Join Greg Hunter as he goes One-on-One with Jim Rogers, author of “Street Smarts, Adventures on the Road and in the Markets.”




The plan for the government to confiscate your money is in place under the Dodd–Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act

by grtv
Published on Aug 28, 2013

People think that money is safe in the big banks because the FDIC will protect the deposits. This assumption is not based on the facts.

This video will show official government documents that describe the plans for confiscating deposits when, (not if) the big banks fail. Individual, as well as public funds from municipal, university, and county deposits are at serious risk. YOUR taxpayer money WILL disappear in the next crisis!

Public officials in charge of taxpayer funds need to be aware of the dangers here. The loss of taxpayer funds and the inability to meet payrolls and obligations will certainly prompt an immediate and forceful response by the government.








A well-placed Washington insider with direct access to the White House has reported that Obama’s economic team is being dragged in a number of different directions at the very moment that the momentum in favor of Glass-Steagall is reaching a break-out point. The source acknowledged that there is a “real brawl” over Glass-Steagall, and it is building steam despite the August recess. The White House meeting on Monday to press ahead with Dodd-Frank as a buffer against Glass-Steagall ran up against one very big problem: Unless there is a “fundamental change in the intent behind Dodd Frank” and a genuine campaign is launched to break up the too-big-to-fail banks, the momentum for Glass- Steagall will go unchecked. The source made it clear that there is “no way” that the Obama White House will go after the big banks. Even the flurries of prosecutions against JP Morgan Chase are strictly civil and will do nothing to even slow the growth of the Big Six behemoth banks.

Obama and COS Dennis McDonough.

The brawl over who will replace Bernanke at the Fed has also become a major distraction for Obama’s economic team. The anti-Summers forces include some important figures and groupings within the Democratic Party. Some leading backers of Janet Yellen are former members of the Volcker-led outside economic advisory group to Obama.

The White House problems are compounded by recent rotten economic data, including the fact that the purchasing power of American households has collapsed by 4.4 percent since Obama came into office. Other big distractions include the chaos surrounding the implementation of Obamacare, which is eating up an enormous amount of time for some of the key White House economic advisors. And everyone at the White House is in a panic over the fact that Sen. Tom Coburn (R-Ok.) has publicly declared that impeachment is on the table. Furthermore, the continuing revelations around illegal NSA spying on American citizens are rapidly becoming Obama’s “Katrina moment.” After he failed to respond to the Hurricane Katrina tragedy, President George W. Bush instantly became a lame duck less than a year into his second term. Obama is in the same position but even worse.

The source concluded that all of these factors are dragging Obama’s top economic aides in different directions at the very moment that they are under enormous Wall Street and London pressure to shut down Glass-Steagall.



US national debt can travel from the earth to the sun and back a stunning 83 times.

JS Kim
August 26, 2013

The first signs of hyperinflation have arrived. As I will explain later in this article, it began last week with the meeting of POTUS Obama and his most supportive lobby, the banking industry. Just a few months into Obama’s first term as US President in early 2009, I penned an article, “8 Reasons Why the Obama Administration Will Not Solve this Crisis by the End of 2009.” Although the title of that article title sounds absurd today, idol worship was so high of Obama immediately following his election not only in the US but all across Europe, that media commentators across the world were implying, and sometimes matter-of-factly stating, that Obama would be well on his way to solving the global monetary crisis by the end of his first year as POTUS. In direct opposition to the media love affair with Obama, shortly after his election in 2008, I objectively studied Obama’s support of a massive bailout plan for banks in his first months of service and his freshly minted appointments of Timothy Geithner, William Daley, William Donaldson, Robert Rubin, Roger Ferguson and Paul Volcker to his economic advisory board and key cabinet positions. Based upon my findings, I concluded that beyond a shadow of a doubt, banking cronyism would expand, multiply, and go unprosecuted
under Obama’s watch.

The Obama administration has given a lot of lip service with zero follow-through to prosecution of criminal banking behavior, the most recent being AG Eric Holder’s following very empty promise: “Let me be very, very, very clear…if we find a bank or a financial institution that has done something wrong…those cases will be brought” (emphasis not only mine but Holder’s as well!) Unfortunately since that time, though numerous indisputable cases of banking criminal behavior have been uncovered and presented to Holder, Holder has shown no spine or willingness to enforce his prior promise. As a consequence of the refusal of the top attorney in the United States to enforce the rule of law and to prosecute industry-wide criminal banking activity, the first signs of hyperinflation have arrived.

The real national debt, despite having been falsely frozen at the falsely advertised figure of $16.699 trillion for more than 90 consecutive days for no other reason than it has reached the designated limit, clocks in at a whopping $220 trillion if you include all unfunded, off-balance liabilities such as Medicare and Social Security (Source: Economist Laurence Kotlikoff).

original artwork above courtesy of @williambanzai7

Furthermore, this figure of true national debt does not even feel obscene in relative terms once you consider that the Alan Greenspan/Robert Rubin/Bill Clinton administration let the global derivative market run unregulated in the name of multi-billion dollar short-term profits to bankers and irresponsibly explode into the unresolvable $1,200,000,000,000,000 to $1,500,000,000,000,000 market that exists today. Let it be known for the record that CFTC Chairman Brooksley Born urgently lobbied for strict regulations of the global banking derivatives markets and warned Summers and Greenspan that letting bankers exploit derivatives for profit at the expense of sound banking principles would create the very crisis we are suffering today. What was Born’s reward for such a prescient and wise prediction? A cussing out and screaming fest courtesy of Larry Summers (from Born’s own testimoney) and a forced resignation by Summers and Greenspan.  Yes, the same Larry Summers that President Obama has adamantly defended and is Obama’s first choice to supplant Ben Bernanke as the next chairman of the Rothschilds Private Bank (aka the Federal Reserve).

Neither the government lies about the the unchanging nature of the “official” national debt for over 90 consecutive days now nor the government lies about the true scope of the national debt is stunning. What is stunning, however, is just how gigantic is the US National Debt when you start putting the figure in relatable terms. No one really understands how incredibly large is a sum of $1 billion, let alone a trillion or a couple hundred trillion, so it helps to illustrate the absurdity of this unresolvable debt by painting this debt in a different light.  Let’s assume for argument’s sake that the estimate of $220 trillion of real US national debt is too aggressive (although Kotlikoff insists this figure is accurate) and counter estimates of $100 trillion are too conservative. Let’s split the difference and say the true US national debt is $160 trillion dollars. If one were to lay $1 bills side by side, a current US National Debt of $160 trillion would reach from the earth to the moon 239,000 miles away not 100 times, not 500 times, not 1000 times, not even 10,000 times, but 32,358 TIMES AND BACK. Our national debt would travel to the sun 93 million miles away AND BACK, not just once, not just twice, not 10 times, not even an unfathomable 50 times, but EIGHTY-THREE complete round trips! Explained a third way, if you were driving the fastest commercial car in the world (as concluded by Top Gear test drivers; make sure you check out the link here to the awe-inspiring Pagani Huayra test drive), the Pagani Huayra, continuously at its top speed of 372 kms/hour and never, for not even one-second, let up on this top speed and never stopped to change the tires, it would take you until the year 9643 (or more than 7,629 YEARS) before you would pass the last dollar bill of US national debt laid out side by side in 1$ bills.  Finally, if you were an alien capable of flying your UFO at the speed of light (670.6 MILLION miles per hour), you would not pass the last dollar of US debt until 23 hours, 1 minute, and 14 seconds later (if the entire debt were laid out side by side in $1 bills)! These FACTS should alert any reasonable logical man, woman and child that massive inflation is the fate of the USD in future years.

This simple fact should also alert you to why so many Asians have been buying gold like it is going out of style ever since the April 12, 2013 banker raid on the paper gold derivatives markets, and why I find it so amusing that some Western financial journalists still question whether or not the latest surge in gold and silver prices is just a “dead-cat” bounce. It is quite obvious that journalists that write about gold and silver tanking again have never sspent one minute inside any Asian country, especially during the last five months, where I have personally witnessed manic physical (NOT paper) gold buying in Singapore, Hong Kong, China and Thailand. While true, that the global fiat currency breakdown and real gold and silver money takeoff will be disorderly and very volatile, there is no question that we are still in the midst of a massive gold and silver bull run. And what happened on April 12? US President Barack Obama held a closed-door, off-limits meeting in the White House with the following 15 globalist bankers:

Lloyd Blankfein, Chairman and CEO Goldman Sachs
Jacques Brand, CEO Deutsche Bank
Michael Corbat, Chief Executive Officer Citigroup
Jamie Dimon, Chairman, CEO and President J.P. Morgan Chase
Sergio Ermotti, CEO UBS
James Gorman, Chairman and CEO Morgan Stanley
Gerald Hassell, Chairman and CEO Bank of New York Mellon Corporation
Jay Hooley, Chairman, President and CEO State Street Corporation
Abby Johnson, President, Fidelity Financial Services, Fidelity Investments
Steve Kandarian, Chairman of the Board, President and CEO Metlife
Brian Moynihan, President and CEO Bank of America/Merrill Lynch
John Strangfeld, CEO, Prudential
John Stumpf, Chairman, President and CEO Wells Fargo
Jim Weddle, Managing Partner, Edward Jones
Bob Benmosche, President and CEO American International Group

Just hours after this meeting, the bankers flooded the gold derivative markets with 400 tonnes of paper (non-existent physical) gold, and the infamous banker gold price raid of 2013 was on its way. Last week, on August 19, 2013, Obama met with the following banking industry regulators:

Securities and Exchange Commission’s Jo White
Commodity Futures Trading Commission’s Gary Gensler
Consumer Financial Protection Bureau’s Richard Cordray
Rothschilds Private Bank’s (U.S. Federal Reserve) Ben Bernanke
Office of the Comptroller of the Currency’s Thomas J. Curry
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation’s Martin J. Gruenberg
Federal Housing Finance Agency’s Edward DeMarco
The National Credit Union Administration’s Debbie Matz
US Treasury Secretary Jack Lew

Immediately after this meeting was announced, fierce speculation that gold was about to get slammed yet again predominated internet gold forums.  We immediately countered that speculation on our twitter feed by suggesting that this meeting was NOT about slamming gold prices but about fowarding the agenda to seize assets from within the US global banking system, “Cyprus” style, to recapitalize failing US banks.




Sure enough, not only did gold and silver fail to get heavily slammed after this meeting as many people were worried about, but both have since risen considerably higher in the interim. Finally, a few days later, the Rothschilds Private Bank (known in some circles as the US Federal Reserve) announced that they were going to begin cutting back on QE measures by $15 billion next month, eventually ending QE measures all together by June 2014.

Besides my intense skepticism of this claim, and I would need proof that the Rothschilds Private Bank is actually cutting back QE without any concealed backdoor mechanisms to continue QE, there was one hugely notable development in the gold and silver markets. Normally anytime, Ben Bernanke whispered even a hint or suggestion of QE tapering, the gold and silver markets would crash on such an announcement. However, this time, the mass media reported not a peep about the massively significant decoupling of gold price behavior from QE tapering announcements, and the subsequent continued rise in gold price.

For once, gold price behavior reacted intelligently to the insanity of Central Banking monetary policy and it ignored the propaganda of Central Bankers and continued to rise.  Why is this development so significant in my opinion? It is massively significant because it signals a further breakdown of confidence in the monetary system.  Every other instance that Chairman Bernanke even hinted about tapering QE, it gave the Federal Reserve and their puppet bullion banks an opportunity to suppress the price of gold that they successfully relished.

This time around, I don’t believe that their propaganda was any less effective than all the prior times Bernanke falsely warned about QE tapering. So what has changed? People no longer care what Bernanke and other bankers say about QE because their confidence in fiat currencies, as illustrated by the largest single day drop of the Indian rupee last week, is starting to finally, and justifiably crack. And the first sign of a loss of confidence in fiat currencies and a vote for the solid valuation of gold (and silver) money is the first sign of potential hyperinflation ahead.



by Brandon Smith |

August 29, 2013

For years now at Alt-Market (and I have carefully outlined the most likely path of collapse to take place within the U.S., and a vital part of that analysis included economic destabilization caused by a loss of the dollar’s world reserve status and petro-status.  I have also always made clear that this fiscal crisis event would not occur in the midst of a political vacuum.  The central banks and international financiers that created our ongoing and developing disaster are NOT going to allow the destruction of the American economy, the dollar, or global markets without a cover event designed to hide their culpability.  They need something big.  Something so big that the average citizen is overwhelmed with fear and confusion.  A smoke and mirrors magic trick so raw and soul shattering it leaves the very population of the Earth mesmerized and helpless to understand the root of the nightmare before them.  The elites need a fabricated Apocalypse.

Enter Syria…

I have been warning about the Syrian trigger point for a very long time.  Syria’s mutual defense pact with Iran, its strong ties to Russia, the Russian naval base off its coast, the advanced Russian weaponry in it’s arsenal, its proximity to vulnerable oil shipping lanes, all make the nation a perfect catalyst for a global catastrophe.  The civil war in Syria is already spreading into neighboring countries like Iraq, Jordan, and Lebanon, and if one looks at the facts objectively, the entire war is a product of covert action on the part of the U.S. and its allies.

The U.S. trained, armed, and funded the insurgency using Al Qaeda operatives.  Saudi Arabia has sent funding and arms as well.  Israel has aided the rebels using air strikes within Syria’s borders (even though this means that the Israeli government is essentially helping their supposed mortal enemies).  This war would NOT be taking place today without the express efforts of the West.  Period.

If one takes more than a brief examination of the Syrian insurgency, they would find an organization of monsters.  Wretched amoral wetwork ghouls whose crimes have been thoroughly documented, including the mass executions of unarmed captured soldiers, the torture and beheading of innocent civilians, the mutilation and cannibalism of dead bodies, and the institution of theological tyranny on a terrified populace.  The U.S. created and unleashed these demons, and now, we the people are being asked by the White House to support them through force of arms.

But what is the goal here…?

The goal, I believe, is to utterly transform the world’s political, economic, and social systems.  The goal is to generate intense fear; fear that can be used as capital to buy, as the globalists call it, a “new world order”.  Syria is the first domino in a long chain of calamities; what the Rand Corporation sometimes refers to as a “linchpin”.  As I write this, the Obama Administration is moving naval and ground forces into position and clamoring in a painfully pathetic fashion to convince the American public that 90% of us are “wrong” and that a strike on Syria is, in fact, necessary.  It appears that the establishment is dead set on starting this chain reaction and accelerating the global collapse.  So, if a strike does occur, what can we expect to happen over the next few years?  Here is a rundown…

1) Many U.S. allies will refrain from immediate participation in an attack on Syria.  Obama will continue unilaterally (or with the continued support of Israel and Saudi Arabia), placing even more focus on the U.S. as the primary cause of the crisis.

2) Obama will attempt to mitigate public outcry by limiting attacks to missile strikes, but these strikes will be highly ineffective compared to previous wars in Iraq and Afghanistan.

3) A no fly zone will be established, but the U.S. navy will seek to stay out of range of high grade Russian missile technology in the hands of Syria, and this will make response time to the Syrian Air Force more difficult.  Expect much higher American naval and air force casualties compared to Iraq and Afghanistan.

4) Iran will immediately launch troops and arms in support of Syria.  Syria will become a bewildering combat soup of various fighting forces battling on ideological terms, rather than over pure politics and borders.  Battles will spread into other countries, covertly and overtly, much like during Vietnam.

5) Israel will probably be the first nation to send official ground troops into Syria (and likely Iran), citing a lack of effectiveness of U.S. airstrikes.  American troops will follow soon after.

6) Iran will shut down the Straight of Hormuz sinking multiple freighters in the narrow shipping lane and aiming ocean skimming missiles at any boats trying to clear the wreckage.  Oil exports through the straight of Hormuz will stop for months, cutting 20% of the world’s oil supply overnight.

7) The Egyptian civil war, now underway but ignored by the mainstream, will explode due to increased anger over U.S. presence in Syria.  The Suez Canal will become a dangerous shipping option for oil exporters.  Many will opt to travel around the Horn of Africa, adding two weeks to shipping time and increasing the cost of the oil carried.

8) Saudi Arabia will see an uprising of insurgency that has been brewing under the surface for years.

9) Gasoline prices will skyrocket.  I am predicting a 75%-100% increase in prices within two-three months of any strike on Syria.

10) Travel will become difficult if not impossible with high gasoline costs.  What little of our economy was still thriving on vacation dollars will end.  Home purchases will fall even further than before because of the extreme hike in travel expenses required for families to move.

11) Russia will threaten to limit or cut off all natural gas exports to the EU if they attempt to join with the U.S. in aggression against Syria.  The EU will comply due to their dependency on Russian energy.

12) Russia will position naval forces in the Mediterranean to place pressure on the U.S.  I feel the possibility of Russia initiating direct confrontation with the U.S. is limited, mainly because countries like Russia and China do not need to engage the U.S. through force of arms in order to strike a painful blow.

13) China and Russia will finally announce their decision to drop the dollar completely as the world reserve currency.  A process which already began back in 2005, and which global banks have been fully aware of for years.

14) Because of China’s position as the number one exporter and importer in the world, many nations will follow suit in dumping the dollar in bilateral trade.  The dollar’s value will implode.  China, Russia, and the war in Syria will be blamed, and global banks including the Federal Reserve will be ignored as the true culprits.

15) The combination of high energy prices and a devaluing dollar will strike retail prices hard.  Expect a doubling of prices on all goods.  Look for many imported goods to begin disappearing from shelves.

16) Homelessness will expand exponentially as cuts to welfare programs, including food stamps, are made inevitable.  However, welfare will not disappear, it will merely be “adjusted” to fit different goals.  The homeless themselves will be treated like criminals.  The roaming bands of jobless drifters common during the Great Depression will not exist during a modern crisis.  State and Federal agencies will pursue an “out of sight, out of mind” policy towards the indigent, forcing them into “aid shelters” or other bureaucratic contraptions designed to conditioning the homeless to accept refugee status, making them totally dependent on federal scraps, but also prisoners on federally designated camps.

17) Terrorist attacks (false flag or otherwise) will spread like wildfire.  Israel is highly susceptible.  The U.S. may see a string of attacks, including cyber attacks on infrastructure.  Syria and it’s supporters will be blamed regardless of evidence.  The White House will begin broad institution of authoritarian powers, including continuity of government executive orders, the Patriot Act, the NDAA, etc.

18) Martial Law may not even be officially declared, but the streets of America will feel like martial law none the less.

19) False paradigms will flood the mainstream as the establishment seeks to divide American citizens.  The conflict will be painted as Muslim against Christian, black against white, poor against rich (but not the super rich elites, of course).  Liberty Movement activists will be labeled “traitors” for “undermining government credibility” during a time of crisis.  The Neo-Conservatives will place all blame on Barack Obama.  Neo-Liberals will blame conservatives as “divisive”.  Liberty Movement activists will point out that both sides are puppets of the same international cabal, and be labeled “traitors” again.  The establishment will try to coax Americans into turning their rage on each other.

20) The Homeland Security apparatus will be turned completely inward, focusing entirely on “domestic enemies”.  The domain of the TSA will be expanded onto highways and city streets.  Local police will be fully federalized.  Northcom will field soldiers within U.S. border to deal with more resistant quarters of the country.  Totalitarianism will become the norm.

What Can We Do Right Now?

The level of collapse, I suspect, will not be total.  The government is not going to disappear, rather, it will become more dominant in its posture.  Certain sections of the country will be maintained while others fall apart.  The IMF will move in to “help” the ailing U.S. economy by tying funding to the SDR (Special Drawing Rights).  America’s economy will be absorbed by the IMF.  Constitutional protections will be fully erased in the name of reestablishing “law and order”, with the promise that the loss of our civil liberties is “only temporary”.

If the U.S. strikes Syria, and refuses to disengage, these things WILL happen.  So, the next question is what can we do about it?

1) Given that this crisis is going to be riding a wave of extremely high energy prices, every single Liberty Movement activist (and every American for that matter) should be stockpiling energy reserves.  Motor oil, gasoline (with gas saver), diesel fuel, propane, etc. should be at the top of your list right now.  A generator should be next.  Prices are only going to rise from here on out.  Buy reserves now, before it is too late.

2) Everyone in the Liberty Movement should have at least minimal solar power capability.  A couple of 100 watt panels, an inverter, a charge controller, and two-four deep cycle batteries can be had for under $1000.  You may not be able to run your house on it, but you can at least charge important electronics, run a well pump, run some lights, a security system, etc.

3) The internet as we know it will no longer exist.  The White House will apply preexisting executive orders on U.S. communications to restrict internet use, or, a convenient cyber attack will take place, opening the door for federal controls.  The web will likely still operate, but only as a shell of its former greatness.  Certain sites and email providers will be designated “safe”, while others will be designated “unsafe”.  This leaves a gaping hole in our society’s ability to communicate information quickly and efficiently, and, it removes the alternative media from the picture.  The best solution I can present for this problem is Ham Radio, which is very difficult for the establishment to shut down.  Ham Radio communication chains could take the place of the internet as a lower-tech but useful means of spreading information across the country.  In the next few months, EVERYONE in the Liberty Movement should have a Ham Radio set, or handheld model, and they should know how to use it.

4) Harden your home during the next few months.  Place security bars on windows, and replace weak doors with steel core doors. An internal lock bar will still frustrate entry by those who might blast hinges.  Add a fire suppression system for good measure.  This might sound like overkill, but if you want to be able to sleep at night during such an event, you must make your home your castle.  No one should be able to enter your house without your permission.

5) Learn a useful trade right now.  If you don’t already know how to produce or fix a necessary item or commodity, take the next six months to learn how.  If you don’t know how to teach a valuable skill, get to work.  Barter and trade will become the primary method of economy during a dollar collapse. Make sure you are sought after within your local economy.

6) Cache items before winter begins.  Do not assume you will be able to stay on your homestead indefinitely.  There are no guarantees during collapse.  A wildfire could reduce your neighborhood to ashes in hours.  Your home could be overrun.  Make sure you have secondary supplies in a safe location just in case.

7) Find two friends (or more) right now that are willing to coordinate with you in the event that the worst happens.  This means mutual aid and defense.  This means predetermined arrangements for supplies, communications, meeting spots, and security.  Do it now.  Do not wait until our situation worsens.

Buy six months worth of food over the course of the next two months.  Bulk food, freeze dried, MRE’s, whatever.  Just buy it.  Have a lot of food already?  I don’t care.  Buy six more months of supplies now.  You’ll thank me later.

9) Cultivate nutrient rich soil before winter begins.  Buy a truckload of planting soil and manure and create a garden space if you have not already.  Purchase extensive seed storage.  Compile books on growing methods.

10) Gauge the temperament of your neighborhood.  If all of your neighbors are mindless brain eating zombies, then perhaps it would be better to share a home with a prepared family member in another region now.  If not, then start a neighborhood watch.  Two or three families working together is far stronger than only one, and can change the temperament of an entire block of homes.

11) Train for tactical movement over the next three months.  Learn how to move, shoot, and communicate as a team.  Learn your strengths and weaknesses today or suffer the consequences tomorrow.

12) Prepare yourself mentally for conflict and self defense.  Sign up for at least six months of hand to hand defense training.  Learn how to deal with the mental and emotional strain of another person trying to harm you.  Get used to the idea, because where we’re headed, someone, at some point, will probably want to do you in.  Always maintain your conscience and your principles, but never allow yourself to become a victim.

The Tension Is Palpable

As I have said many times before, a fight is coming.  There is no way around it.  But this fight must be fought intelligently, and we must never forget who the REAL enemy is.

If a revolution ensues and Obama loses control, the establishment could simply trigger a Neo-Con or military coup in order to placate the masses and fool Constitutionalists into believing they have been saved.  Useless solutions will be presented to the people, including new leadership composed of more old guard elitists, a disastrous Constitutional Convention, or limited secession (which will never be honored by the establishment anyway).  The purpose of these false solutions will be to fool you into relaxing your vigilance, distracting you from seeking justice against globalist organizations, or, to redirect your energies away from self sufficient communities, counties, and states, ready to dispel aggressive establishment elements.

Beware of those who grasp too readily for leadership over you.  Real leaders stand as teachers, not oligarchs, and rarely do they take on the role without considerable reservations.  Never trust anyone who does not immediately back their promises with tangible action.  And, never forget that we fight not just for the removal of one particular tyrant, but for Constitutional liberty itself.  One must follow the other, or there has been no victory.

Though it is depressingly difficult to see in times like these, there is indeed good in this world.  There are ideals, and aspirations, and visions, and loves worth standing up for, worth fighting for, and worth dying for.  There is still a future worth striving for at the end of the long night.  There are dreams here, in the hearts of men, worth realizing.  We do not necessarily battle for what humanity is, but for what we have the potential to become.  The tides of society may shift and storm, the chaos may become unbearable, and the world may tear apart until it is unrecognizable.   The agents of dominion believe they are the only constant, but there is another.  In time, the dim pale of tyranny will always break in the light of freedom’s resolute.  Get ready, honorable Liberty Movement, our work has just begun.





By Lisa Rein, The Washington Post

August 28, 2013

A wave of retirements by senior federal employees has begun rolling across the government as aging baby boomers who held on to their jobs during the economic downturn are increasingly calling it quits.

With retirement accounts on the rebound, many veteran workers are finding little reason to remain in government, especially at a time when agency budgets are being slashed, workers are being furloughed and morale is tumbling.

The number of executive branch employees retiring this fiscal year, which ends next month, is on track to be nearly twice the total who retired in 2009, according to government figures. And the rate looks certain to accelerate. In 2000, about 94,000 people age 60 and older worked for the government. Last year, the number was 262,000.

The exits are helping to bring down the size of the federal payroll and — where funding is available — could afford agencies the chance to hire younger workers with crucial skills. The retirement of clerks could clear the way for experts in cybersecurity and information technology.

But among those leaving are people with specific expertise that cannot easily be replaced — for instance, nuclear physicists at the Energy Department and a large cohort of air traffic controllers who were hired three decades ago. And with most hiring on hold, the departures are already reshaping agencies that cannot replace most of the retirees or mentor and train new executives.

In some corners of government, the challenge is acute. By 2016, 42 percent of the Department of Housing and Urban Development workforce will be eligible to retire. At the Small Business Administration, it’s 44 percent.

There is no mandatory retirement age for most civilian federal employees. But retiring is looking ever more attractive, employees say, with their salaries frozen for three years by Congress and public service demonized by many politicians.

“It finally got to the point where I got disillusioned,” said Richard Swensen, 60, who retired from the Agriculture Department last year after 38 years. “You get weary of the bureaucrat-bashing.”

* * *

Today’s federal civil servants are much grayer than they were a decade ago. Their average age is 47, four years older than the overall workforce.

Retirements have fluctuated since the mid-1990s. The numbers surged when the Clinton administration offered early retirement incentives as part of a push to “reinvent government.” After the terror attacks of Sept. 11, 2011, the government ramped up its hiring for national security positions, and federal payrolls swelled.

Baby boomers began trickling out in about 2005, but the financial crisis and deep recession that hit a couple of years later discouraged many from leaving. Departures from the executive branch bottomed out in 2009. They have been increasing ever since and are on track to exceed 80,000 retirements — about 5 percent of the workforce — by the end of the fiscal year, according to figures from the Office of Personnel Management. It’s already the largest outflow in at least two decades.

“The [stock] markets have recovered,” said Gregory Parham, assistant secretary for administration at the Agriculture Department. “And many people are thinking, ‘This is a good time to go.’ ”

In addition, about 34,000 Postal Service employees have retired in this fiscal year through July, with many taking early-out incentives. Add to that swelling numbers of younger federal workers who have been exiting the government, discouraged by public disdain, furloughs and budget austerity.

By 2016, more than a third of the federal workforce will be eligible to retire, according to the Government Accountability Office, which has put the pending loss of so many experienced workers on its “high-risk” list of management challenges for government.

Among them will be nearly three in five senior executives and almost half the ranks of top managers.

* * *

Swensen kept working at the Agriculture Department four years past the day he was eligible to retire. He would have stayed longer, he said, though his long commute from Catonsville, Md., was tiring him. But with bills pending in Congress to change the way retirement annuities are calculated, Swenson said he was convinced his earnings could soon be based on his highest five earning years instead of the highest three, as they are now. That would cost him: “It would have made a few thousand dollars difference in my check,” he said.

In interviews, recently retired senior executives from across the government offered a range of reasons for their decisions to leave. Most cited the pay freeze, the public’s negative opinion about federal workers and government spending cuts, which have resulted in furloughs, less overtime and a larger workload for many.

Craig Charles retired last year at 49 after a 25-year career in customs and immigration enforcement in Kansas City. He said he left the Immigration and Customs Enforcement agency “very unhappy,” in part because of frustration with inexperienced political appointees who were in charge. Also, he hadn’t had a raise in three years, “and that was getting pretty old.” And as a manager in charge of air operations, budget cuts weighed on him.

“Everybody was under the constraints of sequestration and a lack of money,” he said. “It was constant scrambling for the budget.”

Peter Henry retired from the Department of Veterans Affairs in 2011 after working there for 41 years and 11 months. He had run two hospitals for veterans in the Blacks Hills of South Dakota and received a pair of prestigious awards for high-performing senior employees, the last in 2010. But amid criticism in Congress over federal pay, his supervisors told him to keep the $12,000 bonus he won a secret.

“It was like, ‘You will be shot if anybody discovers you got this,’ ” Henry, 66, recalled.

This year, the Obama administration eliminated the awards, and most bonuses for top managers.

“I certainly didn’t want to be part of being embarrassed and ashamed of what I did for a living,” Henry said. “It was a very honorable profession.”

With no government-wide plan in place to deal with projected retirements, individual agencies have been making their own preparations, and the GAO has found alarming inconsistences.

Angela Bailey, the Office of Personnel Management’s chief human capital officer, said it’s crucial for every agency to put a priority on training up-and-coming managers. “No matter what your budget is, you’ve got to set aside dollars to invest in the current workforce to make sure they’re operationally ready to succeed into leadership positions.”

But to achieve the 5 percent budget cuts required by sequestration, almost every agency made reductions in training and hiring. Many zeroed them out.

Some agencies have done a much better job of planning for retirements than others. NASA, for instance, gets high marks from personnel experts for reinvigorating its recruitment campaign. Engineers who can design and develop unmanned rockets are in demand, replacing the flight engineers and payload specialists who worked on shuttles.

The Department of Housing and Urban Development, meanwhile, has come under repeated criticism from GAO auditors for its haphazard planning. The agency’s most recent plan for hiring, training and developing talent expired in 2009. The GAO said in March that the lack of planning is jeopardizing the department’s mission of promoting affordable housing.

A HUD official said that department officials are responding to the criticism by ramping up their planning for staffing vacant positions — but that not every opening can be filled.

“Maybe people had one thing in their portfolio before,” Karen Newton Cole, deputy chief human capital officer, said. “We now need to train them to have two or three things.”

To encourage seasoned employees to stay on the job, Congress approved a “phased retirement” policy 18 months ago. For the first time, retirees could continue working half-time while they receive a partial annuity. In return, they would mentor and train potential successors.

The rules are still awaiting approval.





by Douglas J. Hagmann

Some might be surprised to learn that the fate of America’s economy has already been determined, verified and announced by the Obama White House. Yet, it has received scant attention from the corporate media. In 2011, economist Kyle Bass interviewed a senior member of the Obama administration about its planned solutions for fixing the US economy and trade deficit [i].

Among the questions he asked was about U.S. exports and wages, but the question itself was not nearly as important as the response he received from this senior administration official. In fact, this single, seven word response clarifies everything, explains everything, and leaves little else to discuss: “We’re just going to kill the dollar.”

There it is, the entire agenda in one short sentence. It explains everything we’ve been seeing domestically and globally. That one statement makes every other question irrelevant, or otherwise answers all economic questions and explains everything. Nothing else matters. I urge you to ponder that statement and all that it implies. Doing so will provide you with the clarity to understand not only what is taking place today, but what is yet to come.

It is important to note the specificity of the word “kill.” Stated in the active voice, it means an unambiguously intentional and deliberate act. The murder of our national currency, the United States Dollar (USD), is the ultimate agenda to be implemented under Obama. To “kill” our national currency will subvert the United States and destroy it from within. This begs a number of questions, including what type of Americans would actually have, as their objective, the destruction of our national currency? To whom do they hold their allegiance, if not to the American people whose life’s work as well as the toil of our ancestors is represented in the form of wealth held in U.S. dollars? Does this make any sense to us, as Americans? The answer of course is “no.”

By its very definition, to kill our national currency is an act of high treason by those engaged in this activity. It undermines the very sovereignty and survival of our nation, and will have a life-changing impact on every citizen in the U.S. It will also impact every nation and the people of every nation on the planet, as the USD is presently the world’s reserve currency. It is an act that should result in the filing of criminal charges against the conspirators, a trial of their peers and if convicted, a death sentence. It’s that serious.

According to my source, we are past the point of no return. We will not be able to stop what is coming, but must be wise enough to prepare and “get out of the way.” The murder plot involving the death of the dollar did not begin with Obama, but he and other conspirators have accelerated the plans, plots and schemes for its demise.

The ultimate objective is to implement an international currency in tandem with a system of global governance. The problem is that most people are not thinking large enough, nor do they understand the magnitude of the lie. They are not seeing the larger picture as their focus is diverted elsewhere. For example, they focus on various tentacles of the octopus such as the gun confiscation initiative, the DHS armament acquisitions and economic woes as independent and unrelated events. They are not.

Meanwhile, others continue to adhere to, or even perpetuate the dual party meme of governance, holding dearly to the notion that there is a practical difference between the Republican and Democrat parties. Have we not seen sufficient evidence that they are now of one party acting in concert with each other? They cannot see the collusion and backroom deals, and continue to hope that the next election will finally change the unchangeable continuity of agenda.

Most of the elected officials are onboard with the subjugation of the United States to a global system of governance. Some are actively facilitating this agenda, while others are making nominal objections on the stage of political theater while hoping to earn a seat at the global table. It’s entertainment for the globalists, distraction of the masses, and diversionary fodder for the talking heads in the media.

America has become a captured operation – captured from within. Think of the Vichy French, internal collaboration with the enemy, or softening the ground for a full takeover from within. The takeover of America has already happened, the collaborators have already been installed, and we are now on a path to complete subjugation of a larger global system of governance. If you continue to doubt this, how else would you explain the numerous examples of our dual-party governmental acquiescence of self destruction?

Those who are pleased about the new record setting stock-market highs and various other manipulated statistics that indicate our economy is improving will be the most vocal critics of this report and who will attempt to discredit the validity of the information offered here. The more intellectually astute will look beyond the statistics offered for mass consumption not only to identify the deliberately manipulated data, but to understand what is actually driving these false hopes, figures and data. It is a magic show, and many are still captivated by the magicians’ many diversions, failing to realize that we are engaged in a global war while being simultaneously hobbled by enemy infiltrators from within.

One reason we are seeing new stock market highs is the rush to the dollar from other currencies, especially in the Eurozone. Another reason is the monetization of our debt by the Federal Reserve, despite the previous denials of Ben Bernanke and others.

Simply put, the plan by the globalists, or the central bankers and those behind them, is to create this rush to the USD like passengers from sinking ships to lifeboats. Once the lifeboats are filled to capacity, they will be sunk, and the United States Dollar will be completely worthless. As in such a scenario, many will not make it. Many will die from what is coming. The level of evil behind this plan is incomprehensible to the normal human mind.

As I detailed in my multiple reports about Benghazi, we are at war with Russia. After removing Qaddafi from power in Libya, the Obama-Clinton black-ops plan was immediately put into action. Benghazi was the logistics hub for arming the anti-Assad terrorists by our own State Department covert operatives who were shipping millions of tons of weapons to Syria via Turkey and other staging areas. Russia was aware of our actions, and through the attack at the CIA operations center in Benghazi by proxy forces, exposed this operation to the world while putting a stop to this operation. It seems that everyone except the Western media reported what had taken place.

The “dirty little secret” that explains why we have not been told the truth about Benghazi is quite simple. The efforts to overthrow Assad from power are continuing, except the arms and munitions shipments are now originating primarily from Croatia. Overthrowing Assad would pose a direct threat to Russia, both militarily and economically. Are we to expect Russia’s Putin to simply accept this without response? No. So what is Russia doing to subvert our efforts? He is waging war against America, striking at the weak underbelly of our economy which is the “oil backed” dollar as identified in Michael Reagan’s article, Building on a Kernel of Truth.

Sadly, the Obama regime is doing nothing to protect us from this asymmetrical war. It’s as if they are allowing it to take place.

Although it was reported in The New York Times, few have paid attention to last week’s meeting between Chinese President Xi Jinping and Russian President Vladimir Putin in Moscow, but it was an extremely important event in terms of the planned murder of the U.S. dollar. An alliance is being forged between Russia and China to replace the USD as the reserve currency, already severely weakened by the policies of those in power, with a gold backed currency. Russia and China are hoarding gold to levels never before seen, while the U.S. issues worthless paper and digital currency backed by… nothing, save for the “oil-backed” scenario.

While reports do exist that cite the hoarding of gold by China and Russia, they are purposely under reporting their collective reserves. Meanwhile, Americans can’t even get honest answers to the amounts of our own gold reserves held in Fort Knox or the Federal Reserve. Don’t people find this reluctance for audit and inspection a bit curious if not outright suspicious?

The battle is being waged not only by military might but by a currency war. We are “being played” through our military involvement in the Middle East, including our covert operations against Syria at the behest of Saudi Arabia. Unlike Iraq, the war in Syria will explode, turn hot, and we will be engaged in an ominous battle that will quickly expand and turn deadly. Weakened militarily through the policies of the Obama regime, coupled with an already weakened economy, the U.S. will suffer consequences unlike anyone might imagine or is willing to address. It is a recipe for disaster planned and initiated by the global elite behind the central banking system, including those in our own government. We have been set up from within, lied to, and now, we are about to see exactly what this globalist system has in store for not only the United States, but every nation of the world.

It is critical to understand that the take-down of the U.S. will be the result of an asymmetrical war that includes the weakening of our military, our economy, and a direct assault on our ability to keep the dollar as the world reserve currency and protect the free flow of oil and energy to the United States.

Within the last week, China held a surprise naval exercise in the South China Sea. Meanwhile, Russia displayed their resurgent military night in the Black Sea. These exercises were conducted as U.S. military forces are spread thinly across many areas in the world. Is anyone paying attention here?

Just as certain a collapse of the dollar is coming, so will be chaos on the streets of America caused by this plan “to kill the dollar.” The central bankers and the leaders selected to govern each country have effectively used the Hegelian Dialectic [ii] to implement their agenda. Just as stated by George H.W. Bush on September 11, 1990, their predetermined solution of a “New World Order” is being formed before our very eyes. They’ve told us what they are doing, but we have chosen not to listen or failed to understand what was being said.

The U.S. has always been the firewall against the globalists. By their persistence, infiltration of global elitists into our government, and covert subversion from within, we are being led to slaughter. A view from space, looking at the larger picture of events for which many have questions, a clearer picture emerges. There will be some who dare to resist the pillaging of our bank accounts, the erosion of our rights, and the enslavement that comes with the dismantling of America.

The dust clouds visible on the far horizon that watchmen have been reporting for decades can now be seen as an attacking army of barbarians, whose fighters are now on the ladders and cannons are breaching our empire’s outer walls. Who knows how long the inner walls of our empire will survive the next wave of their coming attack.

Perhaps Ernest Hemmingway said it best in referencing John Donne from his novel of the same name… “And therefore never send to know for whom the bell tolls; It tolls for thee.”









It all ends in the collapse of the dollar

by Adam Taggart

September 21, 2013




By Daniel R. Amerman, CFA

AUGUST 19, 2012


The United States government has five interrelated motivations for destroying the value of the dollar:

1. Creating money out of thin air on a massive basis is all that stands between the current state of hidden depression, and overt depression with unemployment levels in excess of those seen in the US Great Depression of the 1930s.

2.  It is the most effective way to meet not just current crushing debt levels, but to deal with the rapidly approaching massive generational crisis of paying for Boomer retirement promises.

3. It creates a lucratively profitable $500 billion a year hidden tax for the benefit of the US government which is not understood by voters or debated in elections.

4.  It is the weapon of choice being used to wage currency war and reboot US economic growth; and

5. It is an essential component of political survival and enhanced power for incumbent politicians.

In this article we will take a holistic approach to how individual short term, medium and long term pressures all come together to leave the government with effectively no choice but to create a substantial rate of inflation that will steadily destroy the value of the dollar.

If you have savings, if you rely on a pension, if you are a retiree or Boomer with retirement accounts – any one of these five fundamental motivations is by itself a grave peril to your future standard of living.  However, it is only when we put all five together and see how the motivations reinforce each other, that we can understand what the government has been and intends to continue doing, and then begin the search for personal solutions.

Reason One:  The Political Interests Of Self-Serving Politicians

As further covered herein, almost 9% of the US economy is currently funded by deficit spending.  From a political perspective, this $1.3 trillion a year is “free money” that politicians get to disburse on a political district and favored special interest group basis.  In other words, roughly $1,000 per month, per American household can be used to reward friends and can be withheld from enemies, with personal credit being taken by the benevolent politicians for this never-ending largess.

In past decades, politicians were restricted to spending perhaps $200 or $300 per month per household over and above what the government was collecting in taxes, with the difference being borrowed in the bond market.  Anything above that would require the unpleasantness of raising taxes, which might put individual politicians in danger of actually losing their position and privileged lifestyle if he or she wasn’t in a “safe” district.  However, in the current climate all limitations are gone, the pork is rolling out on a historically unprecedented basis, and the politicians are wielding unprecedented power.

So why do the limitations usually exist on at least some level, and why are they gone now? Historically, the US government has directly created money out of thin air on a massive basis to fund deficit spending during the Civil War, and also during the Revolutionary War. There is a very good reason such governmental actions are so rare:  the value of the US dollar was rapidly destroyed in both instances.  So, this spending without limit would not ordinarily be a sensible path.  Unless, from the government’s perspective, there were other dangers that were considered a greater threat, that could be addressed only through destroying the value of the dollar.

Reason Two:  To Hide A Depression

I have written numerous articles about various aspects of Reasons Two through Five for some years now, and my long term readers and subscribers have been well aware of the building pressures.  While the emphasis of this article is on the interweaving of the short, medium and long-term relationships between the five reasons, we will first set the stage by taking a few paragraphs each to briefly review the individual government motivation, with a link to a full length article that covers the problem in more depth.  

While you wouldn’t know it from government press releases or media headlines, there has been a gaping hole in the US economy since 2008, as illustrated below:

During the first round of the financial crisis, the US private economy nearly collapsed, threatening to send the US economy straight into deep depression.  We’re talking about a $1.3 trillion private sector collapse that was contained only by the government fantastically increasing the money it spent, even while tax revenues were falling.  The creation of huge government deficits has been all that has maintained even a facade of semi-normalcy.  Remove the mechanism of the government creating money so that it can spend what it doesn’t have, and it is straight to official Great Depression-level unemployment in months.

Even as the true gravity of the situation is hidden from the general public, so too is the true cost of the grossly irresponsible short-term “band-aid” that is being used to cover the hole in the US economy.  The destruction of the value of savings in general, as well as the impoverishment of Boomers and retirees in particular, is explained in my article linked below, “Hiding A Depression:  How The US Government Does It.”

Reason Three:  A Desperate Attempt To Escape Depression By Waging Currency War

The US government has been waging currency war since September of 2010.  Simply put, the US would have great difficulty emerging from the depression described above so long as the US dollar is “strong”, because a strong dollar translates to “expensive” US workers who have difficulty competing for market share even in the US economy, let alone abroad.  One solution is that when a nation slashes the value of its currency, its workers become relatively cheaper, and they then cannot only better defend their domestic market share, but can begin to take market share in foreign economies as well.  However, when a major nation goes on the offensive, many trading partners will counterattack and try to defend their economies, not by making their own currencies stronger, but by making their own currencies weaker, so that their domestic workers remain relatively inexpensive and will be better able to compete for market share.

To successfully go on the currency offensive and negate attempted counterattacks, Federal Reserve Chairman Bernanke chose a radical tool – he publicly announced that the Fed would be directly creating money on a massive scale equal to 9% of the US economy, with the proceeds going to purchase US government debt in the secondary markets.  Ultimately, the only protections for a symbolic currency (such as the US dollar) are the policies deployed by the central bank to maintain that value.  And when the nation’s chief central banker directly threatens to use his power to destroy the symbol rather than preserve it – the threat is extraordinarily effective.

There is no free lunch, however.  While the US government is insisting to the world-at-large that it is not engaged in currency warfare, in order to maintain the plausible deniability that is essential to diplomatic doublespeak, it is also hiding the heavy cost from its own citizens.  The US standard of living since the late 1990s has been based on having a “strong” dollar and huge trade deficits – meaning we haven’t actually been able to pay for what we consume for a long time.  Therefore, even as jobs and the real economy grow, there is a drop in the overall standard of living, that is not evenly weighted – but is disproportionately born by savers, Boomers and retirees.

Much more information on how this works and the specific ways that older citizens will be bearing most of the pain can be found in my article linked below, “Bullets In The Back:  How Boomers & Retirees Will Become Stimulus, Bailout & Currency War Casualties”.

These second and third elements of hiding a depression and waging currency war are tightly interwoven, and could even be called “killing two birds with one stone”.  The money doesn’t exist to keep the US from openly plunging into depression, it simply isn’t there for a fiscally responsible government.  And covering the economic hole by creating money out of thin air at a rate equal to 9% of the total US economy is so fiscally irresponsible that few nations dare a counterattack of such magnitude.  For now, massive monetary creation allows the US to not only cover over the current hidden depression, but also to wage all-out currency war to try to emerge from that depression.

However, to fully understand the agenda of the US government, we have to look at the greatest financial problem of all, and how destroying the value of the dollar is the intended solution.

Reason Four:  Dodging National Bankruptcy

Sometimes households reach the unfortunate point where when they add up the credit cards, mortgage payments, and 2nd mortgage payments – they realize that they will never be able to pay their bills.  They know they are bankrupt and there is no way of dodging that.  But instead of reducing their spending – they may even step up the spending, until all the lines of credit are maxed out, and the bills are all in arrears.  Because, once you know bankruptcy is inevitable anyway – why slash your standard of living before you absolutely have to?  Partying it up now for another few months won’t change the destination, so why not?

Fortunately, relatively few ordinary people think that way.  There is ample evidence, however, that a good number of politicians hold that mindset when it comes to budget deficits that appear impossible to repay, at least in the conventional manner.

There is a lie that is being frequently repeated, which is that our children and grandchildren will be slaving away for decades to pay back the money that we’ve been borrowing to fund this reckless deficit spending.  The assumption underlying the lie is that if it weren’t for the current spending, the nation would be fine, and therefore increased taxes will be needed to pay back the borrowing.

Except that the nation isn’t fine.  Like most other major developed nations in the world, the United States has been effectively bankrupt for quite some time, with a day of reckoning that is approaching fast with or without the current outrageous level of deficit spending.

The graph below is from my article, “Six Layers Of Deficit Impossibilities Mean Retirement Catastrophe”.

As developed step by step in “Six Layers”, when we add up current and future Federal deficits, as well as unfunded Social Security, Medicare and other unfunded government promises, the total comes to over $785,000 per non-retired household (over the coming years) that has an above poverty line income.  And this isn’t even the total cost – it is the excess cost over and above current estimated tax receipts, which assumes a healthy and growing economy.  When we drop the assumption of an economy growing at the same rates of the last 50 years, then the shortfall goes far higher – perhaps over $200 trillion for Social Security and Medicare alone by some recent estimates.  That would raise the total shortfall to over $2 million per non-retired and above-poverty-line household.

If taxes can’t pay (and it’s ludicrous to think they can), and the US doesn’t declare bankruptcy, then just how do we cover the gap?

Short answer:  pay in full, but make the dollar worth five cents.  This drops the per household cost for everything from almost $800,000 down to about $40,000.  Painful, but manageable over a period of 20-30 years.

Merely make a dollar worth five cents, and impossible government promises become quite payable.  The problem with this “solution” is that it also requires making most people’s life savings worth five cents on the dollar.

Reason Five:  Create A Massive Hidden Tax

The Federal Reserve effectively controls short, medium and long-term interest rates in the United States, and this means that it controls the borrowing costs of the United States government.  As developed my article linked below, “Hiding A $500 Billion Tax On Savings:  How The Government Deceives Millions”, by forcing interest rates below the rate of inflation, the Federal Reserve creates about a half trillion dollar per year “windfall” gain for the Federal government.

This is not “free money”, far from it.  Every dollar of benefit for the government from interest rate manipulations comes directly out of the pockets of savers.  That is, for the government to come out ahead by $500 billion per year requires savers and pension funds to come up short by $500 billion per year.  This makes it a tax in all but name.  It is also essential to note that two elements have to come together to make this hidden tax work:  1) there have to be low interest rates, and 2) there also has to a substantive real rate of inflation (which can be quite different from the official rate).

From a politician’s perspective this massive tax – almost three times the size of federal corporate taxation – is a “dream tax”.  Half a trillion dollars a year is available to spend without raising taxes or increasing deficits.  Sure, there is a cost, which is the entirely deliberate destruction of retirement dreams and promises for tens of millions of US workers and retirees – particularly Boomers – as well as pushing forward the insolvency of state and local government pension funds around the country.  But the deliberate bankrupting of a generation is a long term problem with no clear accountability and almost no voter understanding, which means it is more or less irrelevant for how political decisions are made today.

The Convergence Of The Five Overwhelming Governmental Motivations

 The Long-Term

Let’s add our five powerful motivations together, and see how they interrelate. The truly big picture for both the United States and most other major developed nations is that population growth has been shrinking, long term promises to current and future retirees have been extravagant, and for the most fundamental of demographic and economic reasons, the nations simply can’t afford to pay for those promises.

On a global basis, governments are left with a choice between breaking promises openly – reneging on their legal commitments on a massive scale, possibly having to actually declare bankruptcy in many cases (effectively) – or they can follow the time-honored route that almost every nation which has found itself in the situation and has had the ability do so has done:  they can pay their promises in form, but not in substance. They can inflate away the value of their national currency, and pay everything in full, but that currency will only be worth a fraction of what it is right now.

So the larger the future shortfall, the more overwhelming the motivation to destroy the value of the currency, and the greater the degree of destruction of the currency that is necessary in order to turn impossible promises into possible promises.

The Short Term

Let’s look at the short term in the United States. As previously discussed, there is currently a gaping hole in the US economy that is equal to about 9% of the size of the economy if we look to official deficits, and about 12% if we include the hidden $500 billion tax on savings.  This economic hole in the private sector is being covered over by massive overt deficit spending and hidden taxation which account for about one in every eight dollars spent in the nation this year.  If this massive deficit spending were to cease abruptly, then the US would go straight to an overt Great Depression level of unemployment.

So, if you’re in the political establishment and you don’t want outright political revolution, then you have enormous incentives to try to keep an appearance of normalcy in the economy, no matter how much damage you need to do to the long-term value of your nation’s currency.

Tying Together Long-Term & Short-Term

Short term interests are served by recklessly risking the long-term value of the nation’s currency, thereby providing the funding to cover over the hole in the economy.  Long term interests in terms of impossible government promises that must be inflated away, are served by the destruction of the value of the nation’s currency. The more severe this destruction, the less the cost of repaying impossible promises. Arguably then, the more risk that is taken in “papering” over the hole in the current economy, and the more severe the long term consequences, the better off the government will be in the future when it comes to its ability to cheaply repay debts that are otherwise unpayable.

The Medium-Term & The Real Economy

Now, let’s go to the medium term and consider the real world factor that bridges the current economic crisis and the long term economic crisis. That bridge is ultimately all that really matters, and it is the real economy. Without a powerful and rapidly growing real economy, there is no way out of the hidden depression in which the United States currently finds itself. American workers must be competitive if they are to regain both domestic and international market share (a situation many other nations are in as well).

Mixing Medium & Long Term

Nobody knows the true extent of the trouble the US economy is in over the next ten, twenty and thirty years as Boomer retirement promises come due in full.  But we do know that:

1) It would take a historically unprecedented rate of economic growth to meet the promises in current dollars without bankrupting the nation; and

2) The financial devastation could be far, far worse than most estimates if the US economy does not perform like it has historically, but instead continues the downward spiral of a wounded empire that is losing prominence and economic power on the world stage.

When we strip away the common assumption of endlessly compounded 3% real economic growth, and say that we are either losing economic growth or just breaking even, then the future shortfalls grow even more staggering.  Indeed, when we include the academic evidence of the growth-slowing effects of large government deficits, and then add in the reduction in consumption expected for an aging population, then we may already be in an effectively zero per capita growth mode, as covered in my article linked below.

Bridging Medium, Long & Short-Term

What the short-term and long-term both have in common is that the only true solution is ultimately to grow the real economy. The real economy has been hampered since the mid-1990s by a short sighted “strong dollar” policy that has enormously benefited major international corporations and major banks, while creating a debt-driven illusion of personal prosperity for many of the citizens of the United States.  It’s a standard of living that could never be paid for, but rather was reliant on other nations lending the US the money to fund that lifestyle, so long as we agreed to keep the dollar “strong”.  The effective terms were that certain other nations lent us the money to live it up without our being able to pay for the goods that delivered our subsidized standard of living, and in exchange we let them take our industries and jobs.

To re-grow the real economy and regain economic competitiveness, the US must remove the handcuffs on American workers, which requires driving down the value of the US dollar.  This has to be done in a competitive world, where other nations want to defend their own market share by driving down the value of their own currencies. So for the US to be “successful” – it has chosen a strategy of taking more radical actions in a threat to destroy the value of its currency than other nations dare counter.

In other words, the other nations aren’t as willing to recklessly and rapidly wipe out the value of their citizen’s savings as the United States is, which gives the US a temporary “advantage” in currency brinksmanship.

Most conveniently, the otherwise impossible cost of covering over the gaping hole in the US economy can be paid for through open monetization on deliberate, prominent display for the whole world to see.  The strategy is to simply manufacture the money out of nothingness, which then lets the rest of the world know that the US dollar is in grave peril of swiftly diving in value.  This then drives down the value of the dollar, and reboots the real economy and real American competitiveness, even as the hole in the economy is temporarily covered over.  Perhaps most important of all, this begins the rapid destruction of the value of the dollar as necessary to avert formal US bankruptcy when it comes to paying the enormous retirement and health care obligations that are coming due over the next ten, twenty and thirty years.

To understand the true extent of the danger to your savings, you need to see how all three of these levels work together:  hiding the depression in the short-term, rebooting the real economy in the medium-term, and the long-term destruction of the value of the dollar so that impossible promises can be paid in form, but not in substance. All three strategies effectively require the destruction of the value of the savings of older Americans and retirees in particular. It is your future lifestyle that must be sacrificed for all of these goals to happen together.

Adding In Short-Term Political Benefits

And finally, and not of incidental importance although perhaps not quite as fundamental as the other factors, there are enormous political rewards for those currently in power when it comes to pursuing this approach. As covered in the “Hiding A Depression” article, the government’s share of the US economy swiftly went (with very little commentary) from 35% of the total economy to 43% of the total economy.  In the real world of politics, what is most important is that this growth comes in the form of discretionary spending, that (normally) rare commodity that is the currency of pure power.  In normal circumstances, between government transfer payments, the military, and the established bureaucracy, there isn’t all that much discretionary money for politicians to channel for their partisan desires.  That has turned upside down, as discretionary money was created so fast, that Congress and the Administration initially had trouble figuring out how to spend it.

The government has enormously increased its control over the day-to-day economic life of the nation. This control is not being exercised on an altruistic basis, but is being used in the exercise of raw political power.  Politicians have the unprecedented ability, almost without limitation, to take the $1000+ per month per American household in money that is being created out of the void ($1,300 with the hidden savings tax), and to use it to reward their friends and hurt their enemies.  And many are doing so.

These five motivations all exist simultaneously, they all wrap around each other in their numerous interrelationships, and they all reinforce each other.   What they all have in common is an overwhelming incentive to make sure that a dollar does not remain worth a dollar.

The Personal Implications

The implications of the five powerful motivations all coming together are that we have multiple overwhelming reasons to believe that the value of the US dollar (and many other currencies) will be mostly or near entirely destroyed in coming years. Now, when paper wealth is wiped out for much of the population, and real wealth (goods and services) for a nation has taken a blow – but is not wiped out – then what we necessarily have is a massive redistribution of wealth. And there is very good reason to believe that the largest redistribution of wealth that has been seen in modern times is likely to be occurring over the coming years.

Inherently, the older that you are – the more likely that wealth will be redistributed away from you instead of towards you. A giant “Reset Button” will likely be pressed for the dollar, and with it the value of your savings and investments will likely evaporate – that is, if you have been following the conventional wisdom for retirement investing. You may not have that many working years left to recover from the damage, and jobs may be difficult to come by even if you want to work.

So you are competing against younger workers not just for jobs, but for goods and services, where they have the current income in inflation-adjusted terms to buy these desirable goods – and you don’t.  Thus, the older citizens become impoverished relative to the younger citizens.  This is a history that has been repeated time and again across nations and across the centuries – it is the pensioners that get nailed when the currency reset button gets pressed.

Making it even more difficult is that the hidden savings tax acts as a giant anchor, making it near impossible for fixed income savers to break even on an inflation-adjusted basis, let alone compound their wealth like all the financial planning models promised.  Simultaneously, the likely reduced economic growth rate associated with a heavily indebted and aging nation will likely slash further stock returns, or even turn them negative in after-inflation and after-tax terms.

Both of the pillars underlying conventional financial planning have shattered and fallen, which leaves traditional retirement investors with two negative return asset classes (in inflation-adjusted terms) that are steadily destroying wealth over the long term rather than compounding it.   Even as the slick investment firm ads featuring vibrantly healthy and wealthy retirees enjoying their active and prosperous retirements, continue to fill the airwaves and financial media.



The Economic Collapse
July 18, 2012

The U.S. dollar isn’t dead yet, but the nails are being hammered into the coffin even as you read this article.  For decades, most of the nations of the world have used the U.S. dollar to buy oil and to trade with each other.  In essence, the U.S. dollar has been acting as a true global currency.

Virtually every country on the face of the earth has needed big piles of U.S. dollars for international trade.  This has ensured a huge demand for U.S. dollars and U.S. government debt.  This demand for dollars has kept prices and interest rates low, and it has given the U.S. government an incredible amount of power and leverage around the globe.  Right now, U.S. dollars make up more than 60 percent of all foreign currency reserves in the world.  But times are changing.  Over the past couple of years there has been a whole bunch of international agreements that have made the U.S. dollar less important in international trade.  The mainstream media in the United States has been strangely quiet about all of these agreements, but the truth is that they are setting the stage for a fundamental shift in the way that trade is conducted around the globe.  When the petrodollar dies, it is going to have an absolutely devastating impact on the U.S. economy.  Sadly, most Americans are totally clueless regarding what is about to happen to the dollar.

One of the reasons the Federal Reserve has been able to get away with flooding the financial system with U.S. dollars is because the rest of the world has been soaking a lot of those dollars up.  The rest of the world has needed giant piles of dollars to trade with, but what is going to happen when they don’t need dollars anymore?

Could we see a tsunami of inflation as demand for the dollar plummets like a rock?

The power of the U.S. dollar has been one of the few things holding up our economy.  Once that leg gets kicked out from under us we are going to be in a whole lot of trouble.

The following are 11 international agreements that are nails in the coffin of the petrodollar….

#1 China And Russia

China and Russia have decided to start using their own currencies when trading with each other.  The following is from aChina Daily article about this important agreement….

China and Russia have decided to renounce the US dollar and resort to using their own currencies for bilateral trade, Premier Wen Jiabao and his Russian counterpart Vladimir Putin announced late on Tuesday.

Chinese experts said the move reflected closer relations between Beijing and Moscow and is not aimed at challenging the dollar, but to protect their domestic economies.

“About trade settlement, we have decided to use our own currencies,” Putin said at a joint news conference with Wen in St. Petersburg.

The two countries were accustomed to using other currencies, especially the dollar, for bilateral trade. Since the financial crisis, however, high-ranking officials on both sides began to explore other possibilities.

#2 China And Brazil

Did you know that Brazil conducts more trade with China than with anyone else?

The largest economy in South America has just agreed to a huge currency swap deal with the largest economy in Asia.  The following is from a recent BBC article….

China and Brazil have agreed a currency swap deal in a bid to safeguard against any global financial crisis and strengthen their trade ties.

It will allow their respective central banks to exchange local currencies worth up to 60bn reais or 190bn yuan ($30bn; £19bn).

The amount can be used to shore up reserves in times of crisis or put towards boosting bilateral trade.

#3 China And Australia

Did you know that Australia conducts more trade with China than with anyone else?

Australia also recently agreed to a huge currency swap deal with China.  The following is from a recent Financial Express article….

The central banks of China and Australia signed a A$30 billion ($31.2 billion) currency-swap agreement to ensure the availability of capital between the trading partners, the Reserve Bank of Australia said.

“The main purposes of the swap agreement are to support trade and investment between Australia and China, particularly in local-currency terms, and to strengthen bilateral financial cooperation,” the RBA said in a statement on its website. “The agreement reflects the increasing opportunities available to settle trade between the two countries in Chinese renminbi and to make RMB-denominated investments.”

China has been expanding currency-swap accords as it promotes the international use of the yuan, and the accord with Australia follows similar deals with nations including South Korea, Turkey and Kazakhstan. China is Australia’s biggest trading partner and accounts for about a quarter of the nation’s merchandise sales abroad.

#4 China And Japan

The second and third largest economies on the entire planet have decided that they should start moving toward using their own currencies when trading with each other.  This agreement was incredibly important but it was almost totally ignored by the U.S. media.

According to Bloomberg, it is anticipated that this agreement will strengthen ties between these two Asian giants….

Japan and China will promote direct trading of the yen and yuan without using dollars and will encourage the development of a market for companies involved in the exchanges, the Japanese government said.

Japan will also apply to buy Chinese bonds next year, allowing the investment of renminbi that leaves China during the transactions, the Japanese government said in a statement after a meeting between Prime Minister Yoshihiko Noda and Chinese Premier Wen Jiabao in Beijing yesterday. Encouraging direct yen- yuan settlement should reduce currency risks and trading costs, the Japanese and Chinese governments said.

China is Japan’s biggest trading partner with 26.5 trillion yen ($340 billion) in two-way transactions last year, from 9.2 trillion yen a decade earlier.

#5 India And Japan

It is not just China making these kinds of currency agreements.  According to Reuters, India and Japan have also agreed to a very large currency swap deal….

India and Japan have agreed to a $15 billion currency swap line, Japan’s Prime Minister Yoshihiko Noda said on Wednesday, in a positive move for the troubled Indian rupee, Asia’s worst-performing currency this year.

#6 “Junk For Oil”: How India And China Are Buying Oil From Iran

Iran is still selling lots of oil.  They just aren’t exchanging that oil for U.S. dollars as much these days.

So how is Iran selling their oil without using dollars?

Bloomberg article recently detailed what countries such as China and India are exchanging for Iranian oil….

Iran and its leading oil buyers, China and India, are finding ways to skirt U.S. and European Union financial sanctions on the Islamic republic by agreeing to trade oil for local currencies and goods including wheat, soybean meal and consumer products.

India, the second-biggest importer of Iran’s oil, has set up a rupee account at a state-owned bank to settle as much as much as 45 percent of its bill, according to Indian officials. China, Iran’s largest oil customer, already settles some of its oil debts through barter, Mahmoud Bahmani, Iran’s central bank governor, said Feb. 28. Iran also has sought to trade oil for wheat from Pakistan and Russia, according to media reports from the two countries.

#7 Iran And Russia

According to Bloomberg, Iran and Russia have decided to discard the U.S. dollar and use their own currencies when trading with each other….

Iran and Russia replaced the U.S. dollar with their national currencies in bilateral trade, Iran’s state-run Fars news agency reported, citing Seyed Reza Sajjadi, the Iranian ambassador in Moscow.

The proposal to switch to the ruble and the rial was raised by Russian President Dmitry Medvedev at a meeting with his Iranian counterpart, Mahmoud Ahmadinejad, in Astana, Kazakhstan, of the Shanghai Cooperation Organization, the ambassador said.

#8 China And Chile

China and Chile recently signed a new agreement that will dramatically expand trade between the two nations and that is also likely to lead to significant currency swaps between the two countries….

The following is from a recent report that described this new agreement between China and Chile….

Wen called on the two nations to expand trade in goods, promote trade in services and mutual investment, and double bilateral trade in three years.

The Chinese leader also said the two countries should enhance cooperation in mining, expand farm product trade, and promote cooperation in farm product production and processing and agricultural technology.

China would like to be actively engaged in Chile’s infrastructure construction and work with Chile to promote the development of transportation networks in Latin America, said Wen.

Meanwhile, Wen suggested that the two sides launch currency swaps and expand settlement in China’s renminbi.

#9 China And The United Arab Emirates

According to CNN, China and the United Arab Emirates recently agreed to a very large currency swap deal….

In January, Chinese Premier Wen Jiabao visited the United Arab Emirates and signed a $5.5 billion currency swap deal to boost trade and investments between the two countries.

#10 China And Africa

Did you know that China is now Africa’s biggest trading partner?

For many years the U.S. dollar was dominant in Africa, but now that is changing.  A report from Africa’s largest bank, Standard Bank, says the following….

“We expect at least $100 billion (about R768 billion) in Sino-African trade – more than the total bilateral trade between China and Africa in 2010 – to be settled in the renminbi by 2015.”

#11 Brazil, Russia, India, China And South Africa

The BRICS (Brazil, Russia, India, China and South Africa) continue to become a larger factor in the global economy.

A recent agreement between those nations sets the stage for them to increasingly use their own national currencies when trading with each other rather than the U.S. dollar.  The following is from a news source in India….

The five major emerging economies of BRICS — Brazil, Russia, India, China and South Africa — are set to inject greater economic momentum into their grouping by signing two pacts for promoting intra-BRICS trade at the fourth summit of their leaders here Thursday.

The two agreements that will enable credit facility in local currency for businesses of BRICS countries will be signed in the presence of the leaders of the five countries, Sudhir Vyas, secretary (economic relations) in the external affairs ministry, told reporters here.

The pacts are expected to scale up intra-BRICS trade which has been growing at the rate of 28 percent over the last few years, but at $230 billion, remains much below the potential of the five economic powerhouses.

So what does all of this mean?

It means that the days of the U.S. dollar being the de facto reserve currency of the world are numbered.

So why is this important?

In a previous article, I quoted an outstanding article by Marin Katusa that detailed many of the important benefits that the petrodollar system has had for the U.S. economy….

The “petrodollar” system was a brilliant political and economic move. It forced the world’s oil money to flow through the US Federal Reserve, creating ever-growing international demand for both US dollars and US debt, while essentially letting the US pretty much own the world’s oil for free, since oil’s value is denominated in a currency that America controls and prints. The petrodollar system spread beyond oil: the majority of international trade is done in US dollars. That means that from Russia to China, Brazil to South Korea, every country aims to maximize the US-dollar surplus garnered from its export trade to buy oil.

The US has reaped many rewards. As oil usage increased in the 1980s, demand for the US dollar rose with it, lifting the US economy to new heights. But even without economic success at home the US dollar would have soared, because the petrodollar system created consistent international demand for US dollars, which in turn gained in value. A strong US dollar allowed Americans to buy imported goods at a massive discount – the petrodollar system essentially creating a subsidy for US consumers at the expense of the rest of the world. Here, finally, the US hit on a downside: The availability of cheap imports hit the US manufacturing industry hard, and the disappearance of manufacturing jobs remains one of the biggest challenges in resurrecting the US economy today.

So what happens when the petrodollar dies?

The following are some of the things we are likely to see….

-Oil will cost a lot more.

-Everything will cost a lot more.

-There will be a lot less foreign demand for U.S. government debt.

-Interest rates on U.S. government debt will rise.

-Interest rates on just about everything in the U.S. economy will rise.

And that is just for starters.

As I wrote about earlier today, the Federal Reserve is not going to save us.  Ben Bernanke is not somehow going to pull a rabbit out of a hat that will magically make everything okay.  Fundamental changes to the global financial system are happening right now that are impossible for Bernanke to stop.

We should have never gone into so much debt.  Up until now we have gotten away with it, but when demand for U.S. dollars and U.S. debt dries up we are going to experience a massive amount of pain.

Keep your eyes and ears open for more news stories like the ones referenced above.  The end of the U.S. dollar is going to be a very significant landmark on the road toward the total collapse of the U.S. economy.



By Jim Jones | Pravda

February 24, 2013

I penned an article on PRAVDA previously, entitled “Are You Prepared?” in which I outlined my ideas and concerns over the Federal Reserve and the impending currency crash.  The manner in which the article has been received has surprised me and I feel emboldened to progress this concept further.

When looking through comments, it is interesting that they are generally concurring with my premise and indicating that many others out there are already looking along a similar vein in regards currency matters.

I have no academic claim to fame in the field of finance/economics, I am however professionally qualified and was a Major in the Infantry. My view on matters is as seen through such conditioning and I believe, reflect the view of those who would listen to reasoned argument.

That being said, one of my compatriots commented:

Pravda identifies the USA – but the reality is every country is doing the same thing, including Russia!

I don’t intend turning this article into a Blog reply exercise, but feel compelled to respond to this post, as it has a bearing on the following article.

My previous article was not necessarily the view of PRAVDA and to construe it as such is doing PRAVDA a disservice. This comment also has in it connotations of the Reds and Us mentality of the Cold War era;  ”Pravda identifies the USA –  including Russia“.  The reality is, no other currency which so impacts on the world economy as does the Green Back; for no other reason than it has been the default international currency of trade.  All countries around the world have traded in and /or hold US currency.  Suggesting that the article in somehow was an attack on the USA, is to miss the point and to cast mischievous, derogatory innuendo on the article, PRAVDA and Russia.

We are talking about nothing more substantial than monopoly money being used for international trade.  Put a US Dollar bill alongside a Monopoly bill and I say to you that the only difference between them is people’s faith in the US Dollar Bill. As soon as that faith is shattered, either by planned devaluation or people becoming aware and a panic run, the dollar will be as worthless as the monopoly money.

So concerned am I about the impending collapse and the turmoil and trouble that will follow it, that I feel a Don Quixote desire to spread this warning and spare as many as I can from the heartache that will follow.  To be truthful, however, I feel as John The Baptist, shouting in the wilderness “Make straight the way of the Lord”.

Too many will not look at events and facts and take the time to dispassionately evaluate them, preferring instead to fall back on predetermined conditioning as to the accepted order of things and what they have been told to believe. Do you remember the 60′s [I do], the wave of political unrest and questioning and protesting? There were debates on TV [when is the last time you saw a proper debate like they used to air?], protesters were given air time and the Vietnam war was stopped by political protest.

The powers in authority learnt from that, they learnt very quickly and now through the school system [which has been totally corrupted by authoritarian views] to our controlled news media, people are lazy and contented; preferring to take the easy way and accept what they are told.  Now, people are conditioned.

The New World Order [call them Zionist, Masons, Illuminati, Mormons,] are in effect a conglomerate of these entities, preferring to use them for their own evil and satanic ways. There is an orchestration of events, so that in turn each branch of the evil works in unison and in furtherance of the other and at the same time, skilfully hiding the true shadowy figures who are really pulling the strings. I will not even begin to try to finger the main group here – so murky do they muddy the waters that it would be a very brave man indeed who would profess to know the truth – howbeit, I am certain that behind it all and as master of ceremonies is Satin.

If one is prepared to examine history – not your schoolbook history, but properly disseminated history – one will see this New World Order group is not really very smart because they rely on time proven techniques and rouses.  History repeats!

We don’t have to go too far back into history – for some, it may still be living history – to see the progression to the Great Depression; there was the warnings about the gold and silver standards and fiat money.  Look at the recessions we have suffered post great depression – all planned and all using the pretext of revaluing the market; with all the euphemisms used to explain that. In truth, it was plain robbing the people. Such monetary calamities are designed to redistribute the wealth and to devalue the dollar so as to allow for further escalation of the currency.

While under our capitalistic model, greed propelled growth and growth spawned waste. [Just check out our land-fills sometime].  In capitalism, a company has to either grow or die.  Like fish in the sea, the bigger ones swallow the smaller ones and so get bigger.  Companies gain political pressure, eventually becoming duopolies and monopolies capable of controlling economies and nations.  These captains of industry work together to steer a nation in the direction which furthers their growth and profit, regardless of the social cost of such manoeuvring. [And before the righteous right protest, - no I am not a communist! - save your throwaway lines].

To maximise this headlong stampede to growth and wealth, there can be no better vehicle than war – war is the ultimate waste of human endeavour, life and natural resources.

The obstacle to this growth is the creation of capital – if pegged to a standard [say gold] then the expenditure is finite – it will match what you have in gold reserves.  The FED skilfully and cleverly removed the Dollar, and subsequently other world currencies, from the gold standard; introduced worthless fiat money which they could mint to their heart’s content.  This coupled with the debt society and the path was set to exponential national debt.  Totally, unrealistic debt which a country could never hope to repay.

All the time however, gold has been horded and stolen. When a person “buys gold” they don’t get the gold they have bought – rather they get a piece of paper to say that they own a certain amount of gold.  I call these “monopoly vouchers”.  Gold that was supposedly secured and held by the FED has transpired to be imaginary.  Consider the episode whereby the FED refused an audit on the German gold being held – and agreed a delivery time of 7 years (yes, they will take seven years) to return to Germany what is rightfully theirs.  Any reasonable person would ask, why was the gold not repatriated on demand?  Surely if you own it and ask for it back, it is not unreasonable to expect immediate delivery? The most obvious answer is that it simply is not there.

The FED has engaged in fractional gold trading as they have done with fiat money.  They have sold more than they hold and what is more, any full audit of the total certificates of gold held will show that it is more than known world gold reserves.

There was one hope only – that of wrestling power off the FED – to separate the FED from the control of money.

Executive Order 11110 AMENDMENT OF EXECUTIVE ORDER NO. 10289


By virtue of the authority vested in me by section 301 of title 3 of the United States Code, it is ordered as follows:

Section 1. Executive Order No. 10289 of September 19, 1951, as amended, is hereby further amended-

By adding at the end of paragraph 1 thereof the following subparagraph (j):

(j) The authority vested in the President by paragraph (b) of section 43 of the Act of May 12,1933, as amended (31 U.S.C.821(b)), to issue silver certificates against any silver bullion, silver, or standard silver dollars in the Treasury not then held for redemption of any outstanding silver certificates, to prescribe the denomination of such silver certificates, and to coin standard silver dollars and subsidiary silver currency for their redemption

and -

By revoking subparagraphs (b) and (c) of paragraph 2 thereof.

Sec. 2. The amendments made by this Order shall not affect any act done, or any right accruing or accrued or any suit or proceeding had or commenced in any civil or criminal cause prior to the date of this Order but all such liabilities shall continue and may be enforced as if said amendments had not been made.

John F. Kennedy The White House, June 4, 1963.

By challenging the power of the FED and returning currency control to the government, J F Kennedy sealed his own fate – call it coincidence that both he and Lincoln met the same fate for similar actions.

With unlimited powers to print money and charge the government for it – the FED could feather the pocket of any corporation, government, NGO and individual that they desired. The concept that “everyone has a price” made it a simple matter for them to influence world events further emphasising the passage of Scripture;

For the love of money is the root of all evil: which while some coveted after, they have erred from the faith, and pierced themselves through with many sorrows. 1 Tim 6:10.

Although Executive Order 11110 has never been repealed [nor any other president tried to effect it] there reached a point very quickly, whereby it could not be executed as there simply was insufficient bullion to pay for the national debt. [Besides no president with the intestinal fortitude to challenge the FED].

Currently, there are some states talking about the introduction of their own currency, based on bullion. [Virginia is one, Utah is following suite].  Creating in effect, a dual economy – hold this thought as we will return to it later.

The New World Order [NWO] had tried to pre-empt this situation previously by the introduction of what was hoped to become a one World Currency – the Euro. [Or at least a currency to take over when the FED dollar crashed]. The actions of the central banks were firmly behind this move to take the sovereignty of nations by controlling the money supply.  However, the move was a unmitigated disaster – just ask the PIGS group! The French are no better – they had to start a war against Libya to prevent Gaddafi withdrawing his Euro from French banks and establishing his Gold Dinar for Africa.  French banks are teetering on the brink of collapse now, the demand for capital to be returned – capital that the banks do not have because of fractional banking –  would have seen the bankruptcy of France.  So once again a nation went to war for the banks.

The one currency cannot work – Greece can attest to that! They cannot compete against cheap imports from say Germany, while their exports are too small in revenue to meet their debt.  By having to pay the same currency as Germany – they will never get out of the problem and continued increased loans, is just heaping coals upon the fire.  If Greece had it’s own currency, then it could devalue against the German currency [Euro] and so make further imports from Germany less attractive and exports from Greece, more attractive.  Do you think the IMF masters would ever agree to that?  No, they are too greedy and concerned for the worthless value of the loans that they have already advanced.

The situation the US now finds itself in – is one of economic collapse – total economic destruction. I believe that it was always the plan to destroy America economically. This shadowy group who control money and the nations of the world have a history of invading a hoist nation and like a parasitic infestation, they suck the wealth out of a country/nation  and then when the nation is no longer of financial use, they move onto their next victim  – The real International travellers. [My euphemism].  Look at history and you will be able to trace this group being expelled from nation to nation around the world; causing untold misery through usury and control of the monetary system of a country and bankrupting a country by their demands – for example, fighting wars on their behalf.

This time however, they have managed to drag the rest of the world into their game of destruction by duping nations to utilise their worthless currency as the basis of international trade; effectively spreading their debt around the world. Now we have countries around the world that are at serious risk from the impending collapse of the Dollar.

One thing I have noticed however, the Chinese people are not fools – they are astute businessmen. I have seen several reports of commentators visiting China and commenting on the number of new, modern cities that are built but not habited. Some have laughed at the situation and others have simply marvelled in wonderment at the purpose of these cities.  I have an opinion as to the purpose of these cities and it goes like this.

China has been caught out holding vast sums of FED currency – after all, someone had to collect the money that was being printed.  Some time ago, China came to the conclusion that this currency was actually worthless and they would not be able to redeem it in the future. The solution was to spend is as quickly as they could on tangible assets and resources. China has been buying up resources from around the world at an alarming rate –  this buying spree has actually increased commodities prices much faster than any rise previously. The payment for all this resources going to China was worthless dollars.  Not only that, but China has been on a buying spree purchasing farms and infrastructure around the world; I know that from events in New Zealand whereby China has taken a very keen interest in our dairy and beef farms – buying up one of the largest farms in New Zealand.  The building of cities for future use is but an extension of this “prepper’s” mentality.  The divesting of US currency for something of value – spend it while you can and while it is still being accepted. [Similar to the concept I proposed in my previous article].

Whatever, someone is going to be left holding monopoly money; there is just so much of it out there and it has generated so much world debt.  The eventual collapse of this currency will cause major ramifications for people and nations around the world.

Go back to my earlier comment about alternative currency based on bullion. The only escape for America is a drastic move; a move that would require courage and secrecy to carry out.

The American national debt is based on FED currency, whereas if Executive Order 11110 was enacted and currency minted by the government backed by bullion and guaranteed by the government in bullion was minted and distributed, the government would have it’s own money with which to trade and maintain industry and public order.  The debt having been effected in FED dollars, needs to be repaid in FED currency.  The government could in effect, walk away from the debt and leave the FED holding it.  In effect, the worthless FED currency can be dropped over night and with it all debt abolished that is based on that currency.  All who are holding FED currency are holding fire fodder.  The international ramifications of this are immense – what are the chances of this happening? Can it be done so secretly that the FED does not step in to kill it off before it is born?  Or is the FED so arrogant that they are prepared to have the FED dollar fall into oblivion?

Some countries I feel, recognise this; countries such as Russia, China and Japan and this is partly behind the move to use their own currencies for trade between each other and the move to establish a “super currency” [proposed by Russia] for international trade. In doing so, they will lessen their exposure to the risk of holding FED currency and wrestle sovereign control of their currency from the NWO.  Whatever the result, we are in for a period of austerity and responsible growth – expect a revaluation of all things that you own.

The questions to ask are; when will this happen – not if; and where will the International Travellers go when the FED collapses?



‘Technical issue’…

Set to reopen 2:45, then 3:10… Developing…



Written by Matt Hunter | CNBC
August 22, 2013

Traders waited nervously Thursday for the Nasdaq to begin trading after a two-hour shutdown. The exchange said partial trading would resume at approximately 2:45 ET, with full trading to resume at 3:25.

“When everyone comes back online at the same time that’s when even more dangerous things can happen in the marketplace,” said Sal Arnuk, the co-founder of Themis Trading.

The Wall Street Journal pointed to Apple as a good example of the chaos that could ensue. The tech giant’s stock plunged shortly before the Nasdaq glitch.

The Nasdaq earlier halted trading in all securities due to a problem affecting quote dissemination.

Dozens of publicly traded companies, including high-profile companies such as Apple, Microsoft and Facebook, were showing their shares halted. The Nasdaq status message was time stamped at 12:14:03 ET. As of 2:10, the exchange was still down. An average of 1.6 billion shares have been traded on the Nasdaq every day this August, according to statistics from Sander O’Neil.

Despite the freeze, Nasdaq that it will not cancel orders. “Nasdaq will not be canceling open orders on the book. Customers who wish to cancel their orders may do so and any customer who wishes to not participate in the re-opening should cancel their orders prior to the resumption of trading,” said a spokesman.

A spokesman for the SEC said, “We are monitoring the situation and are in close contact with the exchanges.”

The Nasdaq options markets also issued a “system update” saying they were recommending firms route all open orders elsewhere.

The New York Stock Exchange halted trading in all Nasdaq securities at its request and canceled orders. The NYSE otherwise declined comment. The CME said that it was seeing ‘no impact’ from Nasdaq’s trading halt.

“You can’t trade if you can’t get the quotes out,” said Rich Repetto of Sandler O’Neill Partners.

“They want everybody else to shut down Tape C trading so they can restart over at the Nasdaq and until they do they can’t restart”, said CNBC contributor Pete Najarian. Tape C refers to any securities traded over the Nasdaq.

“If I was back in the days of 10 years ago managing 300 traders I’d put the directive out to every one of them ‘we don’t put any orders in at the open’ … no one trades for 60 minutes,” said Joe Terranova, chief market strategist for Virtus Investment Partners and a CNBC contributor.

Despite the quote problem, stocks overall were up in the early afternoon.

The shutdown of exchanges without an external crisis is rare, but a stray squirrel shut down the Nasdaq in 1987, according to the New York Times.



August 22, 2013

Trading was halted in Nasdaq-listed securities on Friday because of a technical problem.

The exchange sent out an alert to traders at 12:20 p.m. EDT saying that trading was being halted until further notice because of problems with a quote dissemination system.

Nasdaq sent out an update at 1 p.m. saying trading would reopen “at a time to be determined.”

Citing sources, Fox Business reported that limited trading could resume at about 2:45 p.m.

The Nasdaq composite index was frozen at 3,631.17 as of 1:57 p.m., up 31.38 for the day. The index is up 20 percent so far this year.

Nasdaq said it wouldn’t be canceling any open orders.

“We are monitoring the situation and in are close contact with the exchanges,” said SEC spokesman John Nester.

Thursday’s problem is the latest in a string of technology-related mishaps afflicting exchanges and brokers as markets over the past two decades have migrated to electronic systems, according to the WSJ.

The Nasdaq did not mention the problems on its Twitter or Facebook accounts.



By Jeff Cox | CNBC
August 22, 2013

As traders await the 3:10 PM ET full reopening of the Nasdaq, the anticipation is that the picture isn’t going to be pretty.

A problem that began at the Nasdaq spread through the trading world and has market pros on edge for what is next.

“I’ve never seen anything like this in my life,” said Dave Rovelli, managing director of U.S. equity trading at Canaccord Genuity. “It’s horrible.”

Once trading gets the OK to start again, traders will get a five-minute grace period in which they can submit quotes, trade imbalances and conduct other business matters.

Dozens of publicly traded companies, including high-profile companies such as Apple, Microsoft and Facebook, were showing their shares halted. The Nasdaq status message was time stamped at 12:14:03 ET.

When it re-opens, things could get interesting.

A spike in volume will be likely, particularly from computerized trading programs that aren’t set up to handle a lengthy shutdown from a major global exchange.

“You will have some pent-up activity,” said Dave Lutz, managing director of trading at Stifel Nicolaus. “Algos are going to try to make up for an hour and a half you missed, which could seriously skew an illiquid security.”

The effects will not be universal.

At some desks, Lutz said, the problems at the Nasdaq were barely noticed.

“We’re calling all our customers. They’re updated with what the Nasdaq is intending to do,” he said. “You have to make sure your customers are not caught with their pants down once they start trading again.”

The delay was yet another black eye for a market that has suffered through flash crashes, embarrassing glitches in initial public offerings and a general perception of being an uneven playground.

“All you should do is watch the Nasdaq stock, the NDAQ. I guarantee they’re going to crush the stock,” Rovelli said.

The problems prohibited “a single share” from trading in any of the Nasdaq stocks, though others exchanges remained open.

“Everything is on lockdown,” Rovelli said. “For a little while you could trade in dark pools, but even my dark-pool vendor shut down.”

Another trader said “the last time this happened, a squirrel chewed through a wire.”

However, Thursday’s shutdown appeared more serious.

It marked yet another embarrassment for mass trading platforms and the Nasdaq in particular.

The exchange suffered a previous setback in May 2012 when the much-ballyhooed initial public offering for Facebook was delayed about half an hour due to technical problems.





August 22, 2013

Trading resumed in Nasdaq Stock Market-listed securities, more than three hours after an abrupt halt in trading blamed on an unexplained technical issue paralyzed a large chunk of the U.S. stock market.

Shares of exchange operator Nasdaq OMX NDAQ -3.68% dropped immediately after trading resumed. The Nasdaq Composite Index, however, was up along with other major indexes.

The exchange said trades in all Nasdaq-listed securities between 12:14 p.m. ET, as the outage began, and 12:23 p.m. ET would stand. Trades made after that during the outage would be canceled, the exchange said.

The outage raised new questions about U.S. trading systems following a series of high-profile glitches.

Nasdaq officials scrambled Thursday afternoon to get trading resumed and to figure out what had happened. The issue stemmed from a data feed that provides market data for Nasdaq-listed securities, exchanges said in notices sent to traders.

U.S. stock-market officials and officials at the Securities and Exchange Commission convened a conference call shortly after the outage began, people familiar with the discussions said. President Barack Obama and Treasury Secretary Jacob Lew had been briefed on the halt, government officials said.

The outage froze prices on thousands of stocks, exchange-traded funds and options listed on Nasdaq and prompting other trading venues to stop trading those securities. Dark pools and other electronic trading platforms were also forced to suspend trading in Nasdaq-listed stocks, since there were no publicly quoted prices on those securities, traders said.

Nasdaq-listed stocks represented about 28% of all shares traded so far this month, according to data from BATS Global Markets Inc. Nasdaq listings include some of the most prominent companies in the world, including Apple Inc. AAPL +0.04% and Microsoft Corp.

“It’s really shocking. We’re stuck,” said Ramon Verastegui, head of global engineering and strategy at Société Générale. “If we want to trade Apple, we can’t.”

Some traders said there was confusion about what stocks were affected, and that phones were lighting up across trading desks as investors tried to figure out what was happening.

“We’re pulling out our orders to wait until the system works itself out,” Rick Fier, director of equity trading at Conifer Securities. “The best thing clients can do is take a break.”

Security posted outside the Nasdaq MarketSite in the middle of New York’s Times Square would not let anyone in the door without first checking identification or their names against a list of individuals expected for scheduled meetings. Few were seen coming or going.

Others expressed concerns that the prolonged outage could damage investor confidence, and potentially introduce problems with settling the values of indexes and funds at the end of the day. U.S. stocks were up modestly on Thursday afternoon, with the Dow Jones Industrial Average up 62 points to 14960.

“The whole thing gets sloppy when you make decisions on the fly, and it’s disruptive to the industry,” said Gordon Charlop, managing director at Rosenblatt Securities on the floor of the New York Stock Exchange NYX +1.47% .

“How are we going to value funds at the end of the day? It creates some confusion and uncertainty, and for investors, that’s the one thing you count on not happening.”

The trading halts in Nasdaq stocks appear to have slowed activity on the New York Stock Exchange as well, according to data provided by Miller Tabak chief technical market analyst Jonathan Krinsky. At 11 a.m. ET, before the Nasdaq halts, NYSE Composite volume was running 18% ahead of Wednesday’s volume, Mr. Krinsky said. At around 1:25 p.m., he said NYSE volume was just 7% above Wednesday’s.

The episode meant a widely tracked market gauge, the Nasdaq Composite Index, wasn’t being updated for the first time in memory. The outage was also expected to skew the calculation of other major market measures such as the Dow Jones Industrial Average and the S&P 500-stock index.

Nasdaq-listed stocks are components on major benchmarks like the Dow Jones Industrial Average and the S&P 500. The operator of those indexes, S&P Dow Jones Indices, said in a release that it began calculating its index values based on trading that takes place on other venues for Nasdaq-listed stocks. Ordinarily, the indexes use values from trading on the stocks’ primary exchange, said David Blitzer, managing director and chairman of S&P’s index committee.

S&P Dow Jones Indices said it would use the “last composite trade price” for Nasdaq-listed stocks in its indexes should the issue remain unresolved by Thursday’s market’s close.

Nasdaq parent Nasdaq OMX Group Inc. announced the halt at 12:15 p.m. ET Thursday, and other exchanges followed suit. Nasdaq also said it was halting trade in its options markets.

Nasdaq’s announcement came a little more than an hour after NYSE Euronext, operator of the rival New York Stock Exchange, told traders its Arca electronic stock exchange was having technical issues in issues starting alphabetically with ticker TACT through the Z’s.

Arca earlier had problems processing customers’ messages related to some orders among those tickers, it told customers, and said it planned to cancel many currently outstanding orders in the affected securities. Nasdaq said it stopped routing orders to Arca, according to a separate notice.

Thursday’s problem is the latest in a string of technology-related mishaps affecting exchanges and brokers as markets over the past two decades have migrated to electronic systems. System problems marred Nasdaq OMX’s rollout of the Facebook Inc. initial public offering last year, costing Wall Street firms approximately $500 million in trading losses.

Earlier this week, Goldman Sachs Group Inc. flooded U.S. stock-options markets with erroneous orders, most of which were later canceled.



By Tom Bemis | MarketWatch

August 22, 2013

Nasdaq’s unexplained trading halt Thursday locked up trading in stocks with a total market capitalization of $5.7 trillion.

The extraordinary halt in the trading of more than 2,000 issues listed on the Nasdaq COMP , came after an as yet undisclosed technical glitch.

It halted trading in the tech industry’s biggest names, including Apple AAPL ,  Google GOOG , Microsoft MSFT , AMZN  and Cisco Systems CSCO . The five companies have a combined market cap of more than $1 trillion.

Glitches in trading tied to high-speed computer algorithms have occurred frequently in recent years, with the so-called flash crash in May 2010 marking the most widely noted instance of instability in the stock market’s infrastructure. But new rules aimed at preventing problems have been slow to be implemented. 

On Tuesday, erroneous stock-option orders from Goldman Sachs flooded into American exchanges, in the latest example of technical problems in trading.

In spite of the glitches, investors have been drawn back into the markets by the continued strength in equities, and by the extended period of low interest rates available for bank accounts and Federal treasury notes.



By: Lee Brodie | Producer

By Adam Jeffery | CNBC

If ever there was a time to step up, it’s now, says Cramer

The Mad Money host is outraged that few if any officials stepped up on Thursday into a position of leadership as the Nasdaq halted trading for over 3 hours. The “Flash Freeze” as some are calling it became the latest in a string of technology problems for the financial markets.

“Come on, guys, get it together,” demanded Jim Cramer.

It’s not that the Mad Money is looking for immediate accountability, that will come later. But he would have liked to have seen at least some sense of responsibility before 5:45pm when CNBC received its first official statement from the Nasdaq.

“Chief Executive Officer, Bob Greifeld or one of the other Nasdaq officers could have gone on TV and said ‘look we don’t really know what happened. We are working hard to figure it out. We apologize and will do our best to get to the bottom of this.'”

That didn’t happen.

“And where was the government,” Cramer asked. Why didn’t the Securities & Exchange Commission, the regulator for trading, come out today and say “we are looking into this and we think that there are real issues that have to be investigated here?'”

That didn’t happen either.

Instead Individual investors were left in the dark and that’s something Cramer just won’t stand for. “Many people have much of their life savings in stocks. They count on the stock market being a legitimate asset class, something that works.”

Yet on Thursday it definitely did not work.

Cramer hopes that the industry and the government aren’t becoming anesthetized to the issue, yet he fears that’s exactly what’s happening.

“I’m hearing people say that it comes with the territory. I’m seeing people throw up their hands and say, oh well, too bad,” said Cramer.

The Mad Money host isn’t willing to throw up his hands; not for one minute. Instead he intends to demand change.




Wall Street is pictured. | AP Photo


Another debacle on Wall Street is causing alarm in Washington.

The Nasdaq stock exchange was offline for three hours on Thursday, an embarrassing snafu that quickly prompted briefings for President Barack Obama and Treasury Secretary Jack Lew.

While the economic damage of the outage appeared minimal — stocks actually climbed by Thursday’s close — it’s another black eye for Nasdaq, which botched last year’s high-profile public offering for Facebook.

It also raises big questions about the technological stability of stock exchanges more than three years after a glitch triggered the so-called flash crash that shaved nearly 1,000 points off the Dow Jones Industrial Average in just a few minutes.

“The knee-jerk reaction is the financial services committees in the Congress and Senate will look at this and say, ‘You’ve got to fix it and protect the investing public’ — the usual pitchforks and torches,” said John Rapa, president and chief executive of management consulting firm Tellefsen and Company.

So far, there’s no definitive explanation of what caused the outage. Nasdaq said in a statement that it halted trading after finding that price quotes were not being disseminated by a Securities Industry Processor, which consolidates and distributes prices for the industry. The technical issues were resolved in 30 minutes but it took longer to get everything back to normal because Nasdaq, working with regulators and other exchanges, sought an “orderly reopening of trading.”

SEC Chairwoman Mary Jo White said the incident was “serious and should reinforce our collective commitment to addressing technological vulnerabilities of exchanges and other market participants.”

She pledged to shortly convene a meeting of leaders from the exchanges and others in the market.

SEC Commissioner Luis Aguilar told POLITICO he was in discussions with staff about the outage throughout the day.

“I expect to get a full report from the staff as to the underlying reasons when they know it,” he said.

Senate Banking Committee Chairman Tim Johnson (D-S.D.) was aware of the trading halt and committee staff were in contact with the SEC, a spokesman said. Sen. Jon Tester (D-Mont.), chairman of the Securities, Insurance and Investment Subcommittee, had also been briefed, a spokeswoman said.

The SEC is working on a rule that mandates basic technology systems standards at exchanges and aims to improve responses when problems arise. It is also looking at other technological developments like high-frequency trading. The SEC is reviewing comments it received earlier this year on the systems safeguard rule, and White said Thursday that she will work to advance the proposals.

White, who is juggling rulemakings from the 2010 Dodd-Frank law and last year’s JOBS Act, told the Senate Banking Committee in March that there must be a “sense of urgency” to addressing and understanding these “market structure” issues.

Part of the impetus behind the SEC proposing systems requirements for exchanges and others in March was because of Nasdaq’s botched handling of Facebook’s initial public offering last year, when trading of the new stock was delayed. In May, Nasdaq reached a settlement with the SEC in which it agreed to pay a $10 million penalty for the snafu, the largest penalty ever paid by an exchange.

George Canellos, SEC co-director of enforcement, said at the time that the settlement told a tale of “poorly designed systems” and “hasty decision making” that disrupted one of the largest IPOs in history.

“They’re slightly different issues,” Sandler O’Neill & Partners analyst Richard Repetto said. “But regardless, the idea that Nasdaq has had another technology challenge or problem shakes people’s confidence in their marketplace.”

Nasdaq is not alone in contributing to the policy debate around stock trading snafus, technology and market structure.

The May 2010 “flash crash” was a major wake-up call for many. And last year, a glitch cost trading firm Knight Capital hundreds of millions, Bats Global Markets — a newer electronic exchange — fumbled its own IPO and Hurricane Sandy stopped stock trading for two days.

On Tuesday, Goldman Sachs sent options markets into disarray after it sent erroneous orders to a number of exchanges.

Stocks were up after trading resumed Thursday, suggesting that some on Wall Street are getting used to disruptions.

“Was I surprised it happened today when I was about to eat lunch? Yes,” Morningstar equity research analyst Gaston Ceron said. “Is it surprising in general? If somebody had told me a year ago there’s going to be some sort of system problem at Nasdaq sometime in 2013 — not even just Nasdaq but another exchange — I would say yeah, that doesn’t sound too shocking.”

CFTC Commissioner Bart Chilton said he’s worried that Wall Street will become complacent as the frequency of such glitches grow.

“There have been plenty, dozens upon dozens, of technology issues with markets,” he said. “My fear is that exchanges and regulators simply become immune to these things.”



August 24, 2013

What in the world is happening to our financial markets?  Trading on the Nasdaq was halted on Thursday for more than 3 hours, and the only formal explanation that we got was that it was a “technical issue”.  On Tuesday, Goldman Sachs made thousands of “erroneous trades” that are now being canceled.  If those trades had not been canceled, it could have cost Goldman “hundreds of millions of dollars” according to the Wall Street Journal.  How nice for them that they get a “do over”.  When Knight Capital made a similar “trading error”, they were not so fortunate.  Our financial system has become completely and totally dependent on computers, and that means that it is extremely vulnerable.  After what we have witnessed this week, how can they actually expect us to have faith in these financial markets?  And what happens if these “technical issues” get even worse?

The stoppage on the Nasdaq on Thursday was unprecedented.  Trading in literally thousands of stocks and options was halted.  Big names like Apple, Netflix, Intel and Facebook were affected.

As of right now, officials are not telling us what caused the “technical issue”, but there are rumblings that hacking was involved.

And the Nasdaq would hardly be the first exchange to be hacked.  In fact, according to NBC News, about half of all the security exchanges around the world were hacked last year.

USA Today is suggesting that a group of Iranian hackers known as “Cyber Fighters of Izz ad-Din al-Qassam” may be responsible for what happened to the Nasdaq.  Apparently they have been quite active since last September…

The first wave of denial-of-service attacks attributed to the Cyber Fighters of Izz ad-Din al-Qassam began last September and lasted about six weeks. Knocked offline for various periods of time were Wells Fargo, U.S. Bank, Bank of America, JPMorgan Chase & Co. and PNC Bank.

The second wave commenced in December and lasted seven weeks, knocking out mid-tier banks and credit unions.

And a third wave of high-powered denial-of-service attacks commenced in March targeting credit card companies and financial brokerages.

But of course the Iranians have not been the only ones hacking financial institutions.  According to Gartner banking security analyst Avivah Litan, some “profit-minded hackers” have had quite a bit of success attacking U.S. banks…

More recently, a copycat group of profit-minded hackers has conducted denial-of-service attacks against certain U.S. banks as a smoke screen to divert attention while they execute an Ocean’s 11-style wire transfer fraud.

Litan earlier this month blogged about that caper. These bad guys, she says, set into motion sophisticated denial-of-service attacks that overwhelmed pretty sturdy bank network security. While tech staff labored manually to get the banks’ websites back into service, the crooks scrambled behind the scenes to extract funds from a bank employee’s privileged account, which they had gained access to.

Instead of getting into one customer account at a time, the criminals used the employee’s account to control the master payment switch for wire transfers, and moved as much money as they could from as many accounts as possible for as long as possible, Litan reports.

“Considerable financial damage has resulted from these attacks,” says Litan.

However, let’s certainly not blame all of the “technical issues” in the financial markets on hackers.  What happened to Goldman Sachs on Tuesday appears to be very much their own fault

A programming error at Goldman Sachs Group Inc. caused unintended stock-option orders to flood American exchanges this morning, roiling markets and shaking confidence in electronic trading infrastructure.

An internal system that Goldman Sachs uses to help prepare to meet market demand for equity options inadvertently produced orders with inaccurate price limits and sent them to exchanges, said a person familiar with the situation, who asked not to be named because the information is private. The size of the losses depends on which trades are canceled, the person said. Some have already been voided, data compiled by Bloomberg show.

Of course if those trades had made hundreds of millions of dollars for Goldman they would have been allowed to stand.

But because Goldman was about to lose hundreds of millions of dollars authorities worked very rapidly to start “breaking” those trades.

This is just another example that shows how much of a joke our financial system has become.

Wall Street has become a massive computerized casino, and at some point this fraudulent house of cards is going to come crashing down hard.

The seeds for all of this were planted back in the late 1990s.  The Glass-Steagall Act was repealed and the big banks started to go hog wild.

And according to an absolutely shocking memo uncovered by investigative reporter Greg Palast, a certain U.S. Treasury official was at the heart of the plot to make this possible…

When a little birdie dropped the End Game memo through my window, its content was so explosive, so sick and plain evil, I just couldn’t believe it.

The Memo confirmed every conspiracy freak’s fantasy: that in the late 1990s, the top US Treasury officials secretly conspired with a small cabal of banker big-shots to rip apart financial regulation across the planet. When you see 26.3 percent unemployment in Spain, desperation and hunger in Greece, riots in Indonesia and Detroit in bankruptcy, go back to this End Game memo, the genesis of the blood and tears.

The Treasury official playing the bankers’ secret End Game was Larry Summers. Today, Summers is Barack Obama’s leading choice for Chairman of the US Federal Reserve, the world’s central bank.

If Summers and U.S. Treasury Secretary Robert Rubin had not been working so hard for the benefit of the big banks, we might not be facing a quadrillion dollar derivatives bubble today…

The year was 1997. US Treasury Secretary Robert Rubin was pushing hard to de-regulate banks. That required, first, repeal of the Glass-Steagall Act to dismantle the barrier between commercial banks and investment banks. It was like replacing bank vaults with roulette wheels.

Second, the banks wanted the right to play a new high-risk game: “derivatives trading”. JP Morgan alone would soon carry $88 trillion of these pseudo-securities on its books as “assets”.

Deputy Treasury Secretary Summers (soon to replace Rubin as Secretary) body-blocked any attempt to control derivatives.

But what was the use of turning US banks into derivatives casinos if money would flee to nations with safer banking laws?

The answer conceived by the Big Bank Five: eliminate controls on banks in every nation on the planet — in one single move. It was as brilliant as it was insanely dangerous.

To learn more about how they used the WTO to transform the global financial system into a gigantic casino, head on over and read the rest of Palast’s outstanding article right here.

And you know what is truly frightening?

Larry Summers appears to be Barack Obama’s top choice to become the next chairman of the Federal Reserve.

That statement should send chills up your spine.

The truth is that Larry Summers should not even be running a Dairy Queen, much less the most powerful financial institution on the planet.

If Larry Summers becomes the next head of the Federal Reserve, it will be an unmitigated disaster.

But it looks like that is exactly what we are going to get.

We are rapidly heading toward the next major global financial crisis, and on top of everything else we will probably have Larry Summers running things soon.

What a nightmare.



By Susan Duclos

On Thursday the Nasdaq Market suffered what they claimed was a glitch in their system which caused them to halt all trading for approximately three hours, which locked up trading in stocks with a total market capitalization of $5.7 trillion.

Taken alone, this so-called glitch, while concerning, would be nothing more than a newsflash, it happened, it ended, situation over, but over the last two weeks there have been other “glitches” and “outages” and “technical errors.”

One doesn’t have to be a conspiracy theorist to think that it is all a little too coincidental.

August 14, 2013- Microsoft’s Outlook, SkyDrive, and People technologies experienced problems, making it difficult for some people to access the cloud services.  August 18- Microsoft says it has fully recovered from a service outage that affected some users.

August 16, 2013- Google Outage: Internet Traffic Plunges 40%

August 19, 2013 –, the website of the world’s largest online retailer, went down today for many users across the United States and Canada.

August 20, 2013- A flood of erroneous trades hit U.S. equity options markets on Tuesday as they opened for business when Goldman Sachs Group sent orders accidentally because of a technical error, the latest trading problem to hit the options market this year.

Nasdaq, Microsoft, Google, Amazon and Goldman Sachs– Two is a coincidence, three really bad luck, but five?

[Update] Make that six, a reader just emailed me with an August 7, 2013 link- Outages effect App Store, iBookstore, Mac App Store, and iTunes for some users today.

Is it possible we are seeing a test of the Internet Kill Switch?




By Jeff Cox, Senior Writer,
August 2, 2013

The Knight Capital trading fiasco, bad as it is, looms even worse because similar high-speed trading problems are likely to keep on roiling the markets and fueling investor mistrust.

Anger and gloom swept across trading floors Thursday, the day after the New York-based trading firm reported a software malfunctionthat caused a surge in volume at the market open Wednesday and violent price swings for nearly 150 stocks.

Few if any were cheering the misfortunes of Knight , whose very survival is challenged by the scandal.

But the biggest concerns were for the retail investors who are likely to continue to flee the market.

“You can only assume that these glitches are going to continue into the future,” says Todd Schoenberger, managing director of the BlackBay Group in New York. “This is a huge, huge negative. It’s another black eye for Wall Street. This is not good for the retail investor. How are they supposed to trust what we do?”

Knight blamed the malfunctions on a software upgrade and said the episode would cost a whopping $440 million, a burden that will force the company to raise capital to cover.

The price tag on a market that already had been bleeding investor money is yet to be determined.

“So many good people are getting hurt in a very bad way, so many people in many industries. This hurts all of us,” says Sal Arnuk, partner at Themis Trading, an independent brokerage in Chatham N.J. “It hurts folks like us because when confidence is diminished people pull their money out of the market. When people pull their money out of the market my customers — institutions, mutual funds — trade less.”

Indeed, investors have been taking their money out of equities and putting it into bond funds for most of the last three years, a situation that has been particularly acute since the Flash Crash of May 6, 2010. That event also was blamed on high-frequency tradingand saw the Dow industrials lose nearly 1,000 points in a few minutes before recovering.

Similarly, the stock market bounced back Wednesday, but the smell of more trading chaos filled the air.

“Diminished commissions affect all brokers,” says Arnuk, co-author with his partner, Joseph C. Saluzzi, of Broken Markets: How High Frequency Trading and Predatory Practices on Wall Street are Destroying Investor Confidence and Your Portfolio (FT Press, 2012). “Trust me, we take no glee in watching these events unfold time and time again. Certainly, we don’t benefit from the misfortune of our brothers in the industry.”

Knight is a large player in the business, handling about 15 percent of the daily trading volume on the New York Stock Exchange, but is largely unknown outside of the HFT sphere. The irony of its current situation is acute: The firm’s slogan is “The Science of Trading, the Standard of Trust,” and its trading floor figured in heavily during the movie, “Wall Street 2: Money Never Sleeps.”

Market pros wondered about the firm’s future, both because of the capital hit it will take as well as the public relations nightmare that likely will persuade clients to take their business to other firms. Fidelity and Vanguard already reportedly have severed ties with Knight.

“They just took a huge capital hit. All of a sudden you have to constrain a lot of your trading activities,” says Michael Cohn, a former specialist on the NYSE and now chief market strategist at Atlantis Asset Management in New York. “They’re basically going to have to sell a stake in themselves in order to get back to where they were in terms of freedom to trade.”

Ironically enough, Cohn and others mostly praised Knight for the way it handled the situation, coming clean both to clients and at the exchange about its problems.

“They were very smart in just saying ‘cover.’ They didn’t try and trade out of the position,” Cohn says. “What you do is you basically cut off a position so it doesn’t do any more damage. But what happens is whoever is providing capital to them has been spooked.”

“Knight responded admirably. They let their customers know that clearly technological glitches happen. They didn’t cry. They’re falling on their sword, but truly it is a sword. They’re going to be hurt,” Arnuk adds. “I don’t want to fuel speculation as to whether Knight will make it or not. All I can say is I hope they do.”

Market veteran Art Cashin, the head of floor operations at the NYSE for UBS, said the growth of other trading platforms has made it more difficult to catch high-frequency mistakes.

“None of the trades that occurred during the Flash Crash had to be canceled” at the NYSE, Cashin told CNBC. “”If we were still the vastly dominating trading force then you would have been able to stop it completely and quickly.”

With Knight’s survival an open question — the stock is off more than 70 percent from its Wednesday open — the broader issue may be what actions might finally be taken to address the HFT problems.

Traders who trumpeted the market’s automation are now calling for more humans to be involved who might have flagged the bad Knight trades.

“At the end of the day this could swing the pendulum toward more human interaction in the markets, more traders on the floor,” says Dave Lutz managing director of trading at Stifel Nicolaus in Baltimore. “This is absolutely going to result in some changes.”



By Jordy Yager – The Hill
August 27, 2013

Outgoing Homeland Security Secretary Janet Napolitano warned her successor on Tuesday to move quickly to prepare for an inevitable large-scale cyberattack against the United States.

Napolitano, delivering her farewell address at the National Press Club, said her successor should move fast to strengthen the nation’s cyber defenses.

“Our country will, at some point, face a major cyber event that will have a serious effect on our lives, our economy and the everyday functioning of our society,” said Napolitano.

“While we have built systems, protections and a framework to identify attacks and intrusions, share information with the private sector and across government, and develop plans and capabilities to mitigate the damage, more must be done, and quickly.”

Napolitano said that while the terrorist threat to the country has not been eliminated, the ability for the U.S. to thwart attacks rapidly increases with each uncovered plot.

“For every attack we experience, every threat we face and every piece of intelligence we come across, we learn; we assess our preparations and capabilities; we make changes; we become more flexible in the actions we take; and we get stronger and more nimble,” said Napolitano, who is leaving her post to become the head of the University of California school system.

As evidence, she pointed to the country’s response to the bombing at the Boston Marathon earlier this year and the stronger local and state relationships that have been forged while she has led the department.

Napolitano also lauded the department’s move — under direction from President Obama — to allow children brought to the U.S. illegally to remain in the country.

The Deferred Action for Childhood Arrivals (DACA) process has allowed 430,000 young people to stay in the United States.

Napolitano stressed that the prosecutorial discretion, which many Republicans have boisterously objected to, has made the country’s immigration system more sound, but that comprehensive legislation still needs to be passed.

Obama has not weighed in on who Napolitano’s successor will be, but several names have been floated as strong contenders. Chief among them is New York City Police Commissioner Ray Kelly, who has remained mum about whether he’s been in talks about the post.

Former Sen. Joseph Lieberman (I-Conn.), who headed the Senate Homeland Security and Governmental Affairs Committee, which played a key role in creating the department, has also been suggested for the post, as have former Deputy Secretary Jane Lute and Bill Bratton, the former head of police for Boston, Los Angeles, and New York City.

While secretary, Napolitano has remained relatively unscathed by congressional investigations and potential scandals within the department. Many Republicans, though they disagree with some of her policy decisions, have applauded her tenure in the demanding position, calling attention to the “thankless” nature of her job.

Only 10 years old, the Department of Homeland Security is the largest agency in the country, encompassing a wide range of federal responsibilities and offices that range from immigration and border enforcement to port and aviation security.

Napolitano said it was imperative that her future successor continues to “move to a more risk-based, intelligence-driven security system” with the nation’s approach to aviation security.

She also highlighted chemical, biological, radiological and nuclear security measures; securing large-scale public events, such as the Inauguration and the national party conventions; and the Coast Guard, as areas that will need continued attention under the department’s new leadership.



Mac Slavo
August 28th, 2013

Outgoing Department of Homeland Security secretary Janet Napolitano ominously warned of a coming “cyber event” in an open letter to her successor this week, claiming that such an attack on the domestic internet “will have a serious effect on our lives, our economy, and the everyday functioning of our society.”

With tensions at a breaking point in the middle east, and all military options on the table, there can be no doubt that we (meaning all sides involved) are now engaged in cyber warfare ahead of traditional military activities.

According to Akamai, which monitors global internet conditions, the United States is experiencing a surge in web attacks this morning, clocking in at 81% above normal.


Via: The Woodpile Report
See the Real Time Web Attack Heat Map

While not necessarily indicative of an immediate threat to the national cyber infrastructure, the up-surge in web attacks comes on the heels of last week’s breakdown of the NASDAQ trading system, which handles billions of dollars in capital flows on an hourly basis.

Last week may have been a prelude to what is to come should the United States and western allies launch another offensive in the middle east. As we reported last week, one major internet security firm indicated that the attack on the U.S. stock exchange was not a “glitch” as suggested by the NASDAQ. Rather, it may have originated from the Cyber Fighters of Izz ad-Din al-Qassam, an Iranian backed organization.

Russia, China, Iran, Syria and a host of other nations would like nothing more than to end U.S. hegemony in the middle east, and bringing down our domestic internet could be one potential strategy should conflict spread beyond the borders of Syria.

As noted by Napolitano, such an attack could be crippling to the systems of commerce that keep the U.S. economy moving. Should an attack, for example, target the merchant processing systems and large banking institutions like they did the NASDAQ utilizing a large-scale coordinated distributed denial of service attack (DDOS) it would paralyze the flow of money between customers, companies, and their financial accounts.

Such an “event” would have immediate consequences for all aspects of commerce including everything from just-in-time stocking of grocery stores and transportation systems, to labor force compensation and consumer activity.

In addition, DHS and well known Cyber Security firms like Norton and Mcafee have previously warned that attacks would likely not be limited to just our systems of commerce, but would also target physical infrastructure like the power grid, water plants and oil refinery operations.

When Janet Napolitano suggests the effects on our lives will be “serious,” she means it. In a study looking at the effects of a widespread infrastructure outage that targets our power grid for an extended period of time it was noted that a large percentage of the population – up to 90% of americans – would be dead within a year.

The U.S. government has been simulating the collapse of our financial system as the result of a cyber attack for many years. They know this is a distinct possibility, so they are preparing for it.

We urge our readers to consider the ramifications of such an attack and make an effort to prepare personal contingency plans should it ever come to pass. The blow back could potentially be as disastrous as a nuclear weapon being detonated in a major U.S. city.



by Dave Hodges |
August 26, 2013

All historians are familiar with how Hitler was able to seize and consolidate power within the German Reichstag. He simply had his henchmen burn the German legislative building to the ground and then blamed the Communists, one of the Nazi’s chief rivals. Subsequently, Hitler assumed total dictatorial power, as a pretense to protect the German people, and he was able to eliminate the Communists and the rest, as they say, was history.



Obama Is Under Immense Pressure

Obama is under enormous pressure, from the Banksters to take out the Iranian regime. They need to take down Iran because the U.S. dollar is in real trouble, because Iran has been selling its oil to India, China and Russia in exchange for gold.

Gold is a four letter word to the Banksters. The Banksters must maintain their fiat currency schemes. Subsequently, the Banksters must dominate the purchase of oil and the distribution of gold for three reasons:

(1) The Banksters thrive on fiat currency which is backed by virtually nothing and this is coupled with fractional reserve practices in order to acquire real material wealth based on their creation of worthless paper and the introduction of gold threatens this Ponzi scheme;

(2) Since Breton Woods, the world has been forced by the Banksters to play in their Ponzi scheme game by first purchasing Federal Reserve dollars which is in turn used to purchase oil. Saddam Hussein failed to play by the Petrodollar rules by selling oil for Euros and paid for his disobedience with his life; and,

(3) Once the Banksters collapse all the currencies of the world, they want to be the ones controlling the gold, the only remaining currency, in a post economic Armageddon.

Obama Is In Deep Trouble

If Obama wants to complete his second term, he must also get help from the globalists in managing the enormous Watergate type of scenarios which surfaced in May of 2013 that included:

(1) The Ed Snowden NSA spy revelations;

(2) The IRS harassing the Tea Party members at the behest of Obama;

(3) The administration’s spying on AP reporters;

(4) the Michael Hastings murder (June 2013); and,

(5) The Benghazi Affair which refuses to go away.

Any of these five events provides sufficient cause for Obama’s removal from office as they dwarf Nixon’s misdeeds in the Watergate Scandal.

The United States is three months away from near simultaneous revelations, the likes, have never been seen in this quantity and severity in American history. I stopped believing in coincidences a long time ago. The release of the scandalous information related to these events is being orchestrated and controlled by the overlords and their media minions. Why?  Obama is dragging his feet on Middle East intervention and the globalists are attempting to move him off of the mark with some friendly blackmail.

As previously stated, Iran is undermining the U.S. dollar. Conversely, China and Russia have threatened to nuke the United States if they invade Syria and Iran over the issue of gold for oil. Make no mistake about it. Iran is the chief prize. Egypt is a tragic, but useful distraction because of the loss of life. The events in Syria are merely a means to an end and only serves as the preliminary event in preparation for the main event, the destruction of Iran. Syria must be taken down first, then Iran will surely follow. Mark my words, Assad will be hanging from a noose, Saddam style, in a few short months.

Why Attack Syria Before Iran?

If Iran is the prize, then why is the United States on the precipice of attacking Syria? Simple, all roads to Teheran run through Damsacus. Syria is one of Iran’s few remaining allies and controlling Syria is the key to a successful invasion of Iran. Most importantly, capturing Syria largely blocks a Russian land force military incursion into Syria so long as the U.S. is successful in quickly setting up its short and medium range missile batteries inside of Syria. These batteries are a crucial element in blocking Russian military troop movements into Syria.

For Obama to take out Syria, he has to neutralize their command and control structure. This means taking out their aerial surveillance capabilities, its Air Force, controlling the movement of their tanks and other heavy military equipment as well as isolating Syrian military units from the air and preventing them from reinforcing Damascus. This leaves Assad vulnerable.

Once the Syrian military is isolated and divided, the CIA backed al-Qaeda forces will turn the tide of the CIA backed Syrian civil war and this will effectively take care of Assad in the same manner that they took care of Gaddafi in Libya.

In order to launch a successful air campaign, the U.S. needs a pretext so horrific, so terrible that global opinion will demand a military incursion to “save the innocent Syrian people.”  To accomplish this goal, Obama has already done what he does best, create a Reichstag moment (i.e. false flag).

The CIA Backed al-Qaeda Lights the Fuse

Syria has just experienced its Reichstag moment. Three Damascus hospitals supported by Doctors Without Borders state that they are treating 3,600 patients who are exhibiting neurotoxic symptoms, which occurred in one brief, three hour period on August 21, 2013. Of the 3,600 patients, 355 have died. This is Syria’s Reichstag moment as Assad is being framed for this chemical weapons attack.

The Assad forces have been widely accused for perpetuating this crime against humanity through the purposeful release of neurotoxic agents. However, only a fool with no common sense would believe that Assad is behind the chemical weapons attacks. Assad would avoid at all costs doing that one thing that could invite U.S. or NATO intervention into Syria. The use of chemical weapons by Assad would provide NATO with the pretext to launch airstrikes which would tip the balance of power in Syria in the same manner as it did in Libya.

As I write these words, Defense Secretary Chuck Hagel is moving American attack forces into range of Syria and these forces are awaiting President Obama’s decision to begin the attack.  Russia is showing signs of backing down as they have encourage Assad to allow UN inspectors into Syria. My assessment is that Russia and China will stand down with regard to American airstrikes into Syria because they know that this chemical weapons false flag attack, perpetuated by the CIA backed al-Qaeda forces, has proven successful and these two nations cannot be seen as supporting such a criminal regime.

China and Russia have one main objective, save Iran.  They can still stand down in Syria, to be able to discourage an American led invasion of Iran. The Chinese and Russians will also still possess the nuclear option at their disposal in protecting their gold for oil investment in Iran. Subsequently, the U.S. will continue to support al-Qaeda backed Syrian rebels as they overthrow Assad and consolidate their gains over the next few weeks. As in Iraq, look for BP and EXXON to control Syrian oil and prevent any further undermining of the Petrodollar in Syria as in Iran.

Once one covers the establishment’s game plan related to a multitude of issues, their next moves become relatively simple to predict because the Banksters predictably use the same playbook time after time. In order to predict their next moves, we have to think like the genocidal maniac banksters.

As the United States consolidates its holdings in Syria, negates Russian land force incursions and begins to bring money into the Federal Reserve and the Bank of International Settlement through their soon-to-be Syrian holdings, plans will be implemented to develop an excuse for an invasion of Iran.

Ask yourself, what could be the one thing that Iran could be accused of doing that would gather the support of the world for invading Iran and force the Chinese and the Russians to stand down? The answer is undoubtedly a false flag operation, the likes that the world has never seen. What could be so horrific, so terrible that Iran could be framed as the perpetrator? The globalists have already set the stage for the next false flag event. What has Iran been repeatedly accused of? They have been accused of attempting to develop nuclear weapons. The American public has already been conditioned to associate nuclear weapons with Iran, even though many legitimately question this association.

If you are still thinking like a genocidal maniac, there are two variables to consider, a nuclear detonation on American soil and/or a massive and virulent chemical weapons attack launched against America citizens. I believe it is likely that the Boston Marathon bombing was the dress rehearsal for what is coming. As in Boston, we will see quick apprehensions of alleged Iranian terrorists. Summary execution of the so-called perpetrators will follow an imaginary standoff and evidence will be planted so there is no question of Iranian guilt. Look for a group of U.S. veterans to be implicated as well as it will solidify the justification for the imposition of martial law in the United States. DHS will then take to the streets in their new 2700 armored vehicles to begin rounding up U.S. citizens.


boston martial law dhs


Predicting Dates Is Normally a Fool’s Errand

Syria will fall in September. A false flag event would likely happen next, and it will be game over in Iran by Thanksgiving. I do not predict dates, ever. However, in this instance, I am going to make an exception.

There are two dates that loom large in our future over the next four months that have the globalists highly concerned. The globalists do not want to raise conscious awareness of the Bankster controlled organized crime syndicate which hijacked our government in 2008.

The first date that the globalists are concerned about is the lead up to November 22nd. This is the 50th anniversary of the JFK assassination.  A whole new generation, who has never looked at the JFK assassination, will be awakened and begin to ask questions about what actually happened on that day, and who the forces are who still yield their perverse influence over America in 2013.

The second date that must be very troubling to the globalists is the 100th anniversary of the creation of the Federal Reserve. Talk shows and websites will be abuzz with revelations about these criminal bankers and the fact that the dollar is actually worth about 3 cents. People who have never heard of fractional reserve banking and a fiat currency will hear about it from November 22-December 23. The Banksters do not want to contend with an increasingly awake America. This would make the subjugation of the U.S. much more difficult for them.

These are the reasons that the globalists are expediting their timetable for subjugation of the United States. This is why Obama’s hand is being forced by holding five Watergate type scandals over his head at the same time. Following the coming false flag attacks on the United States in October, the country will be in complete military lockdown and it will become increasingly difficult for citizens to stand up to the tyrants.

These events are only possible if we have a psychopathic, genocidal set of maniacs calling the shots. The more awake the population becomes to the fact that this is the case, the better chance we have of stopping it.

Right now, America has some very disturbing variables which are being simultaneously put into play by the globalists. World War III is a definite possibility. False flag attacks on American soil may be a likely event over the next 60 days. These are times of unparalleled danger in America.

Please take some common sense steps which involves acquiring storable food and water and a means to protect your family and your resources. Educating your neighbors to these events is critical in the development of neighborhood defense groups which will be needed to protect against the looters that will sure accompany the coming crises. Your survival could very well depend on you educating your neighbors because you will need their help in the coming weeks and months.













READ THE PLAN TO ATTACK IRAN: WHICH PATH TO PERSIA? Options for a New American Strategy toward Iran




















Published on Aug 20, 2013

Author and educator Steve Shenk also joins the broadcast to talk about the government’s massive stockpiling of storable foods.



Feds preparing for calamity?

Paul Joseph Watson
August 6, 2013

The Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) is contacting storable food suppliers requesting immediate delivery of food reserves within a 24 hour period, increasing suspicions that the federal government is accelerating its preparations for social disorder or an environmental calamity.

FEMA recently contacted My Patriot Supply, a provider of bulk food reserves, requesting “immediate delivery” of truckloads of food within a 24 hour period. Instead of soliciting for the food in the normal manner via the Federal Business Opportunities website and thereby saving money, FEMA is now directly contacting suppliers in order to secure overnight deliveries of bulk food. The snapshot above shows one of the emails My Patriot Supply received from FEMA.

While it’s certainly not unusual for FEMA to be buying storable food, the rushed manner with which the federal agency is now conducting such business has raised a few eyebrows, prompting the owner of My Patriot Supply to ask, “Why the sudden sense of urgency? What do they know that we do not?”

“I’m not one to cry that the sky is always falling, but when DHS/FEMA make a move to quietly buy up emergency food supplies and ask how much we can ship within 24 hours…I think this is far enough outside the realm of what is “normal” to beg some questions,“ remarked the company’s owner.

“In recent years the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) has been regionalizing disaster supplies and rapidly procuring hundreds of millions of ready-to-eat meals, blankets, and body bags. Coupled with the Department of Homeland Security’s suspiciously massive purchases of ammunition, firearms, and riot gear, it is becoming increasingly clear that the U.S. government is positioning itself in advance of an as of yet unknown widespread calamity,” writes Mac Slavo.

Indeed, FEMA is not the only branch of the Department of Homeland Security demanding the immediate delivery of provisions within as quick a time frame as possible.

As we highlighted back in May, the DHS itself released a market survey asking companies if they were able to provide 2 million rounds of ammunition within a 30-60 day period.

“If you were awarded a contract for some of the calibers listed above, submitted a production lot of one million rounds and that lot or portion of the lot was not accepted, would you be able to replace that order with an additional one million rounds within 60 days?” the survey asked.

Similar to how the DHS’ huge bullet purchases over the last 18 months have caused shortages in ammunition, bulk food reserves are also becoming more scarce as a result of massive FEMA stockpiling, prompting concerns that “something is ready to pop off.”

Although FEMA is now purchasing storable food in quantities amounting to $1 billion dollars a year, individual Americans who follow their example by stocking up with bulk food buys are simultaneously being labeled as potential terrorists by the federal government.

As we reported last year, a flyer aimed at Military Surplus stores produced under the auspices of the FBI’s Communities Against Terrorism project, encourages owners to report people who “make bulk purchases of items to include….meals ready to eat”.

According to the flyer, the FBI advises store owners to demand ID’s from all new customers, as well as asking them questions about their purchase and being aware of “suspicious statements”.



By David Gumpert
August 13, 2013

This would seem to embody the USDA’s advisory, “Know your farmer, know your food,” right? Not exactly.

For the USDA and its sister food regulator, the FDA, there’s a problem: many of the farmers are distributing the food via private contracts like herd shares and leasing arrangements, which fall outside the regulatory system of state and local retail licenses and inspections that govern public food sales.

In response, federal and state regulators are seeking legal sanctions against farmers in Maine, Pennsylvania, Wisconsin, Minnesota, and California, among others. These sanctions include injunctions, fines, and even prison sentences.

Food sold by unlicensed and uninspected farmers is potentially dangerous say the regulators, since it can carry pathogens like salmonella, campylobacter, and E.coli O157:H7, leading to mild or even serious illness.

Most recently, Wisconsin’s attorney general appointed a special prosecutor to file criminal misdemeanor charges against an Amish farmer for alleged failure to have retail and dairy licenses, and the proceedings turned into a high-profile jury trial in late May that highlighted the depth of conflict: following five days of intense proceedings, the 12-person jury acquitted the farmer, Vernon Hershberger, on all the licensing charges, while convicting him of violating a 2010 holding order on his food, which he had publicly admitted.
Why are hard-working normally law-abiding farmers aligning with urban and suburban consumers to flaunt well-established food safety regulations and statutes? Why are parents, who want only the best for their children, seeking out food that regulators say could be dangerous? And, why are regulators and prosecutors feeling so threatened by this trend?

Members of these private food groups often buy from local farmers because they want food from animals that are treated humanely, allowed to roam on pasture, and not treated with antibiotics. “I really want food that is full of nutrients and the animals to be happy and content,” says Jenny DeLoney, a Madison, WI, mother of three young children who buys from Hershberger.

To these individuals, many of whom are parents, safety means not only food free of pathogens, but food free of pesticides, antibiotic residues, and excessive processing. It means food created the old-fashioned way—from animals allowed to eat grass instead of feed made from genetically modified (GMO) grains—and sold the old-fashioned way, privately by the farmer to the consumer, who is free to visit the farm and see the animals.

Many of these consumers have viewed the secretly-made videos of downer cows being prodded into slaughterhouses and chickens so crammed into coops they can barely breathe.

These consumers are clearly interpreting “safety” differently than the regulators. Some of these consumers are going further than claiming contract rights—they are pushing their towns and cities to legitimize private farmer-consumer arrangements.

In Maine, residents of ten coastal towns have approved so-called “food sovereignty” ordinances that legalize unregulated food sales; towns in other states, including Massachusetts and Vermont, and as far away as Santa Cruz, CA, have passed similar ordinances.

The new legal offensive isn’t going over well with regulators anywhere. Aside from the Hershberger action in Wisconsin, and a similar one in Minnesota, Maine’s Department of Agriculture filed suit against a two-cow farmer, Dan Brown, in one of the food-sovereignty towns, Blue Hill, seeking fines and, in effect, to invalidate all the Maine ordinances.

In April, a state court ruled against the farmer, and in effect against the towns; sentencing is due within several weeks, and the case could well be appealed.

The jury in the criminal misdemeanor case of Minnesota farmer Alvin Schlangen last September acquitted him of all charges after several hours of deliberation. But the regulators’ push against privately-distributed food continues unabated.

The Minnesota Department of Agriculture has moved forward with a local prosecutor in Schlangen’s rural county, pressing similar criminal charges as the ones he was acquitted of in Minneapolis. He is scheduled to go on trial again in August. And in Wisconsin, prosecutors sought, unsuccessfully, to have Vernon Hershberger jailed for allegedly violating his jail terms since charges were filed in late 2011.

At its heart, this is a struggle over a steady erosion of confidence in the integrity of our industrial food system, which has been hit by disturbing disclosures seemingly on a weekly basis. In just the last few weeks, for example, we have seen shrimp, cookies, and veggie burgers recalled by the FDA for being sold with undeclared ingredients.

Also in recent weeks, members of Congress and the U.S. Centers for Disease Control have escalated warnings about the growing danger of antibiotic resistant pathogens emerging from farm animals, which consume about 80 percent of all antibiotics in the U.S. The Atlantic reported last summer that medical specialists are seeing a spike in women with urinary tract infections caused by antibiotic-resistant bacteria, likely transmitted by chicken meat.

This erosion in the confidence of the food system carries serious implications. It financially threatens large corporations if long-established food brands come under prolonged and severe public questioning.

It threatens economic performance if foods deemed “safe” become scarcer, and thus more expensive. And it is potentially explosive politically if too many people lose confidence in the professionalism of the food regulators who are supposed to be protecting us from tainted food, and encourages folks to exit the public food system for private solutions like the consumers in Minnesota, Wisconsin, Maine, and elsewhere.

Just look at the vituperative corporate response to recent consumer-led campaigns to label foods with genetically-modified ingredients.

As more consumers become intent on making the final decisions on what foods they are going to feed themselves and their families, and regulators become just as intent on asserting what they see as their authority over inspecting and licensing all food, ugly scenarios of agitated citizens battling government authorities over access to food staples seem likely to proliferate.

It’s an unfortunate recipe for a new kind of rights movement centered on the most basic acts—what we choose to eat.



by Dave Hodges |

August 28, 2013

“If people let government decide what foods they eat and what medicines they take, their bodies will soon be in as sorry a state as are the souls of those who live under tyranny.” – Thomas Jefferson

I grew up at a time in American history where school children were taught that people in the Soviet Union could not grow food without the express permission of the government and we made fun of the Russians.

Now the United States is stating that its citizens may not grow food without the express permission of the government. The daily news media is replete with stories of government harassment against individuals attempting to grow their own food.

No Vegetables for You

The USDA’s Rural Development Agency take pleasure in bullying the young and the handicapped as they are forbidding Rosie, a 4-year old girl, from South Dakota, from planting green vegetables in an unused area outside her subsidized housing unit.

Rosie and her mom live on a fixed income disability payment of $628 per month. The garden vegetables growing just outside her backdoor was created to help provide a much needed boost to their food supply.

No Chickens for You

From Glendale, AZ., a posting on Phoenix’s permaculture message board revealed the following  development in which a man cannot raise chickens nor can this resident possess food-bearing plants. Welcome to Agenda 21.

“I just got notice that I must get rid of my 3 chickens, chicken coop and garden and remove unripe fruit from my orange tree since my lot is not zoned for agriculture.  Yes, I got notified that my garden and any food bearing plants are not allowed.  My orange tree can stay as long as I remove all the unripe fruit from it.  I must rip up my garden and my grapevines. I live near 63rd and Kings.

The lady at neighborhood services said none of the above are allowed.  I asked about the garden and grapevines and she said food bearing plants attract pests and rodents and are not allowed in residential areas of Glendale.  Orange trees are allowed as long as the fruit is not allowed to ripen.  All unripe fruit has to be removed and disposed of.  I was told I could join a community garden if I want to grow my own food.  I think Glendale is starting to get desperate for making money.  She said the fine if I do not comply will be over $2000 per violation with up to six months imprisonment and community service.”

My question to the City of Glendale is “What difference does it make?”

No Goats Milk for You

Don’t ever let the authorities know that you feed your baby healthy homemade baby formula.

Alorah Gellerson of Brooklin, Maine is experiencing federal persecution because she was discovered feeding fresh goats milk to her three-month old son, Carson.

Gellerson complied with all government demands by no longer feeding her baby goats milk and substituting GMO milk. However, the authorities are still threatening to remove her son.

The lessons of history clearly demonstrate that dictatorial regimes will not hesitate to use food as a weapon against their own people in order to solidify power and impose absolute autocratic control. Food can be withheld from the masses by preventing it from being grown and harvested, by contaminating it and rendering it unfit for human consumption or by simply preventing food from being distributed to a targeted population.

The two most notable examples of dictators using food a weapon in order to destroy the free will of their people comes from the regime of Joseph Stalin.

Stalin was engaged in his own Soviet style Holocaust when, in 1932 and 1933, and estimated six to 20 million people in the Ukraine died from starvation when he  implemented his prescription of “hope and change” policies to eliminate the Ukrainian’s desire for becoming their own nation-state.

Upon assuming power, the Stalinist Communist regime rapidly nationalized the food industry and forced all of the region’s farms into collectives. Thus, Stalin’s version of the Holocaust came to fruition in what history has dubbed, the “Holdomor,” in which millions died in only a two year period when the Soviet government began to exterminate the Ukrainian population by taking control of the food supply.

Third world population control, using food as one of the primary weapons, has long been a matter of official covert national policy and a portion of President Obama’s Executive Order (EO 13603), National Defense Resources Preparedness is a continuation of that policy.  However, this time the intended targets are not third world countries but instead you and me.

With the stroke of his pen, Obama has total and absolute control over all food.  His Executive Order states:

e)  “Food resources” means all commodities and products, (simple, mixed, or compound), or complements to such commodities or products, that are capable of being ingested by either human beings or animals, irrespective of other uses to which such commodities or products may be put, at all stages of processing from the raw commodity to the products thereof in vendible form for human or animal consumption.  “Food resources” also means potable water packaged in commercially marketable containers, all starches, sugars, vegetable and animal or marine fats and oils, seed, cotton, hemp, and flax fiber, but does not mean any such material after it loses its identity as an agricultural commodity or agricultural product.

(f)  “Food resource facilities” means plants, machinery, vehicles (including on farm), and other facilities required for the production, processing, distribution, and storage (including cold storage) of food resources, and for the domestic distribution of farm equipment and fertilizer…”

This unconstitutional EO is particularly disturbing because it clearly states that the government has control over anything that is “capable of being ingested by either human beings or animals…”  If you thought that you and Fido were going to get through the coming food crisis by storing and consuming dog food, think again.

How will farmers maintain the nation’s food supply when all fertilizer, their farm equipment and all of their vehicles are under the control of this sociopathic President or the next power-hungry President?

The term “all food storage facilities” includes your refrigerator, your pantry and even the very food in your cabinets as well as what is on your kitchen table. In short, anywhere you keep food is now under the direct control of the federal government and can be redistributed.

The government is getting us right where they want us where they will control all food and as a result, they will completely control us. And it is coming none to soon for them as we prepare to invade Syria and then Iran. Marital law will surely follow and food control will be used as the primary weapon against Americans.



By Bill Van Auken | Global Research
July 27, 2013

This week’s deployment of Blackhawk helicopters in Chicago is only the latest in a series of “urban warfare training” exercises that have become a familiar feature of American life.

As elsewhere, this exercise was sprung unannounced on a startled civilian population. Conducted in secrecy, apparently with the collusion of local police agencies and elected officials, Democrats and Republicans alike, the ostensible purpose of these exercises is to give US troops experience in what Pentagon doctrine refers to as “Military Operations on Urban Terrain.”

Such operations are unquestionably of central importance to the US military. Over the past decade, its primary mission, as evidenced in Afghanistan and Iraq, has been the invasion and occupation of relatively powerless countries and the subjugation of their resisting populations, often in house-to-house fighting in urban centers.

The Army operates a 1,000 acre Urban Training Center in south-central Indiana that boasts over 1,500 “training structures” designed to simulate houses, schools, hospitals and factories. The center’s web site states that it “can be tailored to replicate both foreign and domestic scenarios.”

What does flying Blackhawks low over Chicago apartment buildings or rolling armored military convoys through the streets of St. Louis accomplish that cannot be achieved through the sprawling training center’s simulations? Last year alone, there were at least seven such exercises, including in Los Angeles, Chicago, Miami, Tampa, St. Louis, Minneapolis and Creeds, Virginia.

The most obvious answer is that these exercises accustom troops to operating in US cities, while desensitizing the American people to the domestic deployment of US military might.

Preparations for such deployments are already far advanced. Over the past decade, under the pretext of prosecuting a “global war on terror,” Washington has enacted a raft of repressive legislation and created a vast new bureaucracy of state control under the Department of Homeland Security. Under the Obama administration, the White House has claimed the power to throw enemies of the state into indefinite military detention or even assassinate them on US soil by means of drone strikes, while radically expanding electronic spying on the American population.

Part of this process has been the ceaseless growth of the power of the US military and its increasing intervention into domestic affairs. In 2002, the creation of the US Northern Command for the first time dedicated a military command to operations within the US itself.

Just last May, the Pentagon announced the implementation of new rules of engagement for US military forces operating on American soil to provide “support” to “civilian law enforcement authorities, including responses to civil disturbances.”

The document declares sweeping and unprecedented military powers under a section entitled “Emergency Authority.” It asserts the authority of a “federal military commander” in “extraordinary emergency circumstances where prior authorization by the president is impossible and duly constituted local authorities are unable to control the situation, to engage temporarily in activities that are necessary to quell large-scale, unexpected civil disturbances.” In other words, the Pentagon brass claims the unilateral authority to impose martial law.

These powers are not being asserted for the purpose of defending the US population against terrorism or to counter some hypothetical emergency. The US military command is quite conscious of where the danger lies.

In a recent article, a senior instructor at the Fort Leavenworth Command and General Staff College and former director of the Army’s School of Advanced Military Studies laid out a telling scenario for a situation in which the military could intervene.

“The Great Recession of the early twenty-first century lasts far longer than anyone anticipated. After a change in control of the White House and Congress in 2012, the governing party cuts off all funding that had been dedicated to boosting the economy or toward relief. The United States economy has flatlined, much like Japan’s in the 1990s, for the better part of a decade. By 2016, the economy shows signs of reawakening, but the middle and lower-middle classes have yet to experience much in the way of job growth or pay raises. Unemployment continues to hover perilously close to double digits …”

In other words, the Pentagon sees these conditions—which differ little from what exists in the US today—producing social upheavals that can be quelled only by means of military force.

What is being upended, behind the scenes and with virtually no media coverage, much less public debate, are constitutional principles dating back centuries that bar the use of the military in civilian law enforcement. In the Declaration of Independence itself, the indictment justifying revolution against King George included the charge that he had “affected to render the Military independent of and superior to the Civil power.”

Side by side with the rising domestic power of the military, the supposedly civilian police have been militarized. An article published by the Wall Street Journal last weekend entitled “The Rise of the Warrior Cop” graphically described this process:

“Driven by martial rhetoric and the availability of military-style equipment—from bayonets and M-16 rifles to armored personnel carriers—American police forces have often adopted a mind-set previously reserved for the battlefield. The war on drugs and, more recently, post-9/11 antiterrorism efforts have created a new figure on the US scene: the warrior cop—armed to the teeth, ready to deal harshly with targeted wrongdoers, and a growing threat to familiar American liberties.”

The article describes the vast proliferation of SWAT (Special Weapons and Tactics) units to virtually every town in America, fueled by some $35 billion in grants from the Department of Homeland Security, “with much of the money going to purchase military gear such as armored personnel carriers.”

This armed force was on full display in April when what amounted to a state of siege was imposed on the city of Boston, ostensibly to capture one teenage suspect. The entire population of a major American city was locked in their homes as combat-equipped police, virtually indistinguishable from troops, occupied the streets and conducted warrantless house-to-house searches.

Underlying this unprecedented militarization of US society are two parallel processes. The immense widening of the social chasm separating the billionaires and multi-millionaires who control economic and political life from American working people, the great majority of the population, is fundamentally incompatible with democracy and requires other forms of rule. At the same time, the turn to militarism as the principal instrument of US foreign policy has vastly increased the power of the military within the US state apparatus.

Both America’s ruling oligarchy and the Pentagon command recognize that profound social polarization and deepening economic crisis must give rise to social upheavals. They are preparing accordingly.



State and local governments continue to beef up their response teams, expending millions in the process

Julie Wilson

August 14, 2013

Government alleged “terrorist attacks” can take many forms these days ranging from biological warfare to remotely hijacking your car or even detonating a bomb out of a backpack. Despite proof that historically most of these attacks have been organized by the government for political gains, states continue to routinely coordinate emergency response drills.

Multifarious “terror threats” have managed to spread into nearly every city and state across the country preparing first responders and conditioning citizens for any kind of “emergency” you can think of.

This week Columbus, Ohio plans to engage in a training exercise that will involve nearly 6,000 military staff and veterans in order to simulate a “terrorist attack,” reports WBNS-TV.

The state will use resources from the following agencies: Ohio Emergency Management Agency, Franklin County Emergency Management, Homeland Security, Department of Defense and Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA), to perform a drill at military Camp Atterbury and also at Camp Muscatatuck in southern Indiana.

Surely assembling state and government agencies to perform drills isn’t exactly budget friendly.  When weighed with the probability of these “attacks” actually occurring, funds could seemingly be put to better use.

Last week 600 National Guard troops and airmen conducted a drill simulating a massive chemical train derailment in Westchester County, N.Y. Troops carrying out the drill wore hazardous material suits and searched for “victims” of a mock spill that would’ve threatened communities, reported WCBS.

Reuters released a report last spring describing the “first simulated test of a terrorist attack on a nuclear power plant” in Pa. as a success. Although the test was performed at Three Mile Island, the site of the worst commercial nuclear accident in U.S. history, officials said the location had no significance. The Nuclear Regulatory Commission has mandated 65 nuclear power plants to practice terrorist attack drills every two years, testing their preparedness. The test involved 1,200 participants in 76 municipalities including 15 school districts.

In April the NYPD orchestrated a $3.4 million drill meant to bolster the department’s response to a biological warfare attack in the city’s subway system. Police released what they called “harmless” gas into 21 of the city’s 34 subway lines over a three day period in an attempt to monitor the colorless gas tracing it as it dispersed, reported RT.

Experts argue the gas used wasn’t so harmless. In fact, the NYPD themselves admitted in their drill notice that the health affects of per-fluorocarbons are widely unknown. Infowars disclosed the dangers in a report linking gas exposure to the early onset of menopause and revealed that animals exposed to the gas suffered from altered liver and thyroid function, increased tumor risks and failed reproductive organs.

The N.Y. gas drill originated after investigators allegedly “foiled an Al-Qaeda terrorist plot” to bomb the New York subways on the eighth anniversary of the September 11 attacks, reported Fox News.

Attorney General Eric Holder called it “one of the most serious threats” to the US since 2001.

Of course Holder’s statement came prior to the latest “global terror alert” that originated in early August and is set to span the entire month, leaving several US embassies closed and instilling fear into traveling Americans worldwide.

An Infowars report illustrated the State Department’s attempt to justify and even deflect the spotlight aimed at the NSA following whistle blower Edward Snowden’s release of secret documents that confirmed the agencies’ spy tactics are directly targeting innocent Americans.

Infowars reporter Paul Joseph Watson argues that the global issued terror alert is a ploy to “damped opposition to drone strikes” that have now spread into Yemen  killing a total of 37 since late July.

The “global terror alert” followed national exposure of the CIA running an arms smuggling operation during last year’s Benghazi attack that left Ambassador Christopher Stevens and three other Americans dead, further highlighting the depths of corruption operating within the CIA.

According to Paul Joseph Watson’s report, 50 civilians are killed for each terrorist that’s taken out by a drone strike, meaning 95% of deaths resulting from drone strikes are innocent men, women and children.

Even more recently, Austin, Texas and Pasadena, Calif. managed to become targets for a potential backpack bomb following the conclusion of the Ramadan period. A DHS document leaked to Infowars late last week claimed “unspecified terrorists or a terrorist group will emulate the Boston bombing by using backpack explosives. The target is said to be 6th Street in Austin, a popular tourist attraction that is crowded on weekends.”

Despite the low probability of being killed in a terrorist attack, state and local governments continue to beef up their response teams, expending millions in the process. They ignore the fact that you’re one thousand times more likely to die in a car accident, which Obama admitted himself on a recent Jay Leno appearance.

These simulated terrorist attack drills serve no purpose but to restrain the public to a constant state of fear conditioning them to habitual military control and presence. Meanwhile the world’s most powerful terrorist, the US government, conducts business as usual compromising the safety of Americans through a slew of foreign policies that includes the slaughter of innocent men, women and children.

With the continuous growth of government, particularly in the branches that exert authoritative control, terror drills are most likely here.  They provide the military an excuse to maintain their ominous presence offering the government a smokescreen to camouflage their staged terror attacks.



Enough for its agents to fire 9,400 bullets a day, every day of the year

Paul Joseph Watson
August 19, 2013

The Transportation Security Administration is set to purchase 3.5 million .357 SIG caliber bullets, enough for its agents to fire 9,400 rounds a day, every day of the year.

Image: YouTube

According to a solicitation issued by the agency on August 16, the TSA is looking to buy “3,454,000 rounds of .347 SIG Caliber Training Ammunition”.

Although TSA agents in airports are currently unarmed, last month the TSA announced its plan to hire the use of a firing range within a 20 mile radius of LaGuardia Airport in order to train TSA workers.

The federal agency’s huge bullet buy could signal an expansion of its controversial Visible Intermodal Prevention and Response (VIPR) program, where teams of armed TSA officers patrol railroad stations, bus stations, ferries, car tunnels, ports, subways, truck weigh stations, rest areas, and special events.

VIPR teams currently conduct around 8,000 operations a year. As well as providing security at transport hubs, VIPR teams are now being used to keep tabs on fans at sporting events.

Earlier this month it was announced that VIPR agents would now be patting down Americans “outside the airport” by conducting stop and search shake downs at transport hubs and public events.

As Government Security News notes, the amount of ammunition being purchased, “means the TSA could fire off more than 9,400 rounds per day, every day of the year, to consume that entire quantity annually.”

Significant bullet purchases by the TSA are likely to fuel concerns that the federal government is arming itself to the teeth in preparation for some form of domestic unrest or other catastrophe, following the Department of Homeland Security’s commitment to purchase more than 1.6 billion rounds of ammunition over the course of the last 18 months.

As we reported last week, Congressman Jeff Duncan’s attempt to get answers on why the IRS is also training its agents with semi-automatic AR-15′s designed for “standoff capability” has been ignored by the federal agency.



TSA now wants to buy 3.5 million rounds

by Bob Unruh | World Net Daily

The federal government drew the ire of Congress for sucking up ammunition supplies so fast that citizens and even police forces have been unable to meet their own needs.

Lawmakers looked into legislation to force the feds to back off, but apparently nothing has been done.

The latest agency to buy massive amounts of ammunition is the Transportation Security Administration, which doesn’t even arm most of its agents.

The website reports that the TSA is seeking to purchase nearly 3.5 million rounds of .347 SIG caliber training ammunition. Weapons experts told WND the .347 is an unknown caliber, and the document likely contained a mistake, instead intending to reference a .357 caliber.

The agency’s workers mostly are unarmed, with the primary exception being the federal air marshals who travel aboard airliners to deter and respond to violence, hijackings and terrorism.

There are no firm numbers available on the number of agents, but experts estimate there are several thousand. The planned purchase, then, would give the agency the availability of nearly 10,000 rounds per day for “training.”

TSA officials declined to respond to a WND request for more information.

Department of Homeland Security Secretary Janet Napolitan0 admitted in April that the federal government was drying up ammunition supplies.

She was asked by a House panel about the huge government purchases, estimated to be in the range of 1.6 billion rounds, enough for many years of war at the rate ammunition is used by the U.S. military.

Rep. Jeff Duncan, R-S.C., wanted to know whether the reports were accurate.

“This was a five-year strategic sourcing contract for up to one-point-whatever billion rounds,” she confirmed.

Calculations done by the Washington Examiner suggest the reported 1.6 billion rounds would be enough for “something like a 24-year supply of ammunition on hand.”

Other consumers of ammunition, however, from the weekend hunter to police departments, are finding the shelves bare.

For example, Utica, N.Y., police have been told it could take up to 10 months to get the ammunition they order. The department especially is having trouble getting .223 and .45 caliber rounds, the type that the federal government also orders.

In Mobile, Ala., Nick Sagler said, “You can’t find what you need.”

And Jeremy Windle called it an “extreme shortage.”

Ronica Williams, at the Greater Gulf State Fairgrounds gun show, said all of the ordinary supplies are back-ordered “six months or better.”

In Boca Raton, Fla., the problem is just as bad.

“Right now ammo’s pretty hard to get. People bought everything that was to be bought, They’ve completely cleaned out the supply chain,” said a gunsmith.

U.S. Sen. Jim Inhofe, R-Okla., believes the purchase orders by the Department of Homeland Security are part of an “intentional” effort by the Obama administration to “dry up the market” for gun-owning citizens.

“We have in this country the Second Amendment that preserves the right to keep and bear arms,” Inhofe told radio host Aaron Klein, “and the president doesn’t believe in that.”

Inhofe was a guest on “Aaron Klein Investigative Radio” on New York City’s WABC, talking about his Ammunition Management for More Obtainability – or AMMO – bill, which is designed to limit non-defense, armed federal agencies to pre-Obama levels of ammunition. The bill, S.843, has been referred to Senate committee, while a similar bill sponsored by Rep. Frank Lucas, R-Okla., has been referred to House committee.

“President Obama has been doing everything he could to stop the private ownership of guns in America,” Inhofe asserted. “Yet he’s been voted down in a big way by a large majority, and so my feeling is that he’s doing this to buy up [ammunition] so honest, law-abiding citizens here in the United States, like my son, can’t even buy ammunition because government is purchasing so much.”

The DHS has claimed it’s placing bulk orders to save money and that 80 percent of the ammunition is used for training purposes, but Inhofe isn’t buying the explanation.

“We had someone testify the other day the DHS has the ‘right’ – this is a bureaucrat who said this – they have the ‘right’ to buy as much as they want, and they’re planning to buy 750 million rounds,” Inhofe said. “That is more than three times the amount our soldiers are using for training to defend our nation.”

“I believe it’s intentional,” Inhofe said of the ammunition shortages many private and local law enforcement purchasers are experiencing. “It’s just another effort to restrict gun activity and ownership.”

The government has explained that to qualify to fly armed, the person must be a law enforcement officer, have a reason or need for the weapon, and be qualified by position and training.

“The officer must need to have the weapon accessible from the time he or she would otherwise check the weapon until the time it would be claimed after deplaning. The need to have the weapon accessible must be determined by the employing agency, department, or service and be based on [several factors].”

The factors include the need to provide protection, the need to arrive “prepared for duty” or to have control of a prisoner.

The purchase plan describes the products only as “TSA Training Ammunition.”

Paul Joseph Watson, who repeatedly has documented such purchases at, noted the TSA announced last month it wanted to rent a firing range near LaGuardia Airport in New York City.

“Significant bullet purchases by the TSA are likely to fuel concerns that the federal government is arming itself to the teeth in preparation for some form of domestic unrest or other catastrophe, following the Department of Homeland Security’s commitment to purchase more than 1.6 billion rounds of ammunition over the course of the last 18 months,” he reported.

He noted it also could signal a huge expansion of the agency’s Visible Intermodal Prevention and Response program, which essentially is TSA agents confronting travelers at bus stations, ferry ports, car tunnels, subways, rest areas and other locations and demanding they be patted down.

In Catoosa, Okla., law enforcement agencies have reported paying a lot more for ammunition. In some locations, police departments have requested help from residents with ammo supplies, because their own sources have run out.

WND’s reports also have included plans by the FBI to spend up to $100 million over five years on millions of rounds for its machine guns and pistols.

According to a solicitation revised and released March 25 that WND discovered during routine database research, the FBI is gathering the ammunition “to be carried and fired [by FBI Special Agents] in defense of life” as well as for training purposes.

The ammunition includes a combination of field-ready Glock 9mm rounds as well as reduced-lead training ammo. Weapons listed in the Statement of Work, or SOW, are Glock Model 17, Glock Model 19, Glock Model 26, SIG Sauer P226, SIG Sauer P228, Heckler and Koch MP5 9mm submachine gun (K, A2, A3, SF and SD versions).

Among the federal plans:

  • Although DHS has not yet awarded contracts in that proposed CBP acquisition, late last year it revealed its intention to buy 250 million rounds of Smith & Wesson .40 ammunition over the life of a five-year contract.
  • DHS separately issued a revised solicitation to buy a combination of 100,000 handgun and rifle rounds destined for the Federal Law Enforcement Training Center, or FLTC, in Artesia, N.M. It did not disclose the estimated cost.
  • The department also additionally released another amended procurement notice for 360,000 rounds of jacketed hollow-point .40 caliber training ammo also destined for the Artseia FLTC.
  • reported on the initial release of that particular procurement earlier.
  • Although the estimated cost of the solicitation, likewise, has not been disclosed, DHS recently awarded a $49,000 contract to Grace Ammo LLC for a similar batch of ammo for the Artesia facility.
  • DHS in January purchased an additional 200,000 rounds of jacketed hollow-point .40 caliber rounds. It awarded a $46,000 contract to Evian Group Inc. in that instance.

The developments appear to coincide with the goals of Democratic strategists.

Their 80-page document, titled “Preventing Gun Violence Through Effective Messaging,” urges gun-control advocates use images of frightening-looking guns and shooting scenes to make their point.

“The most powerful time to communicate is when concern and emotions are running at their peak,” the guide insists. “The debate over gun violence in America is periodically punctuated by high-profile gun violence incidents including Columbine, Virginia Tech, Tucson, the Trayvon Martin killing, Aurora and Oak Creek. When an incident such as these attracts sustained media attention, it creates a unique climate for our communications efforts.”

The manual offers a step-by-step guide on how to stir up sympathy for victims, arrest the “moral authority” from opposing groups like the National Rifle Association and keep the debate emotional instead of allowing facts to interfere.

“Essentially it’s a how-to book on inciting a moral panic,” comments James Taranto of the Wall Street Journal.

The guidebook, discovered by the Second Amendment Foundation and reported by Paul Bedard of the Washington Examiner, was prepared by four strategists, including Al Quinlan of Greenberg Quinlan Rosner Research, which touts it is “committed to progressive goals” and includes among its clients the American Civil Liberties Union, Planned Parenthood and Mayors Against Illegal Guns, among dozens of other left-leaning organizations.

But at least some of the gun restriction strategies already have backfired. In Colorado, where majority Democrats pushed through this year a multitude of new gun laws and limits, found a community organization could no longer do gun buybacks in which owners turn over weapons to local activists who then destroy them.

That’s because of the new law requiring a background check for every individual purchase, every weapon, every time. Officials said it was impossible to set it up so that background checks could be done on the agencies for each weapon that is purchased, so the sale would not be legal.

It was in June when DHS plans to buy rounds were targeted by Congress. Rep. Mark Meadows, R-N.C., said there are questions about the purchase plans that need to be answered.

And in May, Proctor, Minn., police chief Walter Wobig said he was asking his residents to help supply ammunition, because the town’s supplier had informed him it would be months before his order could be filled.

The attack on gun rights and ammunition supplies under the Obama administration has prompted resistance.

WND reported on a video dramatization that was created to demonstrate in shocking, living color one reason gun-rights advocates resist bans on high-capacity magazines for firearms: Armed thugs don’t always attack alone.

The video by MB Studio Productions depicts a startling but believable scenario in which armed thieves target a house when the family is at home. The family calls 911 and the father quickly retrieves his pistol from a gun safe. But after fending off the first armed intruder, the father stands horrified after pulling the trigger on a gun now empty of bullets as the second intruder enters the home.

The dramatization’s final scene is tragic, and the video concludes with the words, “Because your government decided how many rounds you need to protect your family.”



Kurt Nimmo

August 9, 2013

It is said the Transportation Security Administration was originally established as a response to the September 11, 2001, attacks. If this is the case, then the Department of Homeland Security, the federal agency now exercising authority over the agency, must think al-Qaeda will soon target rodeos.



On Monday, the New York Times reported the TSA’s widely covered mission creep has infested “sporting events, music festivals, rodeos, highway weigh stations and train terminals” and admits not “everyone is happy” about the Americanized version of the Gestapo fanning out across the nation.

The Transportation Security Administration’s Visible Intermodal Prevention and Response squads — also known as VIPR teams – are so pervasive even members of Congress are beginning to complain and question their deployment.

TSA bureaucrats like to pretend their intrusive and largely resented “random searches” at public events do not violate the Fourth Amendment and insist the illegal searches are “special needs” or “administrative” in nature and exempt from probable cause because they are designed to prevent terrorist attacks.

Despite this claim, the agency has yet to provide evidence the Gestapo-like VIPR teams have actually ever foiled a terrorist plot. Any such evidence, they remind us, is strictly classified.

“But they argue that the random searches and presence of armed officers serve as a deterrent that bolsters the public confidence,” the New York Times reports as it neglects to mention the public’s widespread contempt and disgust for the agency infamous for sexually molesting children and lying to the public about the risks posed by radiation-emitting naked body porno scanners.

So-called security experts, cops, Amtrak bureaucrats, and other elements of officialdom, however, continue to ignore an outraged public. Instead, they call for continuing and expanding TSA police state tactics.

“This is a gray area,” Representative Bennie Thompson, Democrat of Mississippi and ranking member on the House Homeland Security Committee, remarked about the effectiveness of the TSA and its desire to expand into various public venues.

“It’s hard to quantify the usefulness of these teams based on what we have seen so far,” Thompson said about militarized VIPR teams roaming airports, train stations, rodeos and music festivals in search of elusive terrorists.

In response to growing concern about VIPR moving into train stations and beyond, the TSA has promised to get the public up to speed, according to the Times.




Fallujah veteran says government is afraid of its own citizens

Paul Joseph Watson

August 15, 2013

A former Marine Corps Colonel who was stationed in Fallujah and trained Iraqi soldiers warns that the Department of Homeland Security is working with law enforcement to build a “domestic army,” because the federal government is afraid of its own citizens.



The comments by the Colonel, whose identity remains unknown, were made during public testimony at a Concord City Council meeting on Tuesday. The meeting concerned a decision on whether to accept a $260,000 Homeland Security grant on behalf of the Central New Hampshire Special Operations Unit to purchase a BearCat armored vehicle.

The purchase of the vehicle has been surrounded by controversy after the city’s Police Chief wrote in an application filing to the DHS that the vehicle was needed to deal with the “threat” posed by libertarians, sovereign citizen adherents, and Occupy activists in the region.

Referencing signs in the crowd which read “More Mayberry, Less Fallujah,” the Colonel spoke of how he didn’t even have armored vehicles when he was stationed in Fallujah.

The Colonel’s role as a Ministry of Defense coordinator was to command, train and equip the Iraqi Army, noting that he helped do everything he could “to make it as strong as possible,” but that “Homeland Security would kick their butts in a week.”

Stressing that it was unlawful and unconstitutional to use US troops on American soil, the Colonel warned, “What’s happening here is we’re building a domestic military,” adding that police are now “wearing the exact same combat gear that we had in Iraq, only it was a different color.”

The Colonel warned that the DHS was following military tactics by, “pre-staging gear and equipment” in order to build a “domestic army” while shrinking the US military “because the government is afraid of its own citizens.”

The Colonel slammed the idea of law enforcement purchasing militarized vehicles for domestic security, noting, “The last time more than ten terrorists were in one place at the same time was September 11th and all these vehicles in the world wouldn’t have prevented it nor would it have helped anybody.”

“I don’t know where we’re going to use this many vehicles or this many troops,” he continued, “Concord is just one cog in the wheel – we’re building an army over here and I can’t believe that people aren’t seeing it – is everybody blind?”

In his initial application to the DHS for the grant to purchase the armored vehicle, Police Chief John Duval wrote, “The State of New Hampshire’s experience with terrorism slants primarily towards the domestic type. We are fortunate that our State has not been victimized from a mass casualty event from an international terrorism strike however on the domestic front, the threat is real and here. Groups such as the Sovereign Citizens, Free Staters and Occupy New Hampshire are active and present daily challenges.”

Duval’s characterization of activists from across the political spectrum as terrorists prompted outrage but he refused to apologize, merely clarifying that his application may not have been worded correctly. Following the removal of the terms Sovereign Citizens, Free Staters and Occupy New Hampshire from the application, the DHS made it clear that the grant would be approved.

As the Concord Monitor reports, Tuesday’s public testimony also included a warning from Irena Goddard, who grew up in Czechoslovakia.

“I do not want this deadly intimidation force of a military vehicle to suppress free speech, much like what was done with communist military tanks in Czechoslovakia,” she said.

Resident Jesse Mertz remarked that the militarization of law enforcement signaled that, “The military industrial complex has infiltrated every part of our society to the point where it’s now happening in our hometowns, and we’re seeing stuff occur that people said would never happen in our own country.”

The Concord Council delayed the decision to purchase the vehicle and the matter will be taken up once again at next month’s meeting.



Says Constitution calls for strong national defense

by World Net Daily

Oklahoma’s senior senator says the U.S. military is suffering – severely – under the administration of Barack Obama.

“We have a hollow force,” Sen. Jim Inhofe, R-Okla., told the told the Norman Transcript in a visit to the Oklahoma newspaper’s office.

The senator was in the region for a visit to Tinker Air Force Base regarding a federal commission assigned to examine cost efficiency in the military.

He told the newspaper he wants the Senate Arms Service Committee to hear the report.

“It’s a good group to come in and tell the truth,” he said.

Inhofe said the U.S. military needs to be rebuilt, and if there’s a need to cut spending, the “bloated bureaucracies” are a good place to start.

He said he supports a strong national defense because it’s “what the Constitution says we should do.”

Inhofe told the Oklahoma newspaper he’s one of the senators willing to hold up the budget to fight Obamacare. He also said he wants to end the war on fossil fuels and to crack down on regulations.

The senator, who has written a book on global warming, “The Greatest Hoax,” said he would like to remain in the Senate to see a GOP majority.

His comments on the military come as budgets are being slashed and operations restricted because of the budgetary priorities under the Obama administration.

In a WND commentary, Maj. Gen. Patrick Brady, author of “Dead Men Flying,” blasted Obama’s “emasculation, socialization and feminization of our military.”

He described it as a greater threat to the U.S. than the economy.

“Can you see him as a fighter pilot a la the Bushes? Or commanding a PT boat as did John Kennedy? This is not a man I would want with me in combat and neither should America,” Brady wrote.

“Under the leadership of the Obama/[Robert] Gates/[Michael] Mullen trinity, our military has suffered as never before. Gates supervised the waste and fiscal incompetence at the Pentagon (millions of dollars lost). He instituted an insane op tempo (60 out of 80 months deployed is not unusual), causing unprecedented suicide and PTSD rates among soldiers and depression and anxiety in their families. Military pay cuts are coming, and the administration actually lost graves and urns at Arlington. There is an effort to raise health insurance premiums for retirees. The number of stolen top-secret documents is unmatched in our history. On the silly side, Gates’ Pentagon actually considered giving medals to soldiers for not shooting!” he said.

“On the battlefield, they have stripped the premier combat life saver, Aeromedical Evacuation, from the medics. This is the first time a medical resource has been so usurped since the Civil War, and I have heard horror stories from the battlefield on delayed reaction times. (I actually had a soldier from Iraq turn his back on me when I told him I was a Dust Off pilot in Vietnam; he said forces had failed to react in time to save his friend’s life.) It may be a surprise to Vietnam veterans that the Congress authorized a program to commemorate the 50th anniversary of the Vietnam War and honor its veterans; but it will be no surprise that Gates drastically cut its funds. We will soon be longing for the ‘hollow military’ of the ’70s.”

He continued, calling the lack of military expertise in the Obama administration stunning.

“Obama’s replacement for Gates, Leon Panetta, had an astonishing response in answer to a query concerning why we ignored the plea for help from the Americans about to be slaughtered in Benghazi: ‘You don’t deploy forces into harm’s way without knowing what is going on.’ Excuse me. Did we not know that Americans were under attack and pleading for help? What else do you need to know? By his standard you would never go. In combat and chaos you are never sure of what is going on. Is it the standard of this administration that American should never risk lives to save lives? Risking lives to save lives is the essence of our wars!”

He warned of the consequences: “America is impotent without a strong military – and so is American policy. Our military strength is the one sure force for peace in the world. It deters the bad guys – not only from attacking us but others as well. Weakness emboldens evil, and ultimately we will be drawn into some disaster whether we like it or not. All the sheep and chickens in the world – and many liberals – would like for everyone to be vegetarians – won’t happen, there are too many wolves out there. Yet how could any objective, informed person not see the deliberate dismantling of our military? Obama personally authored sequestration, which will bench us from the field of world affairs.”



Manual lists people concerned with “individual liberties, states’ rights, and how to make the world a better place” as potential extremists

Adan Salazar
August 24, 2013

Conservative watchdog group Judicial Watch recently obtained a Department of Defense training manual which lists people who embrace “individual liberties” and honor “states’ rights,” among other characteristics, as potential “extremists” who are likely to be members of “hate groups.”

dodmanMarked “for training purposes only,” the documents, obtained Thursday through a Freedom of Information Act request submitted in April, include PowerPoint slides and lesson plans, among which is a January 2013 Air Force “student guide” distributed by the Defense Equal Opportunity Management Institute simply entitled “Extremism.”

Judicial Watch’s FOIA request asked for “Any and all records concerning, regarding, or related to the preparation and presentation of training materials on hate groups or hate crimes distributed or used by the Air Force.”

As the group notes, “The document defines extremists as ‘a person who advocates the use of force or violence; advocates supremacist causes based on race, ethnicity, religion, gender, or national origin; or otherwise engages to illegally deprive individuals or groups of their civil rights.’”

The manual goes on to bar military personnel from “active participation” in such extremist organization activities as “publicly demonstrating,” “rallying,” “fundraising” and “organizing,” basically denying active-duty military from exercising the rights they so ardently fight to defend.

It begins its introduction of a section titled, “Extremist ideologies,” by describing the American colonists who sought independence from British rule as a historical example of extremism.

“In U.S. history, there are many examples of extremist ideologies and movements. The colonists who sought to free themselves from British rule and the Confederate states who sought to secede from the Northern states are just two examples,” according to the training guide.

In a section drawing inspiration from a 1992 book titled “Nazis, Communists, Klansmen, and Others on the Fringe: Political Extremism in America,” the manual also lists “Doomsday thinking” under “traits or behaviors that tend to represent the extremist style.”

Extremists often predict dire or catastrophic consequences from a situation or from a failure to follow a specific course, and they tend to exhibit a kind of crisis-mindedness. It can be a Communist takeover, a Nazi revival, nuclear war, earthquakes, floods, or the wrath of God. Whatever it is, it is just around the corner unless we follow their program and listen to their special insight and wisdom, to which only the truly enlightened have access. For extremists, any setback or defeat is the beginning of the end.

“Nowadays,” the manual explains, “instead of dressing in sheets or publicly espousing hate messages, many extremists will talk of individual liberties, states’ rights, and how to make the world a better place.”

Judicial Watch also acknowledges the Southern Poverty Law Center “is listed as a resource for information on hate groups and referenced several times throughout the guide,” even though the group itself was directly responsible for a “hate crime” perpetrated on the Family Research Council after it was listed on the SPLC’s “hate map.”

Infowars readers will find much of the training guide’s contents unsurprising as they merely reinforce what we have exhaustively documented in the past.

In 2009, Infowars obtained the “law enforcement sensitive” contents of a Missouri Information Analysis Center (MIAC) report entitled “The Modern Militia Movement” which listed supporters of presidential candidates Ron Paul, Chuck Baldwin, and Bob Barr as potential “militia” influenced terrorists.

Also, in July 2012 Infowars blew the lid on a Department of Homeland Security-funded study, produced by the National Consortium for the Study of Terrorism and Responses to Terrorism at the University of Maryland, that characterized Americans who are “suspicious of centralized federal authority,” and “reverent of individual liberty” as “extreme right-wing” terrorists.

Indeed, the latest report echoes scenes from Alex Jones’ prescient documentary 9/11: The Road to Tyranny, made over a decade ago, which covered the fact that FEMA and other government bureaus have for years been training law enforcement agencies to regard people who espouse conservative ideologies, such as those represented by the Founding Fathers, as terrorists.



It can no longer be denied that military and local law enforcement crosshairs have gradually been realigned from targeting phantom terrorists overseas to targeting domestic “extremists,” a broad, all-encompassing term that accommodates anyone generally challenging or questioning the status quo.

As Judicial Watch notes, although the documents were obtained through the Air Force, the fact that they originated in a DOD office means they have likely been distributed throughout the government’s various agencies.

Judicial Watch president Tom Fitton concluded that the documents fall in line with the Obama administration’s “nasty habit of equating basic conservative values with terrorism,” and that the language closely “echoes the IRS targeting language of conservative and Tea Party investigations.” “And now… its Defense Department suggests that the Founding Fathers, and many conservative Americans, would not be welcome in today’s military… After reviewing this document, one can’t help but worry for the future and morale of our nation’s armed forces.”



by Bob Russell | Conservative Daily News

April 7, 2013

Tyranny doesn’t happen over-night.  It happens in a series of events that build on themselves until you wake up one morning and life as you know it is gone forever, liberty is a thing of the past.  Adolph Hitler didn’t just start rounding up Jews on a whim.  He spent years putting the infrastructure in place to install his totalitarian state.  They had control of everything; the media, the child indoctrination centers they referred to as “public schools”, the monetary and economic structure, and national and local police departments.  Hitler and his henchmen made Jews the scapegoats.  Friends and neighbors soon began to hate Jews for who they were. German citizens bought into the blame game and generations of co-existence was gone in 6 years, all due to propaganda in the government controlled media and the government controlled schools.

The Aryan German people let Hitler have the Jews, and even helped him, because he was leaving them alone.  Then one day he struck; swiftly, efficiently, thoroughly, and without warning!  The average German citizen woke up and found the Gestapo at their door because a disagreement over a debt, or a minor insult to a neighbor or stranger led to them being denounced as traitors over a grudge.  The Gestapo kicked in their door and dragged them out into the street.  Some were shot dead on the spot; some were taken to prisons and tortured by sadists seeking information that didn’t exist. Most were never seen again.

This happened to your everyday, patriotic German citizens.  They had gone about their lives, ignoring or accepting the things that happened over the years as Hitler, Himmler, Goebbels, Goering, Heydrich, and the rest ignored the rights of citizens and passed decrees that were “unlawful”.  Unlawful to whom?  Hitler didn’t see rounding up, “enemies of the state”, and shooting them as “unlawful”.

The people had seen what these men were doing but said, “it can’t happen here, we have a system of laws”.  They didn’t think Hitler was a despot.  He was a great leader, Der Fuhrer, who would never turn on his “Aryan” citizens.  He “cares about us”.  Then one day the Jews were under control and he came back for them.

When Pastor Martin Neimoller made his famous “first they came for…” quote he could have been speaking about America’s society today.  Many will ridicule this video, and the whole concept of Nazi Germany, because “it can’t or it won’t happen here, we have a Constitution”.  But take a look at this picture and answer the question, “when did this; become this?”.  Our society in the United States of America today mirrors the society of 1936 Germany.

Hitler offered money to those who turned in their neighbors.  New York City is now offering a $500 bounty for snitching on anyone possessing an “illegal weapon”.  Holding a grudge against someone?  Want to cause them some misery?  What is happening in America today HAS happened before and we are taking the exact same path they took then.  Apathy and denial are the two most dangerous states of mind in any free society.

How can people ignore or dismiss the Patriot Act, NDAA 2011 and its “indefinite detention without charge”, the TSA, the Department of Homeland Security, or the explosion of local SWAT teams and the military equipment they are being given by the federal government?  Policemen now kick in doors in the middle of the night dressed in black face masks and body armor head to toe.  The uniforms are just that, uniform around the nation.  The equipment and the tactics designed for an urban battlefield are being ”uniformly” spread to police departments and sheriff’s offices throughout the nation, and being funded with primarily federal funds.  Helicopters participate in “live fire” operations using blanks, in American cities, in conjunction with local police forces.  Why are they doing this?  Who are they going to round up and put in the FEMA camps that were a “figment of my imagination” in 2010?

How can anyone with any amount of cognitive ability not see where both political parties are taking us?  How does someone dismiss 2 billion rounds of ammunition, tens of thousands of full automatic “assault rifles”, and MRAP armored vehicles with gun ports and machine gun mounts operated by local law enforcement?  What SWAT team really needs this kind of firepower?  Who are they going to use this equipment against?

Both political parties refuse to secure the border and do anything about all the illegal aliens.  It is very apparent that they aren’t looking to round up illegal aliens so why do we find ourselves with an internal security apparatus having so much armament?  No free nation has ever had this kind of domestic military force and remained free for long.  This is the SS and Brown Shirts of Nazi Germany being paraded before our very eyes yet many people deny there is any danger.  It reminds me of a joke where a woman catches her husband with another woman and he asks her “are you going to believe what I tell you or your LYING EYES”?

Conspiracy Theory?  At one time I thought so.  By themselves many of the events over the last 10-15 years pose no “clear and present danger”, but when they are looked at with an open mind and in the view of 20th Century history it is another vision altogether.  We the People are called mentally unstable and enemies of the state by the “leadership” of both political parties.  Veterans who defended liberty are labeled as mentally ill by members of Congress.  Some have been “detained” and had their lawfully owned firearms confiscated in a clear abuse of the Constitution.

Can’t happen here?  Won’t Happen here?  Don’t bet your life on it!  Are you going to believe what they tell you or are you going to believe “your lying eyes”?  Time is short and one morning Americans will wake up and find out their nation is in the grips of a totalitarian regime as evil as Nazi Germany or Soviet Russia.

I submit this in the name of the Most Holy Trinity, in faith, with the responsibility given to me by Almighty God to honor His work and not let it die from neglect.



By Dave Hodges |
August 23, 2013

We have grown accustomed to the tyranny at the Federal level. The CIA is the most efficient organized criminal operation on the planet. The spy tactics of the NSA would make the East German Stasi green with envy. With the NSA watching our every move, nobody should feel safe for fear of being branded an enemy of the state. Even journalists are feeling the brunt of the new found bravado of the globalists. The systematic murders of journalists such as Andrew Breitbart and Michael Hastings for getting “too close” are stark reminders that our republic democracy is a facade and has degenerated into a wolf in sheep’s clothing.

Where the Federal government and the existence of their confederate secret societies such as the Council on Foreign Relation and the Trilateral Commission, were once denied, they are now fully admitted to and championed as the true rulers of this country.

Trilaterals Over Washington

Back in 1979 I was given the book Trilaterals Over Washington co-authored by Anthony Sutton and Patrick Wood.  After reading it, I was horrified that such a small group of men could control such vast resources and do so much harm to humanity. My surprise speaks to my level of ignorance.  I was a budding researcher at the time and I had a ravenous appetite to learn more about these Constitutional usurpers.

What I discovered was that Sutton and Wood’s book was largely a standalone piece. Of course there was the classic None Dare Call It a Conspiracy, by Gary Allen, and there was that one article in 1977 in Atlantic Monthly which mentioned the Trilateral Commission, but debunked the conspiratorial angle.

The media was postured in such a way at that time, that if anyone mentioned the Council on Foreign Relations and the Trilateral Commission, you were marginalized and ridiculed. Today, we are witnessing a complete reversal in government secrecy as it relates to their participation in global tyranny and the installation of a police state surveillance grid.  The destruction of the United States is totally being done in stealth, but things have changed.

Why Are the Misdeeds of the CIA Out In the Open?

Indeed, the veil of secrecy has been stripped away. The CIA is admitting past transgressions from as far back as 60 years ago when modern Iranian history took a critical turn when a CIA backed coup overthrew the country’s prime minister, Mohammed Mossadegh. True to their mafia nature, the CIA never admits to anything. Does this mean that they are turning over a new leaf and are submitting to a new era of agency transparency and accountability? Not really, when the CIA admits to their complicit behavior of running drugs for guns in the Iran-Contra Affair and setting up the cocaine gangs and started the drug war in LA in the 1980′s to fund and facilitate Iran Contra, I might take their “open disclosure intentions” more seriously. And when the CIA admits its role in the murder of JFK, then I might begin to cut some slack to what has been the most virulent organized criminal organization in the world. And when CIA director John Brennan, admits to having award winning journalist Michael Hastings murdered, then maybe I will take a serious look at considering that the CIA is entering into a new era of openness.

Did Obama Actually Fulfill One of His Campaign Promises?

Some would argue that there is a new era of transparency that is emanating from Washington D.C. and that Obama is finally making good on his campaign promise to oversee the most transparent organization in the history of the country. Not in a pig’s eye. We are not witnessing a new age of accountability, we are watching the unveiling of in-your-face tyranny.

Fear and Intimidation Is the Objective

Didn’t you get the message that tyranny is out of the closet and is being placed firmly in the faces of the American public? The globalists are sending a clear message, “Fear Us!” Their intent is to frighten and intimidate the public into believe that resistance is futile.

Recently, the NSA revealed that they spied upon innocent Americans by intercepting an unspecified number of emails. Of course, the NSA said that this was an “accident.” The accident aspect of the story is not believable, however, the objective was achieved with the revelation; “Be afraid America, very afraid, we are watching everything you do.”

Nowhere is the in-your-face-tyranny more prevalent than in the today’s law enforcement agencies as we have witnessed the militarization of the police which are now designed to harass and intimidate.

The Overt Militarization of the Police

As we witness the unfolding of the extreme militarization of the police, the American public will be increasingly subjected to more heinous, Gestapo and KGB types of crimes being committed against innocent American citizens.



Published on Jul 12, 2013





RT: My name’s Daniel Bushell. Why is the government preparing for civil war. Coming up.


Large sections of the US prepare for “armed revolution.”

Hollow points of the DHS.

And that virus on your computer – the army now linked to systematic covert operations on anyone who criticizes multinationals.

Oblivion film clip:

Narrator: The last superbowl was played right here.We’re here for drone repair.

World War Z film clip:

Report on TV: …declared martial law.

Young girl: Daddy what’s martial law?

RT: This summer’s apocalypse movies tap current fears, notes Elysium director Neill Blomkamp. His new blockbuster shows America as a third world state. He says: “This isn’t science fiction, this is today, this is now.”

Two in three Americans now say the country’s going the wrong direction. Half of them say it could require “armed revolution.”

The New York Times notes America’s prepping movement – people preparing for the worst – has now gone mainstream.

Bestselling author Gerald Celente joins us, thanks very much for coming on. You write “the curtain’s coming down on half a century of US dominance”. Why do you say that?

Gerald Celente, Trends Journal: Fascism has come to America. I don’t say that as an inflammatory statement, I use it as a statement of fact. The merger of state and corporate powers by definition is called fascism. And I can back up that fact with four simple words: too big to fail.

In capitalism there is no ‘too big to fail’. So it’s been a corporate takeover, a military industrial complex so big that if you just take out one underpinning of the ‘too big to fail’ the entire system collapses.

They essentially called martial law, a state of siege in Boston.

Magnify that in a couple of cities, going on at the same time. You’re going to see the entire nation breakdown. As long as the United States keeps waging war, the chances of retaliatory attacks grow greater.

‘Hey, there was another drone strike!’ Another war being fought. There’s a Bronx saying we used to have when I was a kid – payback’s a b***h.

The United States can’t win a war, whether it’s Iraq or Afghanistan, whether it’s Libya or whether it was Vietnam. So the people have lost faith in the military aspect of the government, the policing aspects of the government.

And so they realize on the economic end that they’re on their own. Only the Too Big To Fail are there to be saved.

RT: Yeah, Too Big To Fail banks, people don’t realize, by law – own your deposits. You note when they need them, they take them.

Celente: If you don’t have your money in your own possession, you don’t have your money.

Here, this is a fact. When 9/11 happened – I know this personally – I tried to get my money out of certificates of deposit – CDs. And I called up Fleet Bank – they’re gone now they fleeted away Citigroup or Bank of America bought them out – and I wanted my money be transferred to my local bank and they said, “No. You can’t get it”.

I got shafted by MF Global’s scam when Jon Corzine brought down the company and they stole my money out of my segregated account. So the first thing is the Golden Rule – if you don’t have any gold, you’re not gonna rule anything. You better have money, and in more than one denomination. And gold and silver is the popular denomination among neo-survivalists.

If you were a Greek Cypriot and they closed the banks for what almost two weeks, don’t you wish you had some gold and silver to buy what you needed? That was the canary in the mine shaft.

RT: America’s canary has actually stopped singing, writes finance site Silver Bear.

Your bank savings will be raided in the upcoming crash, quietly admits this new government document, which suggests the collapse will be much worse than in 2009.

New rules by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation reveals “Returning the sound operations of the Globally Active, Systemically Important, Financial Institutions” – that’s the Too Big To Fail banks – “would be provided by converting unsecured debt from creditors”.

Converting unsecured debt is finance speak for taking regular savings.

All this leaves Americans, warns former Wall Street banker Yves Smith, worse off than Cyprus.

Canaries and coalmines are a popular analogy at the moment, Target Health says it’s the bees.

Either we stop the systematic poisoning or there WILL be war writes investigative website Storyleak.

This is what your grocery store will look like if bees die out as only they can pollinate much of our food. Nine in ten bees in the States have already died.

Corporate and industry-paid media issued denials but independent scientists have told the Daily Mail that only new pesticides could have killed over 10 million bees instantly as happened in Florida. Here beekeeper Charles Smith of the Smith Family Honey Company points to some of the millions who have suddenly dropped dead.

Storyleak editor Anthony Gucciardi’s investigated the corporations behind these chemicals, thanks very much for coming on. You write it’s them or us.

Anthony Gucciardi, Storyleak editor: Right exactly. The bee scenario could potentially spawn World War III and it could also potentially spawn a massive economic collapse and starvation, and that’s not an exaggeration.

We’ve read reports time and time again where these diplomats go in and say “US you have to stop approving these pesticides” and the reason for that is that America, the United States, refuses to stop using these neonicotinoid pesticides in its food supply, killing all the bees and then also yes exporting over to other countries.

What is interesting here is it shows the United States government is so owned by these major chemical corporations like DuPont and others, that they would rather fund them with millions upon billions of dollars in these neonicotinoid pesticide sales than actually care about the bees.

Monsanto knows it’s killing the bees, that’s why it bought one of the major bee research firms Beeologics. If we allow the corrupt officials inside the United States government that no longer represent us,
if they don’t stop, and if they destroy the bee population inside the US we’re looking at some form of a collapse of the food supply and an economic collapse as well. So other nations actually have to come in and say “US, stop killing your own country.” They have to come in and speak for us, other nations are speaking more for the United States population than the United States government itself.

RT: What’s the future if these corporations keep control?

Gucciardi: The biotech corporations are already on to the next phase, which is something called ‘biopharmaceutical crops’, where they actually have vaccines and pharmaceutical components already made inside the crops.

Now you’re actually getting pharmaceutical drugs on your dinner table, experimental vaccines on your dinner table. But the FDA also will likely not label these vaccine component crops and pharmaceutical component crops to the point where you’ll be feeding your family unknowingly all these different vaccines and statins and everything like that. Even for infants.

GlaxoSmithKline, Monsanto and Merck – the vaccine industry, the pharmaceutical industry and the biotech industry – all coming together to deceive you on what’s on your dinner table. Coming together to make massive profits completely unheard of in this country. For example we have the AIDS vaccine, which they’re now looking to infuse into these biopharmaceutical crops which will be on your dinner table.

There were 19 participants in this experimental AIDS vaccine study and actually three died from the adverse reaction to the AIDS vaccine. Of 19 people, three died. And this is what they want to put into your food supply.

RT: Yeah if things have got this bad why aren’t people complaining?

Gucciardi: That can be considered under Homeland Security an act of terrorism.

If you have a complaint about your tap water, if you’re concerned about the chemical contamination of it, the fluoride in the water, you’re a terrorist and you’re going to be put on a terrorist watchlist.

First they came for Al-Qaeda after 9/11. Al-Qaeda were the bad guys. Then they came for the extremists, the left wing, right wing extremists, whatever, the extremists are the bad guys. Now it’s you.

Under this report, anyone that says they don’t want GMOs in their food or ‘hey does this have GMOs in it?’, got to be a terrorist.

Polls show that about 96% of the country wants GMOs labeled and are against GMOs. So in fact 96% of the country now are terrorists, if you complain about Monsanto’s GMOs, linked to massive tumors in rats where they couldn’t even move.

RT: If you’re a suspect expect punishment such as computer viruses.

Sustainable Pulse reports two days before he was due to make a presentation on Monsanto’s pesticides a bizarre virus completely disabled Adrian Bepp’s computer.

But the government now feels so above the constitution and any laws it doesn’t cover its tracks. IP log searches found computers of Monsanto critics accessed by the US Army Intelligence Center.

WikilLeaks shows Obama administration agencies now conduct illegal black ops for multinationals.

Let’s speak to Dr. Kevin Barrett, author of Questioning the War on Terror, great to talk to you. If 96% of the population are now the bad guys how will this all end?

Dr. Kevin Barrett, author of Questioning the War on Terror: The US, like so many other places, is quite corrupt, in some ways even more corrupt than most places, and it’s just better concealed or traditionally has been. But it’s all crawling out from under the rock now.
The Internet has really ripped off the veil and shown what’s going on at the highest levels of power in the US and they’ve openly turned their guns against the American people.

And now they have a military command that’s aimed at the US in blatant violation of Posse Comitatus, that says the US military cannot be used in the US against American citizens. That’s been thrown out of the window now and they’re openly militarizing the police having the police work with the US military in violation of Posse Comitatus, and they appear to be getting ready for some kind of civil war, some kind to intern people.

We’re in a really dangerous time here in the US, the guns of the military are now turned against the American people in a way that just never happened before in history.

And these hollow point bullets are illegal to use in warfare and yet DHS wants these huge numbers of them. They have more than enough to kill off the entire population several times.

FirstScience TV clip:

The hollow point expands on impact to almost three times its size.The expanding effect means that the bullet dumps its power inside the body, damaging more tissue. A larger wound means a greater chance of hitting an organ, cutting nerves or severing an artery.

Barrett: It’s quite worrisome. I know a lot of people getting out the US, and maybe they’re the smart ones.

RT: Nationwide protests, hunger strikes and sit-ins are currently sweeping the United States, notes the website Popular Resistance. But with a corporate media blackout of any news that threatens their paymasters – a more realistic portrait of America today may be at the cinema.

This is The Truthseeker.



This video compilation from videographer Jason A gives us more clear signs that the United States government is preparing for an economic collapse and will use martial law to prevent the inevitability of civil war and civil unrest in the United States.



Anthony Gucciardi
August 26, 2013

High level government documents reveal that the Pentagon is preparing in full force for ‘large scale economic meltdown’ and massive revolt via the US public — exactly what we are criticized for doing.


You see the Pentagon and agencies like the Department of Defense (DoD) are in full scale emergency readiness in their own words for ‘cataclysmic’ events that are believed to ultimately ignite riots in the face of chaos and economic collapse, and it’s all out in the open. And it’s one of the reasons that we’re seeing such a massive amount of spying on activists of all kinds, alternative news writers and personalities, and basically anyone preparing for themselves.

The US government is dedicated to logging such information into a major database in order to ‘prepare’ for the coming collapse that they are predicting in their own documents for all to see. Collapse predictions that have turned into ‘war games’ by the Pentagon, which in 2010 were orchestrated to prepare for what the Pentagon dubbed ‘large scale economic breakdown’ and the disappearance of essential services like food.

In this same ‘war games’ exercise dedicated to domestic response, exercises were ran in order to prepare for ‘domestic order amid civil unrest’.


A thread that is seen throughout these tests is the concept that civil unrest will unfold and prompt military action against the public. One of the largest examples of this is the US Army’s Strategic Studies Institute paper that talks about about the ‘threat of domestic crises’ that are expected to lead to massive unrest throughout the nation. Spurring more paranoia into the notion that every citizen is a terrorist, the report starts talking about everything from economic collapse to a loss of functional political order brought upon by a ‘hostile group within the United States’ that could access weapons.

In such scenarios, the report discusses how the DoD would then be ‘forced by circumstances’ to come in and stop ‘purposeful domestic resistance or insurgency”:

“DoD might be forced by circumstances to put its broad resources at the disposal of civil authorities to contain and reverse violent threats to domestic tranquility. Under the most extreme circumstances, this might include use of military force against hostile groups inside the United States. Further, DoD would be, by necessity, an essential enabling hub for the continuity of political authority in a multi-state or nationwide civil conflict or disturbance.”

To go along with this, and the idea of the military coming in to stop domestic resistance in the midst of an economic collapse, the Pentagon has gone and created a force consisting of 20,000 troops whose sole purpose is to be available for civil unrest and catastrophes – all based on the 2005 Homeland Security program to prepare for ‘multiple, simultaneous mass casualty incidents‘. Yet again we see this link.

But don’t worry, changes have been made just one month ago to allow for the Pentagon to directly have absolute authority over domestic emergencies and ‘civil disturbance’ at large. As reported in a Long Island news publication and properly summarized by The Guardian as further preparation for some form of domestic meltdown:

“Federal military commanders have the authority, in extraordinary emergency circumstances where prior authorization by the President is impossible and duly constituted local authorities are unable to control the situation, to engage temporarily in activities that are necessary to quell large-scale, unexpected civil disturbances.”

What does this mean exactly, to engage in the activity necessary to quell large-scale civil disturbances? Well, for one it is the blank check ability to go ahead and stop major protests amid domestic turmoil. The kind of protests we’re seeing around the world, from Egypt to Brazil. The kind of protests where citizens have had enough.

And going by the Pentagon documents mixed with the DoD papers, it appears the military believes America may take to the streets amid an economic collapse or ‘domestic disturbance’ of large caliber. And you can be sure that virtually all citizens that question the government are the targets of military intervention, as we see in the DoD’s own Army Modernisation Strategy, detailing ‘anti-government and radical ideologies that potentially threaten government stability‘ as a major threat.

Yes, you read that right. The DoD is classifying ‘anti-government and radical ideologies’ as something that threatens government stability. When a major ‘domestic disturbance’ comes along that all of these documents are discussing, such as perhaps in the form of mass protests, it’s the ‘anti-government extremists’ they will be coming after.



Mac Slavo |
August 27th, 2013

One of the tenets of long-term preparedness is something we refer to as Operational Security, or OPSEC. The goal is to build our stockpiles, strategies and friendships without the knowledge of the general public, or in many cases, even our neighbors or acquaintances.


Because when it hits the fan, and there’s no food in grocery stores and violence erupts all around us, we’ll have the supplies to survive and the defensive initiative to protect what’s ours. The last thing we want is for those who failed to heed the warnings, to come knocking on our doors looking for handouts or a place to weather the storm. The fact is, our supplies are limited, so operating on the down-low is an important strategy to ensure our safety in the midst of disaster.

But taking the time and effort to plan effectively is not the only strategy being implemented by those who expect the worst.

There are those out there who have a different idea of how they’ll acquire necessary supplies should the system as we know it destabilize.

And that plan is to come for what you own.

Southern Prepper explains how your operational security may have already been compromised, and shares a story from one “prepper” who is planning on taking advantage of those who had the foresight to ready themselves.

He’s ex-military. He said his plan is to hit preppers. He doesn’t have enough money right now to prep himself, so he’s going to go around and hit preppers.

So be careful.

In a previous SHTF security video, it was noted that you are a high value target in a post-collapse world.

Beware, because this is what we can expect.



Vice President Biden spoke in the Roosevelt Room of the White House in Washington, Thursday, Aug. 29, 2013, before the ceremonial swearing-in ceremony for Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, and Firearms (ATF) Director Todd Jones. The Obama administration announced new steps on gun control, curbing the import of military surplus weapons and proposing to close a loophole that lets felons and others circumvent background checks by registering guns to corporations.
August 29, 2013
WASHINGTON (AP) — Striving to take action where Congress would not, the Obama administration announced new steps Thursday on gun control, curbing the import of military surplus weapons and proposing to close a little-known loophole that lets felons and others circumvent background checks by registering guns to corporations.

Four months after a gun control drive collapsed spectacularly in the Senate, President Barack Obama added two more executive actions to a list of 23 steps the White House determined Obama could take on his own to reduce gun violence. With the political world focused on Mideast tensions and looming fiscal battles, the move signaled Obama’s intent to show he hasn’t lost sight of the cause he took up after 20 first graders and six adults were gunned down last year in an elementary school in Newtown, Conn.

Vice President Joe Biden, Obama’s point-man on gun control after the Newtown tragedy thrust guns into the national spotlight, unveiled the new actions Thursday at the White House.

“It’s simple, it’s straightforward, it’s common sense,” Biden said in the Roosevelt Room.

One new policy will end a government practice that lets military weapons, sold or donated by the U.S. to allies, be reimported into the U.S. by private entities, where some may end up on the streets. The White House said the U.S. has approved 250,000 of those guns to be reimported since 2005; under the new policy, only museums and a few other entities like the government will be eligible to reimport military-grade firearms.

The Obama administration is also proposing a federal rule to stop those who would be ineligible to pass a background check from skirting the law by registering certain guns, like machine guns and short-barreled shotguns, to a corporation or trust. The new rule would require people associated with those entities, like beneficiaries and trustees, to undergo the same type of fingerprint-based background checks as individuals if they want to register those types of guns.

“It’s a very artful dodge to get around people who are not capable, constitutionally or legally, of owning a weapon,” Biden said.

The National Rifle Association dismissed the administration’s moves as misdirected, arguing that background checks for corporations and a ban on reimporting outdated guns wouldn’t keep criminals from getting weapons.

“The Obama administration has once again completely missed the mark when it comes to stopping violent crime,” said NRA spokesman Andrew Arulanandam. “This administration should get serious about prosecuting violent criminals who misuse guns and stop focusing its efforts on law-abiding gun owners.”

Joined by Attorney General Eric Holder, Biden formally unveiled the new measures Thursday while swearing in Todd Jones, whose confirmation to head the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives after six years of political wrangling to fill that position was another of Obama’s post-Newtown priorities. A Senate deal to approve the president’s pending nominations after Democrats threatened to change Senate rules cleared the way for Jones’ confirmation last month.

Still out of reach for Obama were the steps that gun control advocates and the administration’s own review say could most effectively combat gun violence in the U.S., like an assault weapons ban and fewer exceptions for background checks for individual sales. Only Congress can act on those fronts.

There is scant evidence that support for gun control legislation has grown substantially since April, when efforts died in the Senate amid staunch opposition from the NRA and most Republican senators.

“Sooner or later, we are going to get this right,” Obama said that day in the White House Rose Garden, with the families of Newtown victims and former Rep. Gabrielle Giffords — herself a victim of a gunman — at his side. “The memories of these children demand it, and so do the American people,” the president said at the time.

In the months following the Senate vote, Biden has claimed that at a handful of lawmakers who opposed expanded background checks have told him privately they’ve changed their minds and want another chance. But Biden and White House officials have not named any of those lawmakers.

Renewing his pledge to keep working for legislative fixed, Biden suggested that one opportunity for improving prospects for gun control may come next year in the midterm elections. Liberal groups and those supporting gun control have vowed to hold accountable in 2014 those lawmakers who voted against gun control.

“If Congress won’t act, we’ll fight for a new Congress,” Biden said. “It’s that simple. But we’re going to get this done.”

These days, Obama and Biden mention gun control with far less regularity than when it appeared the Senate was poised to take action, although Obama did meet Tuesday with 18 city mayors to discuss ways to contain youth violence. And with immigration and pressing fiscal issues dominating Congress’ agenda, the prospects for reviving gun legislation appear negligible.

With Jones’ confirmation at ATF, the White House has completed or made significant progress on all but one of the 23 executive actions Obama had previously ordered in January, the White House said. Still lingering is an effort to finalize regulations to require insurers to cover mental health at parity with medical benefits, although the White House said that it is committed to making that happen by the end of 2013.

The new rules for guns registered to corporations will follow the traditional regulatory process, with a 90-day comment period before ATF reviews suggestions and finalizes the rule. It would only apply to certain types of guns that must be federally registered. Last year, ATF received 39,000 requests to register guns to corporations and trusts.



The White House

Office of the Press Secretary

For Immediate Release

Today, the Obama administration announced two new common-sense executive actions to keep the most dangerous firearms out of the wrong hands and ban almost all re-imports of military surplus firearms to private entities. These executive actions build on the 23 executive actions that the Vice President recommended as part of the comprehensive gun violence reduction plan and the President unveiled on January 16, 2013.Even as Congress fails to act on common-sense proposals, like expanding criminal background checks and making gun trafficking a federal crime, the President and Vice President remain committed to using all the tools in their power to make progress toward reducing gun violence.

Building on the 23 Executive Actions the President and Vice President Unveiled Last January

  • Last December, the President asked the Vice President to develop a series of recommendations to reduce gun violence. On January 16, 2013, they released these proposals, including 23 executive actions. With the first Senate confirmation of an ATF Director on July 31, 2013, the Administration has completed or made significant progress on 22 of the 23 executive actions. The new executive actions unveiled today build on this successful effort.

Closing a Loophole to Keep Some of the Most Dangerous Guns Out of the Wrong Hands

  • Current law places special restrictions on many of the most dangerous weapons, such as machine guns and short-barreled shotguns.  These weapons must be registered, and in order to lawfully possess them, a prospective buyer must undergo a fingerprint-based background check.
  •  However, felons, domestic abusers, and others prohibited from having guns can easily evade the required background check and gain access to machine guns or other particularly dangerous weapons by registering the weapon to a trust or corporation.  At present, when the weapon is registered to a trust or corporation, no background check is run.  ATF reports that last year alone, it received more than 39,000 requests for transfers of these restricted firearms to trusts or corporations.
  • Today, ATF is issuing a new proposed regulation to close this loophole.  The proposed rule requires individuals associated with trusts or corporations that acquire these types of weapons to undergo background checks, just as these individuals would if the weapons were registered to them individually.  By closing this loophole, the regulation will ensure that machine guns and other particularly dangerous weapons do not end up in the wrong hands.

Keeping Surplus Military Weapons Off Our Streets

  • When the United States provides military firearms to its allies, either as direct commercial sales or through the foreign military sales or military assistance programs, those firearms may not be imported back into the United States without U.S. government approval.  Since 2005, the U.S. Government has authorized requests to reimport more than 250,000 of these firearms.
  • Today, the Administration is announcing a new policy of denying requests to bring military-grade firearms back into the United States to private entities, with only a few exceptions such as for museums.  This new policy will help keep military-grade firearms off our streets.



By DANIEL HALPER | The Weekly Standard

The White House just announced two new executive measures for gun control. The announcement came to reporters via email.

“FACT SHEET: New Executive Actions to Reduce Gun Violence,” the subject of the announcement reads.

“Today, the Obama administration announced two new common-sense executive actions to keep the most dangerous firearms out of the wrong hands and ban almost all re-imports of military surplus firearms to private entities. These executive actions build on the 23 executive actions that the Vice President recommended as part of the comprehensive gun violence reduction plan and the President unveiled on January 16, 2013,” reads the White House’s announcement.

Even as Congress fails to act on common-sense proposals, like expanding criminal background checks and making gun trafficking a federal crime, the President and Vice President remain committed to using all the tools in their power to make progress toward reducing gun violence.

Building on the 23 Executive Actions the President and Vice President Unveiled Last January

·         Last December, the President asked the Vice President to develop a series of recommendations to reduce gun violence. On January 16, 2013, they released these proposals, including 23 executive actions. With the first Senate confirmation of an ATF Director on July 31, 2013, the Administration has completed or made significant progress on 22 of the 23 executive actions. The new executive actions unveiled today build on this successful effort.

Closing a Loophole to Keep Some of the Most Dangerous Guns Out of the Wrong Hands



Written by  Brian Koenig | The New American

In an effort to reignite the gun-control debate, two Democratic lawmakers are proposing massive tax hikes on handguns and ammunition, while linking the revenues with programs to prevent gun violence. Sponsored by Reps. Bill Pascrell (D-N.J.) and Danny K. Davis (D-Ill.), the “Gun Violence Prevention and Safe Communities Act” is ambitious, to say the least, as it would nearly double the current 11-percent tax on handguns, while lifting the tax on bullets and cartridges from 11 percent to 50 percent.

Articles taxable at 20 percent under the proposed legislation would include pistols, revolvers, and any “lower frame or receiver for a firearm, whether for a semiautomatic pistol, rifle, or shotgun that is designed to accommodate interchangeable upper receivers.” Meanwhile, taxes on firearm shells and cartridges would rise a whopping 40 percent.

In addition, the gun transfer tax would more than double under the legislation, upping the levy on all weapons (excluding antique firearms) covered under the National Firearms Act from $200 to $500.

“As a former mayor of one of the largest cities in New Jersey, I know how critical the issue of reducing gun violence is to our communities,” Rep. Pascrell, co-Chair of the House Law Enforcement Caucus, said of the legislation. “This bill represents a major investment in the protection of our children and our communities, and reflects the long-term societal costs of gun and ammunition purchases in our country.”

The two lawmakers claim their legislation would generate $600 million per year, and would be used to support law-enforcement measures and gun-violence prevention programs. According to a press release published on Rep. Pascrell’s website, the bill would allocate revenues in the following manner:

The Gun Violence Prevention and Safe Communities Act will direct the estimated $600 million in new revenue to programs designed to make communities safer and reduce violence, including: Project Safe Neighborhood Grants; Community-Oriented Policing Grants; Community-Based Violence Prevention Initiative Grants; research into the causes and prevention of gun violence via the Center[s] for Disease Control’s National Center for Injury Prevention and Control; the National Criminal History Improvement Program; the NICS Record Improvement Program; and grants to encourage schools and districts to implement comprehensive, evidence-based discipline systems to improve school climate.

Considering the bill’s glaring demands — and the fact that it’s being proposed in the Republican-controlled House — critics predict defeat for the measure. “I doubt this bill will pass, but we will lobby against it if need be,” declared Alan Gottlieb, who chairs the Citizens Committee for the Right to Keep and Bear Arms. “This is simply another shot against gun owners in this country.”

“What the anti-gun interests can’t ban, they want to tax it out of existence,” he added. “It’s nothing more than confiscatory taxation.”

Still, Reps. Davis and Pascrell’s bill could mark a change in gun-control strategy by anti-gun lawmakers. Courts continue to rule in favor of Americans’ rights to bear arms. Increasing taxes on guns and ammo, however, could be a backdoor to new gun-control policies.

Davis, who represents parts of Chicago that have been ravaged by gun violence in recent years, claims the new taxes are critical to purging violent crimes in his district. In a press release, he stated:

Gun violence in America has reached epidemic proportions and we cannot, as a nation, any longer tolerate the on-going social and economic costs of inaction. Gun violence is a daily reality for America and, in particular, for urban cities like Chicago. The crisis should outrage us all. This legislation is a pro-active approach to reducing gun violence by using proven preventive programs which have been starved for funds until now. As part of a comprehensive, multidimensional strategy to reduce gun violence, this legislation closes major loopholes in tax law and lays out an equitable, long term, sustainable strategy to provide the requisite resources.

Of course, Davis fails to correlate the soaring crime rates in his city with the severe gun-control laws that restrict citizens from protecting their own life and property. Indeed, Chicago has some of the strictest gun-control laws in the nation, yet homicides and other gun-related crimes are as prevalent as ever.

Illinois, for example, was the last state in the country to adopt a concealed carry gun law, which was passed earlier this summer. The state also has rigid background-check laws that help keep guns out of the hands of law-abiding citizens. This gun-control tactic, according to critics, only makes violent crimes more prevalent.

“Gun control policies don’t work because they disarm citizens while keeping criminals in possession of guns,” writes Charlie Vidal of PolicyMic. “Chicago’s strict policies have effectively given lawbreakers a monopoly on weapons in many parts of the city that the Chicago Police Department cannot or will not police effectively.”

A good contrast to Chicago for a natural experiment is Houston, Vidal asserts, as Houston has similar socioeconomic factors, such as density, population, and segregation. Like Chicago, Houston is a major hub for crimes such as human trafficking and drug trade. In terms of homicides, however, Houston has two-thirds the rate that Chicago has.

“This is because the people of Houston are well armed, while innocents in Chicago have been condemned to be sitting ducks,” Vidal explains.

While this comparison specifically addresses gun-control laws, taxes on firearms are a form of gun regulation, as they hinder law-abiding citizens from arming themselves. After all, nearly doubling the tax on gun purchases, combined with a 40-percent hike on ammo, is certainly nothing to sneeze at.



Published on Aug 31, 2013



by Dave Hodges |

In defiance of Congress’ refusal to violate the Second Amendment and take away the guns of American citizens, Obama just announced new steps which moves the country in the direction of gun control and eventual gun confiscation

obama gun controlThe Obama administration is banning the importation of assault weapons to anyone but the government. No word, if the ban will be applied to gun manufacturers who import their Obama is considering a federal rule to stop those who would be ineligible to pass a background check from getting around the law by registering certain guns (e.g., machine guns and short-barreled shotguns)  to a corporation or trust. The new rule would require people associated with those entities, like beneficiaries and trustees, to undergo the same type of fingerprint-based background checks as individuals if they want to register those types of guns.  he NRA has decried the move by stating that Obama needs to focus his efforts away from law abiding gun owners. Someone needs to tell the NRA that average citizens is who Obama wants to disarm, particularly the veterans because of what is coming.

Inch by inch, it is a cinch. Obama will not rest until he has all of our guns.



by Dave Hodges –

The contents of this article are controversial and the potential consequences are frightening. I did not rely on only source of information to bring this information to the attention of the public. Personally known, but unnamed ex-intelligence sources, who have previously proven the veracity of their knowledge and trustworthiness were the original bearers of this information. Second, a known and highly respectable source will be cited as the second source. However, the third and best source of the following information is the undisputed paper trail of government documents, legislative actions and Executive Orders.

Credibility of Sources

Over the past week, I have been approached by unnamed sources who are personally known to me, that wanted to  use me as a mouthpiece to spread the word to as many as possible, that the globalists are going for broke and are moving to destroy and enslave all nations, but none will be subjugated with the furor that is the United States because our country is the biggest threat to their plans of world domination.

I would never expect anyone to accept the unquestioned word unnamed sources. However, the use of unnamed sources can point us in directions which serve to validate their warnings to the American people if there statements can be backed up by other means. Subsequently, I will be being relying on a named source, who partially validates the claims put forth in this article. In addition, I have searched for a correlation between what I have been told and what I can find in government documents which would point to the validity of the scenario which will be laid out in this article. I am shocked at how easy it was to cross-validate the globalist intentions through a cursory examination of government documents.

 Source #1: Unnamed Former Intelligence Sources

Cutting right to the chase, the globalists have commenced their reign of terror. I was told last October by these same sources that false flag attacks were being planned. I was further told that several more false flag attacks are planned, in “Battle Ground America” in the same time frame, because it makes it hard for the public to see the correct tree in a dense forest of possibilities.

Please note that it is confirmed that the government is planning three anti-terrorist drills in major cities in the next 24 days. Additionally, the New York subway system will have “harmless gas” released in a simulated chemical weapons attack. Hard to know which one, if any of these, will a false flag attack in the making. In fact, I have been told that it is standard operating procedure that the globalists have multiple plans on the same day, and execute the most opportune one.

I have been told that following the bombing attack in Boston, the next wave of false flag attacks will consist of chemical and biological attacks along with another school shooting. The trump card will be a tactical nuclear weapon. Who will get the blame? There are two targets of opportunity, namely, Syria and/or Iran. These attacks will provide the excuse for martial law (for our protection of course) and the pretext to launch a war to defend the Petrodollar.

What Will It Be Like to Live Under Martial Law?

My former intelligence sources state that the internet will be taken down immediately as the globalists see it as an opportunity to galvanize the masses against the criminals who will subjugating the country. All bank accounts, pension funds and 401K’s will be frozen and stolen. Extreme travel restrictions will be put in place. Random house to house searches will be conducted. What will they be looking for? Of course, they will be looking for guns and the false flag events will give them the pretext to do so. And they will also be looking for known trouble makers.

Who Will He Be Aiming At Tomorrow?

Who Will He Be Aiming At Tomorrow?

Look at the Youtube videos of Boston martial law and you will have a great idea of why the Boston event went down the way that it did.

My sources report that many of the people round-ed up will be sent to re-education camps (FEMA Camps), if not outright executed. Also, food will be rationed, the use of utilities will be limited to certain times of day. Searches of homes in which the authorities will be looking for food and water supplies will be conducted and violators will have their products seized and they will be arrested. People will be given food ration cards similar to WWII. The anticipated propaganda to sell this to the public will be that it is for the war effort. Shopping malls, stadiums and other public venues will be the gathering site for people who are hungry or are seeking safe refuge. However, these centers carry the risk of being random extermination centers and a prelude to stack and pack living conditions forced upon them by the authorities. There will be a draft, both for the military and civilian work brigades. In other words, all people will become the unquestionable property of the state. All major corporations and natural resources will be nationalized under the direction of DHS and under Executive Order. If these mandates are fully implemented, we will be living in hell on earth. Is there any collaborating information and/or data which could serve to bring credibility to these reports? Read on, the confirmations will be undeniable.

#2 Source: My Recent Conversation With Pastor Lindsay Williams

Late last week, I responded to an email request made by Pastor Williams to appear on my talk show to share some startling details of what he has been told is coming by some of his global elite friends.  Lindsay related to me that the dollar could be collapsed as early as the end of the year and martial law will be imposed. The world’s economy is going to fail and what he described to me reminded me of the story line of the NBC hit series, Revolution, in which America disintegrates into a series of feudal societies all struggling against each other in a fight to the death scenario.  To paraphrase what Pastor Williams told me, I would summarize his message by saying that the people in charge will control everything.

The next and obvious question is if there is any confirming written proof of what my ex-intelligence sources and Pastor Williams are stating?

#3 Source: The Government Documents Which Validate the “Speculation”

There is a trail of governmental paperwork which confirms what many in high places are beginning to leak out. Further government documents are quite clear on these points. Further, I think the country should be asking why are so many prominent bankers leaving America? I first became aware of this fact as Jim Marrs revealed this fact on my show, last fall. 

Read further, the motivation for departing banksters should become apparent.

Why Impose Martial Law This Soon?

Why is the move to lock down America proceeding with such rapidity? Simple, too many of us have awakened to the tyranny that is unfolding. False flag events come and go and an increasing number of people are seeing right through games being played, such as planning terrorist training drills which coincide with a major false flag operation.

When the Oklahoma City bombing happened, the country reacted with horror. When 3,000 people were killed on 9/11, more people started asking questions. When the London and Madrid bombings took place, a few of us noticed the coincidence of terrorist training drills and the actual event. When the latest “terrorist bombing” took place in Boston, the “koolaid drinking CNN believers” are in the clear minority, for we have the globalist playbook and have caught on to their old familiar script and as a result we no longer believe their lies.

Late last year, I detailed how former intelligence operatives were bugging out to seek a safe haven in prepared getaways from the calamities that the globalists were enacting with the intent of seizing total control of the country through martial law which would be followed by a series of false flag attacks.These are the same two people who have temporarily broken their silence to bring me the first set of information offered in the first part of this article.

The Boston Marathon bombing shook them up and they claim that this is the opening salvo in this subjugation of the American people. The martial law situation in Boston was the beta test for everything from gun confiscation to the arresting of dissidents (i.e. anyone who disagrees with this criminal administration).

Based upon what these for intelligence types were telling me, I have been calling for a false flag event to begin the tipping point of the coming tyranny. The Boston bombing is the trigger event.  Make no mistake about it, we are going to war to protect the endangered Petrodollar. And martial law will be simultaneously ushered in after a series of false flag events.

Dissidents Will Be Removed or Worse

The National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA) has provided this criminal administration with all the “authority” to secretly arrest and even murder dissidents without a trial. The NDAA can be viewed as nothing but an East German Stasi enforcement mechanism which did the exact same thing in the hell that was East Germany. Thus, the claims of the intelligence sources about removing dissidents for “re-education or worse” is now within the grasp of this administration

Food As a Weapon

work-for-food-2One of the items I view as credible from my intelligence sources is that the government will use food to control the population.

Even Ray Charles could see that Obama is setting the table to take his place among Stalin, Hitler, Pol Pot, Castro and Mao as another despot in the long line of tyrannical leaders who would grant themselves the authority to subjugate the masses by using food as a weapon. Americans desperately need to look at history in order to understand what happens every time the people of a government allows the government to control its food supplies and farms.

In hindsight, I have often wondered how prophetic was Obama’s campaign speech when he promised to fundamentally transform America? This was actually one campaign promise that Obama is trying to keep. NSSM 200 has come full circle, but in this case, it is specifically aimed at the American people.  History show us that Socialists, Communists, Islamists and Marxists, use food and the production of food as a weapon against their own people in order to solidify power and control. We could soon be seeing the same thing.

I venture to say that most individuals who get their “news” from the mainstream media would hold fast to the belief that the benevolent U.S. government would never use food as a weapon against the American people. Someone should remind these “sheeple” that this is the same U.S. government which has been caught shipping drugs into Mexico under Operation Fast and Furious which has resulted in the deaths of a half dozen U.S. law enforcement officials. Yes, this is the same government which has turned a blind eye to HSBC bank setting up fictitious bank accounts in order to launder money derived from the profits of drug trafficking and running guns and then turning around and sending this money to fund various terrorist organizations. Yes, this is the same government which permits the Federal Reserve to send trillions of American dollars in order to bail out their own personal banking interests in Europe. Yes, this is the same U.S. government , through the TSA, which commits second degree sexual assault on airline travelers under the guise of protecting Americans from the very terrorists that they are complicit in funding through organizations such as the HSBC bank. Therefore, it is prudent to ask the question, would the United States use food a tool of governmental policy in order to control its population? Unfortunately, this question has already been answered in the affirmative.

Further, the use of food by the U.S. government has been a matter of official U.S. governmental covert policy since 1974-1975.In December, 1974, National Security Council directed by Henry Kissinger completed a classified study entitled, “National Security Study Memorandum 200: Implications of Worldwide Population Growth for U.S. Security and Overseas Interests.” The study was based upon the unproven claims that population growth in Lesser Developed Countries (LDC) constituted a serious risk to America’s national security.

In November 1975 President Ford, based upon the tenets of NSSM 200 outlined a classified plan to forcibly reduce population growth in LDC countries through birth control, war and famine. Ford’s new national security adviser, Brent Scowcroft, in conjunction with CIA  Director, George H. W. Bush, were tasked with implementing the plan and the secretaries of state, treasury, defense, and agriculture assisted in the implementation of these insane genocidal plans.

NSSM 200 formally raised the question, “Would food be considered an instrument of national power? … Is the U.S. prepared to accept food rationing to help people who can’t/won’t control their population growth?” Kissinger has answered these questions when he stated that he was predicting a series of contrived famines, created by mandatory programs and this would make exclusive reliance on birth control programs unnecessary in this modern day application of eugenics in a scheme that would allow Henry to have his cake and eat it too in that the world would finally be rid of the “useless eaters!”

Third world population control, using food as one of the primary weapons, has long been a matter of official covert national policy and a portion of President Obama’s Executive Order (EO), National Defense Resources Preparedness is a continuation of that policy. Only now, the intended target are not the LDC’s but, instead, the American people.

With the stroke of his pen, Obama has total and absolute control over all food where his Executive Order states:

e)  “Food resources” means all commodities and products, (simple, mixed, or compound), or complements to such commodities or products, that are capable of being ingested by either human beings or animals, irrespective of other uses to which such commodities or products may be put, at all stages of processing from the raw commodity to the products thereof in vendible form for human or animal consumption.  “Food resources” also means potable water packaged in commercially marketable containers, all starches, sugars, vegetable and animal or marine fats and oils, seed, cotton, hemp, and flax fiber, but does not mean any such material after it loses its identity as an agricultural commodity or agricultural product.

(f)  “Food resource facilities” means plants, machinery, vehicles (including on farm), and other facilities required for the production, processing, distribution, and storage (including cold storage) of food resources, and for the domestic distribution of farm equipment and fertilizer…”

This unconstitutional Executive Order is particularly disturbing in that it clearly states that the government has control over anything that is “capable of being ingested by either human beings or animals…”  If you thought that you and Fido were going to get through coming food crisis by storing and consuming dog food, think again.

How will farmers maintain the nation’s food supply when all fertilizer, their farm equipment and all of their vehicles are under the control of this sociopathic  President or the next power-hungry President?

The term “all food storage facilities” includes your refrigerator, your pantry and even the very food in your cabinets as well as what is on your kitchen table. In short, anywhere you keep food is now under the control of the government and can be redistributed.

Have you recently been scratching your head in bewilderment as you watch on the news as the Amish have had their farms raided, raw milk producers have been jailed and the kids running lemonade stands have been shut down and ticketed? Now you know why these abuses are being perpetrated by the government in that it represents a mere conditioning process designed to get all U.S. citizens used to the idea that the government owns all food and food production.

The most clever aspect of this Executive Order is that no Hegelian Dialectic (i.e., false flag event) is needed as a pretense to seize food and imperil survivability. Section 201(b) of the Obama EO clearly states that this EO is enforceable under both emergency and non-emergency conditions.”

The warning issued by the unnamed intelligence sources certainly seems more credible given these set of circumstances. 

Through the National Defense Preparedness Act, Obama is following in the footsteps of Hitler and Stalin and we should all be worried, very worried.

More Executive Orders Validating the Ex-Intel Claims

The paper trail not only points to what is coming, the evidence is overwhelming. We are headed for an Orwellian nightmare like no dictator has ever been able to impose on any country at any time in world history. Here is a partial list of Obama’s Executive Orders along with a brief description.

Government Control Over All Fuel and Transportation

Executive Order 10990

Allows the government to take control over all modes of transportation, highways, and seaports.

Executive Order 11003

Allows the government to take over all airports and aircraft, including commercial aircraft.

Executive Order 11005

Allows the government to take over railroads, inland waterways, and public storage facilities.

Executive Order 10997

Allows the government to take over all electrical power, gas, petroleum, fuels, and minerals.

Government Control Over All Food and Water

Executive Order 10998

Allows the government to take over all food resources and farms


The Ability to Enslave the American People

Executive Order 11000

Allows the government to mobilize civilians into work brigades under government supervision.

Executive Order 11001

Allows the government to take over all health, education, and welfare functions.

Executive Order 11002

Designates the Postmaster General to operate national registration of all persons.

Executive Order 11004

Allows the Housing and Finance Authority to relocate communities, build new housing with public funds, designate areas to be abandoned, and establish new locations for populations.

Ability to Grant the President Total Dictatorial Control

Executive Order 11051

Specifies the responsibility of the Office of Emergency Planning and gives authorization to put all Executive Orders into effect in times of increased international tensions and economic or financial crisis.

Executive Order 11310

Grants authority to the Department of Justice to enforce the plans set out in Executive Orders, to institute industrial support, to establish judicial and legislative liaison, to control all aliens, to operate penal and correctional institutions, and to advise and assist the President.

Executive Order 11049

Assigns emergency preparedness function to federal departments and agencies, consolidating 21 operative Executive Orders issued over a fifteen year period.

 Intentions or Games?

The correlations between the ex-intelligence sources, Pastor Williams and the government paper trail appears strong. However, one should ask themselves a question. Are these acts merely the product of a set of politicians having too much time on their hands? If the government was not planning on a complete martial law shut down to accompany the coming WWIII, then what are all these laws and Executive Orders about? For myself, I have concluded that we in the patriotic dissident crowd are in a great deal of danger. I would never ask anyone to act based upon my writings. However, I hope I have encouraged many of you to do your own research and form your own best conclusions and course of action for you and your family.

Final Thoughts

Still Not Convinced? Then why did DHS purchase 2.2 billion rounds of hollow point bullets? Who do they plan on shooting?

Why Is DHS Practicing Shooting At These Targets?

dhs targets

Who are these coffins for?

 FEMA Coffins



Kurt Nimmo and Alex Jones has received a document originating from Halliburton subsidiary KBR that provides details on a push to outfit FEMA and U.S. Army camps around the United States. Entitled “Project Overview and Anticipated Project Requirements,” the document describes services KBR is looking to farm out to subcontractors. The document was passed on to us by a state government employee who wishes to remain anonymous for obvious reasons.

Services up for bid include catering, temporary fencing and barricades, laundry and medical services, power generation, refuse collection, and other services required for temporary “emergency environment” camps located in five regions of the United States.

Internment Camp Services Bid Arrives After NDAA

KBR’s call for FEMA camp service bids arrives soon after the Senate overwhelmingly passed the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA) which permits the military to detain and interrogate supposed domestic terror suspects in violation of the Fourth Amendment and Posse Comitatus.

Section 1031 of the NDAA bill declares the whole of the United States as a “battlefield” and allows American citizens to be arrested on U.S. soil and incarcerated in Guantanamo Bay.

A number of civil liberties groups have come out in strong opposition to the legislation, most notably the Japanese American Citizens League (JACL), the nation’s oldest and largest Asian American civil and human rights organization.

In a letter addressed to Congress, S. Floyd Mori, the national director of JACL, said the NDAA is the first time that Congress has scaled back on the protections provided by the Non-Detention Act of 1971. Mori said the legislation, if enacted and put into use, would be reminiscent of the unconstitutional indefinite detention of Japanese Americans during World War II.

KBR Instrumental in Establishing Camps in 2006

In 2006, KBR was awarded a contingency contract from the Department of Homeland Security, allegedly to support its Immigration and Customs Enforcement facilities in the event of an emergency, Market Watch reported.

The contract was effective immediately and provided for establishing temporary detention and processing capabilities to expand existing ICE Detention and Removal Operations Program facilities in the event of an emergency influx of immigrants into the U.S., or to support the rapid development of new programs, KBR said. The contract may also provide migrant detention support to other government organizations in the event of an immigration emergency, as well as the development of a plan to react to a national emergency, such as a natural disaster, the company explained.

The regions indicated in the KBR document.

Army Releases Civilian Inmate Labor Program Document

Soon after KBR’s announcement, a little-known Army document surfaced. Entitled the“Civilian Inmate Labor Program,” the unclassified document describes in detail Army Regulation 210-35. The regulation, first drafted in 1997, underwent a “rapid act revision” in January 2005 and now provides a policy for the creation of labor programs and prison camps on Army installations.

National Emergency Centers Act

In 2009, the National Emergency Centers Act or HR 645 was introduced in Congress. It mandates the establishment of “national emergency centers” to be located on military installations for the purpose of providing “temporary housing, medical, and humanitarian assistance to individuals and families dislocated due to an emergency or major disaster,” according to the bill.

In addition to emergencies, the legislation is designed to “meet other appropriate needs, as determined by the Secretary of Homeland Security,” an open ended mandate which many fear could mean the forced detention of American citizens in the event of widespread rioting after a national emergency or total economic collapse, as Paul Joseph Watson noted in January of 2009.

Also in 2009, the Army National Guard began posting advertisements calling forInternment/Resettlement Specialists, a fact noted by, Prison and other alternative media outlets but ignored by the establishment media.

Precursor: Rex 84 Mass Detention Operation

Rex 84, short for Readiness Exercise 1984, was established under the pretext of a “mass exodus” of illegal aliens crossing the Mexican/US border, the same pretense used in the language of the KBR request for services.

During the Iran-Contra hearings in 1987, however, it was revealed that the program was a secretive “scenario and drill” developed by the federal government to suspend the Constitution, declare martial law, assign military commanders to take over state and local governments, and detain large numbers of American citizens determined by the government to be “national security threats.”

Rex 84 was devised by Col. Oliver North, who was with the NSC and appointed liaison to FEMA. John Brinkerhoff, the deputy director of “national preparedness” programs for FEMA, and North designed the plan on a 1970 report written by FEMA chief Louis Giuffrida, at the Army War College, which proposed the detention of up to 21 million “American Negroes” in the event of a black militant uprising in the United States.

DHS Coordinating Occupy Arrests

Following a crackdown by police on Occupy Wall Street protesters around the nation, Oakland, California, mayor Jean Quan mentioned during an interview with the BBC that she was on a conference call with leaders of 18 US cities shortly before a wave of raids broke up Occupy Wall Street encampments across the country. It was later discovered that the FBI, the Department of Homeland Security and other federal police agencies had coordinated the often violent response to the protests.

New York Rep. Peter King, who heads up the House Homeland Security Subcommittee, signaled a sense of urgency when he said the federal government has “to be careful not to allow this movement to get any legitimacy. I’m taking this seriously in that I’m old enough to remember what happened in the 1960′s when the left-wing took to the streets and somehow the media glorified them and it ended up shaping policy. We can’t allow that to happen.”

The federal government responded similarly in the 1960s and 70s when the FBI organized and unleashed its unconstitutional secret police under the covert banner of COINTELPRO.

In addition to the DHS characterizing Americans supporting states’ rights and the Constitution as terrorists, the Defense Department’s Antiterrorism and Force Protection Annual Refresher Training Course in 2009 advised its personnel that political protest amounts to “low-level terrorism.”

Elements of the Police State Coming Together

The KBR document is more evidence that the federal government has established internment camps and plans to fill them with dissidents and anti-government activists that have been demonized consistently by the establishment media.

The NDAA was crafted precisely to provide the legal mechanism for tasking the military to round up activists it conflates with al-Qaeda terrorists. The plan was initially envisioned by Rex 84 and in particular Operation Garden Plot, an operational plan to use the Army, USAF, Navy, and Marine Corp. in direct support of civil disturbance control operations. It has since added numerous elements under the rubric of Continuity of Government, the overall war on terror, civil disturbance and emergency response.

The government has patiently put into place the crucial elements of its police state grid and overarching plan for the internment of political enemies.

We are quite literally one terror event away from the plan going live. As the DHS and the establishment media keep telling us, the next terror event will be on American soil and not the work of al-Qaeda but domestic patriot political groups. The FBI has specialized in creating domestic terrorists – or rather patsies – and shifting the blame over to their political enemies.


The U.S. Jails More People Than Any Other Country. The U.S. has the world’s highest incarceration rate, with Department of Justice data showing more than 2.2 million people are behind bars, equal to a city the size of Houston. Read more here-



by Dave Hodges –

May 7, 2013

Is America following down a path which could culminate in the government carrying out acts of genocide against select members of its population? There is increasing internet “chatter” which addresses this topic and many are beginning to discuss the possibility for the first time. I began to wonder the same and began to actually research the patterns of genocide in an attempt to determine if America is in trouble.

The fundamental research question associated with this paper is as follows. “Is the United States moving down a predictable path towards genocide based upon Stanton’s thesis.”

Brief Summary of the Stanton Genocidal Thesis

In 1996 Gregory H. Stanton presented a briefing paper to the State Department which included the eight stages of genocide. Stanton postulated that genocide is a process that is predictable, but is not necessarily a linear process. The stages of genocide do unfold in both a predictable and chronological order. Further, earlier stages continue to operate even as the process continues to progress.

Stanton identifies the eight stages as classification, symbolization, dehumanization, organization, polarization, preparation, extermination and denial. Subsequently, I researched where America is at in reference to these eight stages. The following paragraphs are the result my research.

Stage One: Classification

Stanton asserts that all cultures categorize people into “us and them” groups. The divisions are often made by using the variables of ethnicity, race, religion and nationality. Examples from history include Germans and Jews, Hutu’s and Tutsi’s. Bifurcated societies which lack mixed categories, such as Rwanda and Burundi, are the most prone to having genocide.

America is in the process of giving back the progress made by such pioneers as Martin Luther King. Blacks, whites, Hispanics, Asians and Native Americans are increasingly polarizing away from the common theme that we are all God’s children in which most of us share our unique American heritage.

The Trayvon Martin/George Zimmerman case typifies the increasing division between blacks and whites as Obama threw fuel on the fire by commenting on a local criminal investigation and inflamed the racial feelings associated with the case.

Illegal aliens have been another source of divisiveness and the intense animosity was best exemplified through the controversy of  SB 1070.

We exacerbate the divisions among our people in the welfare debates. With 47% of the country on some form of public assistance, there is a growing resentment among workers who feel they are supporting bums who will not work. Accurate or not, the division is growing.

Younger police officers no longer see the general public as their ally. Rather, they are trained to see all civilians as the enemy.

In short, America has no shortage of classifications which are being used to divide and conquer. On this point, America has met the first criteria on the road to genocide.

Stage Two: Symbolization

Sociologists and anthropologists tell us that classification and symbolization are universally common to every society. However, it is reaching alarming levels in contemporary America.

I was never an Obama fan. However, I thought his election had demonstrated how Americans were no longer going to divide themselves along racial lines and we would begin to truly carry out the meaning of Constitution and work together to solve our problems. Unfortunately, the opposite has happened. The races are further apart than ever before. For example, we hear phrases which serve to differentiate individuals. For example, I see reference to terms such as the “African-American community, or the Latino Community, or the Asian Community.” It is never the “White community” because that would be considered to be racist. when actually, it is Obama who is promoting racism.

What is a black community? I know black people who live in my community. They do not live in some gated community for only black people. I work with people from all ethnic and racial backgrounds. They don’t come out of some ethnic or racial enclave to join me at work. We are neighbors and often friends, yet, the establishment media and their labels are serving to create damaging symbols which are creating unnecessary tensions between various groups. The present terminology is deceptive and divisive and serves to separate human beings who might otherwise get along.

Someone who is a homosexual has to be labeled in sexual preference terms. Why? Why should we care what people do behind closed doors? Isn’t that for God to judge? Judge not lest you be judged. But the corporate controlled media has polarized gays from straights, blacks from whites, citizens from illegal’s, and on and on and on. Why create the symbolic differences? When one is robbing someone blind, they often distract them by creating imaginary enemies, vilify each side with symbols which degrade the polar opposite. Welcome to the divided nation that is America.

America has entered into the hyphenated race wars courtesy of the globalists and their controlled media. One just cannot be a respectable black person who is an American. He/she has to be an African-American. One cannot enjoy the pride of being from a Spanish speaking country, they have to be labeled a Mexican-American. My father’s family is from Germany, and I am not labeled a German-American. Why not? Because German-Americans, Italian-Americans, French-Americans are overwhelmingly white. The symbolism of skin color differences are not there and the globalists cannot gain any traction through hyphenating European descendents. Why can’t we just all be Americans without the hyphens? Because the globalists use this as a vehicle to divideand conquer. I am not minimizing the validity of celebrating the merits of one’s own cultural/racial background, regardless of ethnicity and skin color, I am espousing the virtues of finding a common American identity to better facilitate our mutual cooperation in solving our problems. However, that is not the globalist agenda. They seek to keep us distracted, keep us divided by destroying our sense of nationalism, through this artificial symbolism, and the day will come when all of us hyphenated people will never know what has hit us and we will unfortunately lack the common identity to band together against the forces that seek to enslave us.

We even condition our children to accept symbolic labels as schools make student wear RFID student cards or face suspension. The airports have become the symbolic manifestation of the enslavement of the American people as we are being conditioned to being groped and sexually assaulted by the TSA, and their blue uniforms and pot bellies are symbols of how we are to be treated by the government.

America meets the second criteria on the path to genocide.

Classification and symbolization do not always result in genocide unless they are followed by dehumanization.

Stage Three: Dehumanization

“Either you are with us, or you are with the terrorists” – George W. Bush

Who will ever forget this inane statement by one the most intellectually deprived persons to ever serve in the White House? Bush’s message was simple, if you disagree with the government, you are a terrorist. In contemporary American society, this is the ultimate dehumanization as it is the 1950’s Red Scare version of being labeled a communist.

Today the list of dehumanized individuals has increased a 1000 fold as the MIAC report and the recent DHS intelligence briefing are dehumanizing veterans, Ron Paul supporters, Second Amendment supporters, Constitutionalists and Libertarians as domestic terrorists.

The above mentioned groups are not Americans, DHS is labeling them as sovereign citizens who lurk around every corner ready to set off a deadly biological, chemical or nuclear attack. This is total dehumanization. The TSA’s grabbing of our genitals is total dehumanization and we are allowing ourselves to be conditioned, lock, stock and barrel.

Sociologists tell us that dehumanization overcomes the natural barriers against the urge to murder. Media hate propaganda is removing the last barriers to this natural prohibition. America is well on the way to being conditioned to accept genocide as a matter of national policy.

Genocidal cultures lack constitutional protections which would protect contrary speech. In genocidal cultures contrary speech should be treated differently and we are seeing this with the state of Minnesota as they will soon be requiring veterans to have their former military status noted on the drivers license.

America has mostly completed the third stage of genocide, the dehumanization of anti-governmental groups and selected enemies of the state.

Stage Four: Organization

Genocide is always carried out by the government. They often using militias to provide deniability of state responsibility, but genocide is always state sponsored.

At this stage, plans are made for genocidal killings. Do we have such plans in the United States? Why yes we do!

Why did DHS buy 2.2 billion rounds of ammunition? Why did DHS purchase 2700 armored personnel carriers?

Is it hunting season at DHS? Who is the game? Over five rounds of ammunition for every man women and child in America.

There are 800 detention facilities that are being fully staffed and operational. Guillotines and box cars with rows of shackles are the new toys of the NWO give new meaning to the following Biblical phrase:

“Rev. 20:4-”And I saw the souls of them who were beheaded for the witness of Jesus and for the word of God…”

Why has FEMA ordered 20,000 box cars and 30,000 guillotines?

Why was the NDAA passed which allows the government to secretly arrest, detain, and murder citizens. Remember, Holder has asserted that Obama has the authority to murder America with drones.

Why was the National Defense Resources Preparedness Executive Order passed? This order allows conscription for both civilian and military duty. All food is controlled by the government. All resources, including bank accounts, businesses and industry are controlled by the government under martial law conditions. This Executive Order gives the President the authority to declare martial law on his/her volition.

America, is this enough preparation for you?

America has met the fourth requirement on the path to becoming a genocidal society.  Now let’s look at stage five.

Stage Five: Polarization

Stanton states that in stage five, extremists drive the groups apart and begin to broadcast polarizing propaganda. The corporate controlled media does a wonderful job of doing just this very thing  every single day. Immediately, after the bombs were exploded at the Boston Marathon, one of the major CIA’s mouthpieces, Wolf Blitzer speculated on air if the bombs were detonated by a “patriot group”.

Further, the media would have one believe that anyone who wants a real investigation into Sandy Hook is a “conspiracy theorist”, as if investigations are somehow an extremist act. Since 95%+ of the major media is owned by the globalists, should we be surprised that the media is a tremendous polarizing agent?

Also in stage five, Stanton postulates that extremist operatives target the moderates from one’s own group in order to eliminate any derivation of the mission from within. Generally speaking, moderates are in a position to be the most able people capable of stopping the coming genocide. Therefore, anyone who is perceived to not be on board, are the first to be marginalized, arrested and killed.

Although Obama is not presently murdering dissenting moderates within his ranks who are not on board with his brand of tyranny, he is purging senior officers in the command ranks of the military for the slightest disagreement with him.

Last fall, Obama purged two senior command officers in the Middle East in a potential war zone, thus risking these very commands. Subsequently, Obama needlessly endangered a large portion of the military in favor of establishing his absolute dominance over his subordinates.

Obama fiddled, with regard to the threat at Benghazi,  and subsequently, Ambassador Stephens was murdered. The former commander of AFRICOM, General Carter Ham, and the commander of Carrier Task Force Three, Admiral Charles M. Gayouette, were fired when they attempted to rescue Chris Stephens in violation of their orders. However, the reckless and unprecedented action of firing these commanders came at a critical time in the Middle East as the US was making hints at attacking Syria and Iran at the time. Despite the high levels of tension in the Middle East, Obama was willing to sacrifice military leadership to purge two commanders who refused to be his accomplice to the murder of Ambassador Stephens. In addition, General Joseph Dunford, the Marine Corps’ second in command, suddenly stepped down as well, presumably because he also took issue with idly standing by while a group of barbarians raped and killed an American ambassador. Further, CIA Director, David Patreaus was fired during the same time frame for having an extramarital affair. Nobody, but the CNN Kool-aid drinkers, believes the official explanation for the Patreaus departure. Obama has purged 17 senior level officers.Soldiers who attempt to rescue and ambassador against orders, might be hesitant to give the order to fire upon unarmed American citizens when given the directive from the President.

Although Obama is not murdering the moderates under his command, he is removing them from positions of power nonetheless and as such, is accomplishing the polarization he desperately seeks.

civil disobedienceStanton’s genocidal theory presupposes that all polarization emanates from the government. However, polarization can be a two way street. If the government, through a series of provocations, such as passing extreme gun control/gun confiscation legislation, can force the people to take to the streets, the same objectives can be achieved. In other words, is the current administration pushing a sizable number of citizens to react violently? Is Obama trying to force America into a winner take all civil war? Before you would say no, I would invite you to decide for yourself as you take a look at the April 28th poll run by Farleigh Dickinson University’s Public Mind Poll.  Registered voter participants were surveyed on whether they believe it will necessary to revolt against government in order to protect our liberties. The results are stunning and are revealed below.


These results are indeed quite telling in that 30% of surveyed registered voters feel that an armed revolution may be necessary in order to protect our American liberties. Over 44% of Republicans answered yes, while only 18% of democrats answered in the affirmative.

Polarization can occur at several levels and the Obama administration, at the behest of his puppeteers, are doing a marvelous job of polarizing the country.

Therefore, I have concluded that this administration is in the process of meeting the fifth goal of polarization. This process is not completed but it definitely is a work in progress.

Polarization can occur at several levels and the Obama administration, at the behest of his puppeteers, are doing a marvelous job of polarizing the country.

Therefore, I have concluded that this administration is in the process of meeting the fifth goal of polarization. This process is not completed but it is definitely a work in progress.

So far, this administration’s report card, is five for five, with regard to the first five stages of Stanton’s blueprint for America’s coming genocide.

Stage Six: Preparation

In the preparation stage on the path to genocide, potential victims are identified and separated out often because of their ethnic or religious identity. Sometimes, the death lists are created because of political beliefs and political affiliation.

History shows that the process of creating death lists is normally secretive and incremental in terms of implementation. At first, the intended targets are merely listed as “people of concern.”  Specific members of potential victim groups are required to display identifying symbols. This is usually followed by the expatriation of property. This is subsequently followed by forced segregation under the color of discriminatory law. Victims are often to forced to live in segregated ghettos, are deported to a concentration camp or are confined to a famine-struck region and are starved to death.

Are these things happening in America today and do our citizens have any cause for concern in this area?

Enemies of the State: The New Christians Are the Old Jews

Ron Trowbridge, an undersheriff with the Prowers County, Colo., Sheriff’s Office detailed a presentation, on behalf of Homeland Security (DHS) in which Colorado State Patrol Trooper, Joe Kluczynski, gave a two hour presentation on the “sovereign citizen” movement. The message was clear to all in attendance. If Christians take the Bible too literally, they should be considered to be a domestic terrorist threat under the label of what DHS is referring to as being a sovereign citizen.

Lt. Col. Rich warned his subordinates to not back down from “bad Christian behavior” for “when they see behaviors which are inconsistent with Army values, don’t just walk by. Do the right thing before it becomes a problem.” Further, the warning has been given to flag Christians and put them on no buy lists for guns. Rich’s briefing dovetails with the same kind of anti-Christian rhetoric recently presented to Colorado law enforcement officials in La Junta, Colorado in which Christians were prominently displayed in as domestic terrorists if the take the Bible too literally.

The Pentagon should change their name to the Pentagram as the military has confirmed that they have eliminated the free exercise of religion as proselytization is not permitted on military bases. “Religious proselytization is not permitted within the Department of Defense,” spokesperson Nate Christensen stated. Atheists, like the majority who are in charge of the environmental movement at the United Nations have no equivalent restriction. The United States government is officially in the business of religious discrimination and First Amendment is now officially dead.

Labeling and Criminalizing the Exercise of the First Amendment

Who could ever forget the infamous East German Stasi inspired MIAC Report in which the mainstream of America are considered terrorists by the government for the following behaviors.

- If you’re an anti-abortion activist, you are a domestic terrorist

- If you support the Second Amendment, you are a domestic terrorist

- If you display political literature supporting a third-party candidate or a certain Republican member of Congress, you are a domestic terrorist

- If you possess subversive literature, such as “End the Fed” literature you very well might be a member of a domestic paramilitary group, you are a domestic terrorist

- If you supported you supported any former third-party presidential candidates like Texas Rep. Ron Paul, Chuck Baldwin and former Georgia Rep. Bob Barr, you are a domestic terrorist

- If you are a returning veteran, you are a domestic terrorist

- If you are a “conspiracy theorists” (as if two people would never get together to conspire to break the law) who believe, for example, that the United States, Mexico and Canada will someday form a North American Union, you are a domestic terrorist

- If you are a “Militia member” most commonly associated with 3rd party political groups,” you are a domestic terrorist

- If you display Constitutional Party, Campaign for Liberty or Libertarian material, you are a domestic terrorist , you are a domestic terrorist

- If you are in possession of the Gagsden “Don’t Tread on Me” flag or the widely available anti-income tax film “America: Freedom to Fascism,” you are a domestic terrorist according to the banksters who have hijacked our government

- If you believe that bankster thugs have hijacked the legitimate government, it is presumed you are a domestic terrorist

The Attack On Veterans

If the government ever decided to enact a policy of national genocide, veterans would be America’s first line of defense. They would have the ability to organize and train their local community to resist the impinging tyranny. They would be the leaders of any guerrilla war movement, which surely would characterize any resistance movement.

Veterans are presently receiving letters from the Veterans Administration which state that they must submit to a competency hearing (Editor’s note: without probable cause) and  “A determination of incompetency will prohibit you from purchasing, possessing, receiving, or transporting a firearm or ammunition. If you knowingly violate any of these prohibitions, you may be fined, imprisoned, or both pursuant to the Brady Handgun Violence Prevention Act, Pub.L.No. 103-159, as implemented at 18, United States Code 924(a)(2),” the letter reads. This is a blatant attempt to disarm the majority of veterans all across the country in a concerted effort to neuter the last line of defense against the encroaching wave of tyranny sweeping this country.

For the sheep who cling to the false hope that the government would never do this to a veteran, you can read the Connelly VA letter here.

The Minnesota Department of Motor Vehicles, which hopes to have the policy implemented by 2015, cites an inherent mental health threat by veterans as their main reason for devising the plan.

“We’ve seen what these savages are capable of all over CNN and MSNBC,” says DMV director, Greg Olson. “Out of all the millions of men and women who have deployed to combat zones this past decade, there are literally a dozen, perhaps even two,  who have come home and committed atrocious acts. That’s way too big a chance. We can’t risk having these people hidden in our community and will be making sure they’re easily identifiable to law enforcement personnel and citizens in general.”

The new policy commands law enforcement personnel, once they have contact with a suspected veteran to “Phase One will consist of the officer identifying an individual’s vet status on his or her driver’s license,” he says. “Once the officer realizes what he or she is dealing with, Phase Two will kick in and they will immediately unsheathe their pistol and drawdown on the potential psychopath. Then, at Phase Three, the officer will be given free reign to search the individual’s vehicle for weapons and dead bodies. If, and only if, the officer doesn’t find anything, then he will subsequently release the veteran and thank them for their service.” It is time to a civics quiz boys and girls.

How many amendments to the Constitution did Commissar Olson just violate?

Unlawful detention: Fifth Amendment Violation

Unlawful Search and Seizure: Fourth Amendment Violation

Right to Free Association (i.e. being a Veteran): First Amendment Violation

Make no mistake about it, Minnesota’s unconstitutional and criminal actions against veterans is the equivalent to handing veterans an ID marked with the J stamp as it is the proverbial bulls eye on the back. And please allow me to re-emphasize, that without armed veterans, any resistance against a move to commit government sponsored wholesale genocide against selected American groups is doomed to failure. America needs it veterans to protect the country from this administration. They are the modern day equivalent of the Minutemen and this is their Lexington and Concord.

Detention Camps

Stanton mentioned that as a prelude to extermination, dissidents and other undesirables must be rounded up prior to extermination. Why not kill them where they stand? It is for the same reason that the Gestapo and Stalinists rounded up the majority of the Jews and political dissidents in the wee morning hours. No witnesses!  There would be no visible signs to alert and possibly panic the general population that a massive genocide was underway.

Are there political dissident camps in the United States?

Jessie Ventura did an excellent job of exposing the three necessary elements and features of the detention camps which include the actual existence of the camps, proper staffing and legislative support for FEMA camps. They are political prison camps plain and simple and the evidence is convincing.

Still, there will be some who will minimize the proof that the government is preparing a home away home for many of us because of personal fear and subsequent denial.

CBS news admits that FEMA camps are real.  A report revealed the true existence of a FEMA shelter camp, set up in the aftermath of Hurricane Sandy,  became home for victims of Sandy and is located in Oceanport, New Jersey. This camp contains 40 acres of emergency housing and is located in the parking lot of a race track. The camp is complete with hot meals and hot showers. The CBS report interviewed a representative of FEMA who sells the camp as a refuge for first responders to the storm and then at the end of the interview, as an afterthought, acknowledges that 200+ storm victims and at the time of the report, more refugees were showing up every day.

Reporters were not permitted to enter the FEMA facility amid reports that the “new residents” were reporting  that the heating, food and general overall comfort of the camp is not as good as good FEMA people were reporting.

The following excerpts speak as to why federal agencies hire spokespersons. FEMA Camp spokesperson, Scott Sanders must have been absent from work the day that Reed Kozlow was interviewed by a local reporter.  “You hover around waiting for the call. When the phone rings I can go. It’s all about the group,” said one of the FEMA workers at the camp, Reed Kozlow. Kozlow went on to state that  “Whatever a community needs we provide. For Sandy we set up 12 camps to help.”  The Koslow statement is very interesting, because the CBS report leaves the viewer with the impression that this was a single FEMA camp facility and an isolated incident. Yet, Kozlow admits that there is a camp in Meriden, Connecticut, where he brought in big generators, “as big as pickup trucks” with many odds and ends which he compared to setting up a small city complete with light and heat for the victims. And curiously, he admitted to installing fencing around the camp. Fencing? Why would a “FEMA rescue camp” need fencing? The better question is, why would they be keeping people out? And why would that be the case, since they are a rescue facility? The most logical explanation is that FEMA Camps are set up to detain, not to protect and the “facing in fencing” is standard FEMA issue which is why we see fencing designed to restrict movement.



FEMA camps are being activated and very soon they will be staffed by 100,000 new intern specialists currently being recruited by the Army and the National Guard. And as if the establishment of 800 enslavement and extermination centers is not enough, the globalists have left clues which clearly signals their intentions as well as a fair amount of their game plan. In order to inflict maximum casualties for the desired emotional reaction from the American people, namely fear and submission, malls and sports stadiums are conspicuously effective targets for imaginary terrorists especially when one considers that the Simon Property Group, the largest owner of malls in North America, as well as all of the professional sports leagues have just entered into a “See Something, Say Something” partnership with the Department of Homeland Security.Simon properties have offered their malls as “housing centers” to be used by DHS should a mass relocation of the public be deemed necessary.

Need Job? Out of Work?  FEMA Camps are hiring.

If you are out of work and would like a job guarding and exterminating the rest of us, you do your part to serve the NWO and apply here.

Death Lists

Stanton identifies death lists as a surefire indicator that a government sponsored genocide is imminent.

The existence of the Civilian Inmate Labor Program is a page right out of the Nazi playbook. Historically, slave labor and genocidal extermination camps go hand in hand with detention and enslavement being the prelude to mass murder.

There are the rumored Red and Blue lists in which people, prior to the declaration of martial law are taken from their homes and either put into slave labor camps and systematically starved to death or our immediately executed.

Red List – These are enemies of the NWO. Two weeks before martial law they could be taken from their homes and flown to camps for immediate extermination. Generally, these are people in leadership roles or other public positions.

Blue List – Also enemies of the NWO but not necessarily leaders. After martial law these people could be rounded up for “re-programming” in the camps. Survivors will be used mostly for slave labor.

The evidence for Red/Blue lists are mostly derived from anecdotal or unnamed sources and these sources typically do not inspire confidence. However, when the anecdotal evidence is examined in the context of the other elements of Stanton’s Hypothesis, it is probable that death lists do exist and are secretly contained within the well-established police state surveillance grid controlled by DHS and the NSA. Watch the following short video and tell me what the hell is a Red Zone which appears at about 3:50 into the video?



Along these lines, in 2004, FEMA placed an order with Gunderson steel for 107,200 full-length railroad cars, each with 143 pairs of shackles, capacity for 15,329,600 prisoners. And of course it is now public knowledge that DHS has ordered over 2.2 billion rounds of ammunition and 2700 armored personnel carriers.

Are there guillotines awaiting American threats to “national security?” View this video and decide for yourself.



Pre-crime arrests, indefinite detention, all in violation of the Constitution, have become mainstream policy for this present administration.

On New Year’s Eve of 2011, Obama signed the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA) into law which makes it legal to detail and incarcerate citizens, indefinitely, without using the due process of law. How clear does it have to be? Are FEMA Camps (real) death lists (rumored) and Guillotines (anecdotal proof) that farfetched within this context? Even if the existence of death lists and guillotines cannot be fully confirmed within the current context, shouldn’t we still ask ourselves what all the rest of this is all about? The establishment of the police state grid reminds me of the old Soviet saying in which they sarcastically proclaim that the last capitalist will sell the last rope to be used in the last execution of that last capitalist. Remember, you are paying for your own demise.

Control of Food

This just leaves us with one more element of Stanton’s sixth stage and that would be the control of food.

Over the past 18 months, the country has witnessed numerous Federal swat team raids of raw milk producers including the harassment of the Amish of all people. These are undoubtedly beta tests for the complete seizure of America’s food supply. And this is all made possible by Obama’s March 16, 2012, executive order entitled, The National Defense Resources Preparedness.  This executive order states that the President alone has the authority to take over all resources in the nation (labor, food, industry, etc.) as long as it is done “to promote nation defense.” Case closed.

Nearly all of Stanton’s preconditions for the fulfillment of the sixth stage of unfolding genocide have been met with the possible exception of death lists. Certainly, the FEMA camps are not vacation centers and one cannot presume that they will come out more healthy than they when they were involuntarily housed at these centers.

Stage Seven: Extermination

The good news is that mass exterminations of American citizens is not being overtly carried out right now by the present administration. I know that many people will say that the genocide has already begun and they will undoubtedly bring up the subjects of Chemtrails, GMO’s, Fluoride, etc.  I am not denying that these variables and several other toxins are not having a deleterious impact on human health. However, the only topic under investigation in this series is the question of mass murder being carried out by government sponsored entities against selected elements of the population.

Although there are no exterminations taking place on American soil, it is clear that our country is on a train which is gaining momentum, having passed six stages on the way to genocide. The trains next stop is unquestionably extermination unless the American people can launch an amazing rally and take back the country. However, at this point, it would probably take a civil war to take America back because our country has become such a nation typified by passivity that it probably does not have the collective guts to rise up and fight back because most of us still have food on our collective tables. Meanwhile as the train races toward genocide, it it’s gaining momentum.

What Will the Extermination Look Like?

The best predictor of future events are past events. On that basis, let’s take a short look ahead as to how Stage Seven, Extermination, could potentially look like to many Americans, when it finally unfolds.

It is the Christmas season of 2014. A lot has happened in the past year. The trigger event leading to the trouble that we are presently in started when the banks closed their doors when it was announced that Iran had planted a computer virus which brought down the computerized banking system. Actually, that was a lie. It was another in the long line of false flag events which was designed to help the globalists gain control over everything.

At first, personal banking assets were frozen and then they just disappeared. Most Americans were left without the means to pay their mortgage, or to buy food and medicine. Then the rioting and looting began, and martial law was declared. War was simultaneously launched and Iran was attacked which may bring Russia and China into the conflict.

The first stage of the Extermination stage was underway when the bankers, who have seized control over the government, left the entire western half of the nation exposed to invasion. By prior agreement, the Chinese, fully in control of the Panama Canal, began moving north and, along with North Korea, eventually entered the America’s underbelly in the Southwest. The Russians crossed the Alaskan Land Bridge and decimated Alaska and Northwest Canada.

In a replay of the SS Nazi death squads entering Russia in 1940, entire geographic areas were targeted for extermination by the conquering hordes. Many in the West and the Northwest were summarily executed by the death squads. Many were rounded up and sent to camps where they worked as slave labor until they were no longer needed and were subsequently eliminated. By prior arrangement, the Chinese and the Russians do not enter into the Eastern two-thirds of the country. The Agenda 21 dream of turning the entire west into a wilderness wasteland was realized.

In the Eastern two-thirds of the country, the martial law government let the people stay in their homes so long as they deeded their house back to the bank. It became illegal to store more than three days of food and water. Americans were forced to turn in their guns. Any citizen caught with a gun was committing a capital offense and public executions were summarily carried out. Everyone, even the disabled, were assigned to work brigades. Some work brigade duty consisted of going to your regular job. Most work brigade duty consisted of performing work for the government. Food and gas was rationed. A dusk to dawn curfew was instituted. Two separate drafts, a public sector military draft and private sector government/NGO draft, were instituted (i.e. slaves to the corporations). Despite the horror that had become America, your family had somewhat adjusted until the day your six year old repeated something you had said about the “old” American Constitution at school. The teacher reported your family to the Principal, who in turn, filed an electronic “see something-say something” report with the Department of Homeland Security. You were now a target for re-education and that meant being sent to a camp. Yet, your family was totally unaware of what was coming based upon the innocent statement of your child.



It is 4AM, and an armored personnel carrier, with a “Department of Homeland Security” emblem displayed on the driver’s side door, accompanied by three black canvass covered trucks pulls up in front of you home. A dozen well-armed men quickly exit the vehicle and train their guns on the windows of your home. Another team exits one of the trucks and forms a protective perimeter for the black garbed terrorists surrounding your house. The troops on the perimeter were tasked with arresting anyone of your neighbors who peers out the window or worse yet, might be videotaping the proceedings. These government terrorist events have happened enough times before that most of the people know not to look out their windows when they hear noises in the early morning hours. With the lights off in the house, the parents run to their children’s rooms to make sure they do not look out the window. Your neighbors remain quiet and are just relieved that the wolf has passed by their door one more time.


genocide break down door


You and your family are fast asleep when the battering ram breaks down your front door. By predesign, from the schematics of your home, the heavily armored swat team enters every bedroom yelling and screaming. Everyone in your family is awakened with a gun pressing against their body while the intruders are incessantly yelling commands designed to terrorize and gain compliance from your family. The government terrorists would prefer not to kill you in your home, but they will not hesitate to do so if you resist.

Your family members are immediately bound and gagged, so that when they rush you from your house, to the waiting transport trucks, your screams of terror cannot alert your neighbors as to the reign of terror that is occurring in your peaceful neighborhood.

Scantily clothed and with no shoes on your feet, you are boarded onto one truck, you attempt to yell to your children that you love them because you know the drill, as you know that you will never see them again. But your muffled sound, goes unheard by your children thanks to the gag covering your mouth. Your spouse is boarded onto a second truck and your children onto a third truck. All are shackled including the children. Then the trucks quickly speed off into the night.

You arrive at a processing center and are dressed in a prison uniform. You are boarded onto a train, traveling all afternoon, until you arrive at a concentration camp, the kind of camp that you have only heard rumors about. And at this point, you realize that a new chapter in human history has begun.

It is a hellish future that I want nothing to do with.  Still, there are those that will deny that the first six stages are making the seventh stage possible. However, I see no other conclusion when we collectively examine the hard evidence presented.

Stage Eight: Denial

In writing the first four parts of this article, I have been accused of being a member of the lunatic fringe or an undercover operative for DHS.

Some readers have angrily protested that a genocide could never happen on American soil. A few expressed outrage as they asked me how dare I disparage my country and my government with unsubstantiated charges of laying the foundation for future genocide?  “This is America, by God, and we don’t commit genocide.” Really?

Crimes Against Humanity Committed On American Soil

According to Ward Churchill, a professor of ethnic studies at the University of Colorado, the reduction of the North American Indian population from an estimated 12 million in 1500 to barely 237,000 in 1900 represents a vast genocide. In fact, biological warfare was committed against the Native Americans.

Ward Churchill writes that on June 20, 1837, the U.S. Army began to dispense diseased “trade blankets” to the Mandan Indians (one of the tribes which aided the Lewis and Clark Expedition). The blankets were presented to the Mandans at Fort Clark in present-day North Dakota. Churchill states that the blankets had been taken from a army infirmary in St. Louis which had been previously quarantined for smallpox. and the Mandans became symptomatic on July 14 leading a local medical official to advise the Indians to scatter and seek refuge in the villages in nearby villages, thus, the pandemic commenced as it was spread far and wide.This was a clear cut case of biological warfare committed against a civilian population.

President Andrew Jackson was instrumental in the events leading up to what historians call the Trail of Tears. President Jackson’s policies toward Native Americans involved the ethnic cleansing of several Indian tribes. This is not unlike what Obama and his DHS and military minions are in the early stages of doing to Christians. Genocide happened to the Cherokee and it is beginning to happen the followers of Jesus.  Just substitute Christians for Native Americans in the template, and you’ll get the idea of what lies ahead.

Trail of Tears

Under President Andrew Jackson, 17,000 Cherokees were forced off their land in 1838 and had to undertake the long journey across the Trail of Tears. Historical parallels conjure up images of the Death March to Bataan and the Nazi persecution of Jews in the Warsaw Ghetto. Make no mistake about it, this was an ethnic cleansing inspired genocide carried out with forethought and malice in what became one of the darkest chapters in American History as 4,000 Cherokees died on the Trail of Tears from malnutrition, exposure, and disease.




Some of the darkest days in history took place under Hitler’s Final Solution. Interestingly, John Benefiel claims that Hitler actually got the idea for his concentration camps from the “Final Solution” treatment of Native Americans.



And let’s not forget the the biggest genocide in the history of the planet, namely, abortion, and this heinous persecution of God’s most precious creatures has taken place right here on American soil. Some abortions are medically necessary. The vast majority are not. Tragically, adoption centers have waiting lists of loving parents ready to open their homes and their hearts. Through Planned Parenthood, we have institutionalized genocide against the helpless.

We presently live under a despotic President who is forcing Catholics to fund abortions against their religious doctrine. This is evil personified. Since abortion became “legal” in the early 1970’s, 53 million innocent human beings have been the victims of this horrific genocide and now it is official governmental policy. And please spare me the political correctness arguments. To hell with political correctness, we are talking about mass murder, make no mistake about it.

Someone needs to speak for those who cannot. And there are still people who do not think genocide can happen here despite the fact that six of the eight Stanton stages of national genocide have been fulfilled in modern day America and we are in the midst of an ongoing holocaust which surpasses Hitler and Stalin.

There have been genocides in America, there is presently a genocide in America, and the biggest genocide in American history is right around the corner.

This leaves us with the final stage in the Stanton genocidal hypothesis, Denial. Stanton states that leaders will attempt to hide the genocide from world. However, this stage could be a moot point for this present administration, because if the globalists achieve the complete takeover of the world’s economy and subsequently their governments, there will be nobody left to conceal the truth from.

If we allow the banksters who have hijacked our government to continue with their psychopathic policies, they will write the next chapter of history and Ron Paul supporters, Christians, Second Amendment supporters, Constitutionalists and Libertarians will be the next generation of Native American genocidal victims.

Through the NDAA and the National Resources Defense Preparedness Executive Order (13603), Obama already has built-in escape clauses into his heinous preparations on the road to the enslavement of the American people and ultimately to genocide. By some twisted logic, he has granted himself the authority to commit secret arrests and murder whether it be carried out by drones, robots or DHS jack-booted thugs backed up by their 2.2 rounds of newly acquired ammunition. Thanks to a series of Obama Executive Orders and the NDAA, enslavement culminating with genocide will soon be official national policy.

If we ever allow Obamacare to become fully implemented on January 1, 2014, with all of its euthanasia policies, we will never recover as a nation. Make no mistake about it, Obamacare is not about healthcare, it is about enslavement and the full implementation of systematic genocide.

We Are Out of Time and Out of Options

At this point, all options should be on the table. We have been conquered by the mega-bankers. We are being ruled by a sociopathic elite who do not play by any set of rules.  I am still hopeful that the military will rise up and take back our country against this illegitimate government because I am quite sure that the sheep that now inhabit America do not possess the intestinal fortitude to do it themselves.

America has a little over seven months to reverse the suicidal direction that the nation has undertaken.  If America does not change course now, we will witness the darkest days within our national borders unfold right before our eyes.  God Help us!





Published on May 1, 2013

On Tuesday, April 30, Leandra Bernstein and Alicia Cerretani interviewed American expert of International Law, Prof. Francis Boyle on both the war and economic crimes against humanity the Obama Administration and those that run that administration are committing.



In a major victory for the Justice Department over privacy advocates, a federal appeals court ruled Tuesday that government agencies can collect records showing the location of an individual’s cell phone without obtaining a warrant.

The 2-1 ruling by the 5th Circuit Court of Appeals in New Orleans upheld the Justice Department’s argument that “historical” records showing the location of cell phones, gleaned from cell site location towers, are not protected by the Fourth Amendment.

A key basis for the ruling: The use of cell phones is “entirely voluntarily” and therefore individuals who use them have forfeited the right to constitutional protection for records showing where they have been used, the court held.

“The Government does not require a member of the public to own or carry a phone,” wrote U.S. Judge Edith Brown Clement in an opinion joined by U.S. Judge Dennis Reavley. The opinion continued: “Because a cell phone user makes a choice to get a phone, to select a particular service provider, and to make a call, and because he knows that call conveys cell site information … he voluntarily conveys his cell site data each time he makes a call.”

The issue of cell phone location data has become a major and increasingly contentious battleground in the privacy wars. Privacy advocates argue that the proliferation of cell phone towers in the U.S. – 285,561, according to the latest industry records, more than double the number 10 years ago – and new technologies, such as smartphones, permit law enforcement agents to track highly sensitive information about where individuals have been – their homes or trips to see doctors, friends or lovers – without making a showing to a judge that there is “probable cause” that a person has committed a crime.

Instead, police and law enforcement agents have been obtaining such records under a law called the Stored Communications Act by asserting that there are “specific and articulable facts” showing the records are needed for a criminal investigation – a lower standard.

The debate has even touched on the National Security Agency’s surveillance program: Director of National Intelligence James Clapper last week wrote a letter to Oregon Sen. Ron Wyden stating that the agency has “no current plans” to collect cell phone location data as part of its bulk collection of phone records.

But Wyden, a Democrat, has repeatedly asserted that the agency has the legal authority to do so, noting in a recent speech that “most of us have a computer in our pocket that potentially can be used to track and monitor us 24/7.”

Tuesday’s ruling involved three cases in which unknown federal agencies applied for 60 days of cell site location data in three criminal investigations. But it is hardly the last word on the subject. The 3rd Circuit Court of Appeals has already ruled that federal judges may require warrants for such data, and the ACLU and other privacy groups this month filed a brief to the 4th Circuit urging that warrants be required for all such government requests.



Published on Aug 21, 2013



By Timothy B. Lee | The Washington Post

August 19, 2013

If the police arrest you, do they need a warrant to rifle through your cellphone? Courts have been split on the question. Last week the Obama administration asked the Supreme Court to resolve the issue and rule that the Fourth Amendment allows warrantless cellphone searches.

In 2007, the police arrested a Massachusetts man who appeared to be selling crack cocaine from his car. The cops seized his cellphone and noticed that it was receiving calls from “My House.” They opened the phone to determine the number for “My House.” That led them to the man’s home, where the police found drugs, cash and guns.

The defendant was convicted, but on appeal he argued that accessing the information on his cellphone without a warrant violated his Fourth Amendment rights. Earlier this year, the First Circuit Court of Appeals accepted the man’s argument, ruling that the police should have gotten a warrant before accessing any information on the man’s phone.

The Obama Administration disagrees. In a petition filed earlier this month asking the Supreme Court to hear the case, the government argues that the First Circuit’s ruling conflicts with the rulings of several other appeals courts, as well as with earlier Supreme Court cases. Those earlier cases have given the police broad discretion to search possessions on the person of an arrested suspect, including notebooks, calendars and pagers. The government contends that a cellphone is no different than any other object a suspect might be carrying.

But as the storage capacity of cellphones rises, that position could become harder to defend. Our smart phones increasingly contain everything about our digital lives: our e-mails, text messages, photographs, browser histories and more. It would be troubling if the police had the power to get all that information with no warrant merely by arresting a suspect.

On the other hand, the Massachusetts case involves a primitive flip-phone, which could make this a bad test case. The specific phone involved in this 2007 incident likely didn’t have the wealth of information we store on more modern cellphones. It’s arguably more analogous to the address books and pagers the courts have already said the police can search. So, as Orin Kerr points out, if the Supreme Court ruled on the case, it would be making a decision based on “facts that are atypical now and are getting more outdated every passing month.”



Asks Supreme Court to allow warrantless cell phone searches.

Considering what’s come out about the NSA’s domestic surveillance “accidents,” it almost makes you wonder why the government would bother. Surely this information is accessible by other means. In an apparent effort to be thorough in its dismantling of the Fourth Amendment, the administration has asked the Supreme Court to rule that this amendment provides for the warrantless search of cell phones.

Here are the details of the case being argued:

In 2007, the police arrested a Massachusetts man who appeared to be selling crack cocaine from his car. The cops seized his cellphone and noticed that it was receiving calls from “My House.” They opened the phone to determine the number for “My House.” That led them to the man’s home, where the police found drugs, cash and guns.

The defendant was convicted, but on appeal he argued that accessing the information on his cellphone without a warrant violated his Fourth Amendment rights. Earlier this year, the First Circuit Court of Appeals accepted the man’s argument, ruling that the police should have gotten a warrant before accessing any information on the man’s phone.

Now, without getting into the arguments the government raises, not the least of which is that the courts are very divided on the subject, there’s the issue of the search itself and the circumstances surrounding it.

The path of least resistance is preferable for both the government and the affected law enforcement agencies. But what we’re dealing with here is persons already under arrest. They’re not going anywhere, unlike people who have only been “detained.” Why is it necessary to bypass the warrant process when you already have the suspect locked up? Even if something appears to be time-critical, there are ways around the process — like waking up a judge in the middle of the night or using any of the emergency exceptions built into these laws.

Is it really necessary to grant law enforcement the right to search through someone’s cell phone without a warrant? It’s certainly not a good idea, as cell phones today carry a lot more data than they did back in 2007, when the cell phone in question was a flip-phone that held little more than messages and phone numbers.

The government’s selection of this case to press the warrantless search issue is conveniently short-sighted, as Orin Kerr points out at the Volokh Conspiracy

[United States v.] Wurie involved a search in 2007, and the search of the phone was pretty narrow. The First Circuit described the phone as “gray Verizon LG phone,” and it noted that the phone had an “external caller ID screen on the front of the phone” and that had to be opened to be used. In other words, it wasn’t a so-called smartphone.

Kerr suggest the government would have been more helpful in setting precedent by taking a case involving phone hardware as we know it today, like Riley v. California, where an actual smartphone was searched without a warrant. The search in Wurie involved flipping open the phone and scrolling through the call log. The search in Riley was much more involved.

According to the lower court opinion, the officer first “looked at Riley’s cell phone, [and] he noticed all of the entries starting with the letter K were preceded by the letter C, which gang members use to signify ‘Crip Killer.’” It sounds like this was a text search through the phone, although it’s not entirely clear. Second, the officer later “looked through the phone and found some video clips” and “some photographs.” This sounds like a more extensive search through the contents of the phone.

The government and various courts have often compared cell phones to physical objects like address books or diaries. Even when granting the right to do limited warrantless searches of cell phones, the courts have drawn a line between what should be accessed and what shouldn’t.

It’s not even clear that we need a rule of law specific to cell phones or other computers. If police are entitled to open a pocket diary to copy the owner’s address, they should be entitled to turn on a cell phone to learn its number. If allowed to leaf through a pocket address book, as they are, United States v. Rodriguez, 995 F.2d 776, 778 (7th Cir. 1993), they should be entitled to read the address book in a cell phone. If forbidden to peruse love letters recognized as such found wedged between the pages of the address book, they should be forbidden to read love letters in the files of a cell phone.

The problem is that the government has apparently cherry-picked a case in order to get the ruling it wants, limiting its arguments to the glorified phone books cell phones once were. And that’s a bad idea, as Orin Kerr flatly states:

Reviewing a case with an earlier model phone would lead to a decision with facts that are atypical now and are getting more outdated every passing month.

The last thing this country needs is more outdated laws and rulings — the kind often misconstrued and broadly applied to cover technological advances not even hinted at, much less imagined by legislators and courts. Giving law enforcement the freedom to warrantlessly search today’s phones is roughly equivalent to giving them permission to enter someone’s home and search their computer. At least the administration didn’t cite the state of Texas’ assertion that searching a cell phone is no different than searching through someone’s pants.

But, at the end of 105 pages, one has to ask: how hard is it to acquire a warrant to search an arrested person’s cell phone? The arguments here seem to indicate that getting a warrant is a nearly insurmountable task when in all reality, it’s rarely more than a light hassle. The idea that the Fourth Amendment should be protected and upheld seems to be a non-starter with those advancing this argument. Unfortunately for all of us, it’s our own government sacrificing our privacy in order to cut a few corners.



By Kate Randall

The Obama administration is seeking the approval of the US Supreme Court for police to search the cell phones of arrested suspects without a warrant. In a petition filed last week, Solicitor General Donald B. Verrilli, Jr. and other government officials argued that warrantless cell phone searches do not violate protections of the Fourth Amendment of the US Constitution against unreasonable searches and seizures.

The Obama Justice Department is moving to overturn a ruling of the First Circuit Court of Appeals in the 2007 arrest of a Massachusetts man suspected of selling crack cocaine. The police seized his “flip” cell phone, noticed that it was receiving calls from a particular caller and then opened the phone to determine the number. This led them to the man’s home, where the police found drugs, cash and guns.

The defendant was subsequently tried and convicted, largely on the basis of the evidence obtained through the search of his cell phone. He argued on appeal that the warrantless search was a violation of his Fourth Amendment rights, and earlier this year the First Circuit Court of Appeals ruled that the police should have obtained a warrant before accessing any information on the man’s cell phone.

The Obama administration argues that the circuit court’s ruling conflicts with several lower court rulings as well as rulings of the Supreme Court, in which police had been given broad leeway to search the possessions of an arrested suspect, including notebooks, calendars and pages.

The government’s petition notes that a previous high court ruling held that “items found on the person of an arrestee may be searched incident to a lawful arrest and had emphasized that the rule was designed to avoid case-by-case determinations of whether a particular search incident to arrest was lawful.”

The Obama administration’s aggressive move to allow such warrantless searches comes in the context of the continual revelations of massive illegal spying by the National Security Agency (NSA), in which the government has secretly compiled vast databases containing private information of the public, including personal emails, web site searches, mobile phone GPS location data, medical records and much more.

Warrantless access to today’s “smart” phones would allow police to extract vast personal data about an individual without a warrant, including call logs, phone numbers, text messages and emails, photos, videos, passwords, location data, and more. Information found through such warrantless searches would also violate the constitutional rights of other individuals whose identity and other personal information could be extracted and stored as evidence.

Government claims that these searches are vital to “fight crime” are disingenuous at best. Warrantless searches could be utilized by police to search the cell phones of anti-war or other protesters, or of whistle-blowers or others opposing government policy. It could be used as well against undocumented immigrants picked up in government sweeps to locate their families and associates.

The Obama Justice Department argues that the ability of the police to put criminals, drug offenders in particular, behind bars, would be hampered by the inability to conduct these warrantless searches. They contend that by the time a warrant had been obtained, the content of the phone could be wiped out by the suspect, or remotely by another person, and evidence would be destroyed.

The ruling of the First Circuit Court of Appeals, however, noted that it is “not … particularly difficult” for police to prevent this from occurring. Police can turn off the device, remove its battery, or place it in a “Faraday enclosure,” an aluminum container that blocks the cell phone from receiving wireless signals. The appeals court concluded that concern that evidence on a cell phone could be quickly destroyed was, therefore, merely “theoretical.”

The government argued that the circuit court’s speculation ignored “the burden on the police of having to traipse about with Faraday bags or [other] technology and having to be instructed in the use of these methods for preventing remote wiping or rendering it ineffectual.” Police practices to protect a suspect against unreasonable searches and seizures are thus derided as burdensome traipsing about on the part of police officers.

The government also argued at the time that there was no reason to believe that police conducting the search of cell phones would seize evidence outside the bounds of their investigation. “While officers could arguably have searched [respondent’s] entire phone,” they wrote, “they limited [the search] to gathering information specific to the ongoing drug investigation, i.e., the location of his residence.” In fact, there is no reason to believe that police would not utilize evidence obtained in such searches to implicate the suspect or other individuals in criminal activity disconnected from the immediate arrest.

The Obama administration’s petition to allow warrantless searches of cell phones is of a piece with the government’s drive to assemble massive databases of personal information on virtually every American, which can be shared between government agencies. According to Reuters reports published earlier this month, information gathered by the NSA is being shared with the Drug Enforcement Agency (DEA), a Justice Department division.

The Special Operations Division (SOD), an interagency unit that includes the DEA, the FBI and the NSA, is using this information to target US citizens for investigation and prosecution, including for narcotics crimes. On the basis of this shared data, police could pull a person over for what appears to be an ordinary traffic stop. This individual could potentially be arrested and prosecuted, never knowing that he or she was the victim of illegal surveillance.



Written by  Joe Wolverton, II, J.D. | The New American

President Obama wants the Supreme Court to revoke the Fourth Amendment.

In a petition for a writ of certiorari filed last week by lawyers for the United States in the case of U.S. v. Wurie, the Obama administration asserted that cellphone records can be searched without a warrant, despite the protections against such government intrusion provided by the Fourth Amendment.

The Washington Post published a brief background on the case:

In 2007, the police arrested a Massachusetts man who appeared to be selling crack cocaine from his car. The cops seized his cellphone and noticed that it was receiving calls from “My House.” They opened the phone to determine the number for “My House.” That led them to the man’s home, where the police found drugs, cash and guns.

The defendant was convicted, but on appeal he argued that accessing the information on his cellphone without a warrant violated his Fourth Amendment rights. Earlier this year, the First Circuit Court of Appeals accepted the man’s argument, ruling that the police should have gotten a warrant before accessing any information on the man’s phone.

The Appeals Court ruling doesn’t sit well with a president who considers the Constitution irrelevant and who is accustomed to the court’s collusion in the federal government’s continuing effort to revoke all civil liberties.

Of specific interest in the Wurie case is the government’s claim that a cellphone is no different than any other items a suspect might be carrying that are subject to search by law enforcement, “including notebooks, calendars, and pagers,” the Post points out.

One of these things is not like the others, however. Today, a cellphone is as much a personal computer as a telephone and most people carry things inside their smart phones that have not been placed within the scope of acceptable searches: “our e-mails, text messages, photographs, browser histories and more,” the Washington Post explains.

Should the Obama administration succeed in compelling the Supreme Court to hear the Wurie case and to rule that police do not need a specific — constitutionally qualifying — warrant to search a suspect’s cellphone, the threat to the Fourth Amendment and individual liberty is incalculable.

For example, a person arrested on a bench warrant for failing to appear for a hearing would have his entire life subject to search and seizure if he was carrying his smartphone at the time he was taken into police custody. Then, the photos, texts, social media posts, and photos stored on that phone would come under the scrutiny of government and the data could be collected and saved in order to blackmail the citizen turned suspect.

In light of the broad discretion granted to government and law enforcement by the Supreme Court in the 1979 case of Smith v. Maryland, police (and those to whom the information gleaned from the cellphone was shared) could do whatever they deem “reasonable” with regard to the information obtained from the warrantless search of the cellphone.

In the case of Smith v. Maryland, the court held that “a person has no legitimate expectation of privacy in information he voluntarily turns over to third parties.”

The court in that case ruled that if someone is talking to another person by way of a medium provided by a third-party (in the Smith case it was a telephone company), both parties must expect that the “intermediary” will have access to the content of the communication.

Regarding the telephone company, the court explained that when a person uses a telephone, he “voluntarily convey[s] numerical information to the telephone company and ‘expose[s]’ that information to its equipment in the ordinary course of business.”

Not surprisingly, the Obama administration in its brief filed in the Wurie case references the Smith case. The government says Smith supports its position that there is a reduced expectation of privacy regarding the contents of a cellphone.

The upshot of Wurie is that it is just another piece of evidence of the president’s pursuit of a country where citizens are nothing but future suspects and where privacy and civil liberties are defined not by the Constitution, but by the federal government. From the NSA and Homeland Security, to the U.S. Postal Service and the IRS, the wall of protection provided by the Fourth Amendment is being demolished and the government given life by the Constitution is now on the verge of patricide.



By Howard Altman | Tribune Staff
August 20, 2013

In future natural disasters or battlefield operations, U.S. Special Operations Command (SOCOM) would like to be able to take over local AM and FM radio transmissions to broadcast its own message.

To do that, the MacDill Air Force Base headquartered command “is seeking sources to provide a radio broadcast system capable of searching for and acquiring every AM and FM radio station in a specific area and then broadcasting a message(s) in the target area on all acquired AM and FM radio station frequencies,” according a solicitation posted Monday on the Federal Business Opportunities website.

The solicitation doesn’t offer any cost estimates or timetables, nor does it include any specifics on how or when the system would be used.

But Socom spokesman Ken McGraw offered a few examples of how the system could work, both at home and abroad.

Special Operations Forces “loudspeaker teams” were used in New Orleans after Hurricane Katrina and they were used in the aftermath of Hurricane Andrew in South Florida, said McGraw, “to assist in notifying civilians in hurricane relief operations. You can look at this as one or two or three steps up from a loudspeaker team, to assist in notifying civilians in hurricane relief operations, flooding or any kind of natural disaster.”

The radio broadcast system would allow those caught in disasters to know where to get medical care, water and food, McGraw said.

Overseas, the system would fall under the Military Information Support Operations, which used to be known as Psychological Operations, and provide similar information. The military is not allowed to conduct those operations domestically.

The radio broadcast system would mostly target civilians, said McGraw, because enemy fighters aren’t generally sitting around listening to the radio.

“U.S. military commanders, when conducting operations anyplace, have an obligation to the civilian population that live in those areas,” said McGraw, “And that is why civil affairs people assist in meeting those obligations. If a commander operating in a specific area has information he wants to get out quickly to the civilian population, then using the broadcast network system that is indigenous is probably the fastest.”

MISO is one of the Defense Department’s tools in information operations, which are “the principal mechanism used during military operations to integrate, synchronize, employ and assess a wide variety of information-related capabilities in concert with other lines of operations to effect adversaries’ or potential adversaries’ decision-making while protecting our own,” according to the Department of Defense.

Socom is responsible for coordinating MISO in support of information operations, according to a May 2 Defense Department directive.

“In a war zone, MISO is providing truthful information to foreign audiences in support of U.S. military and foreign policy objectives,” said McGraw. On the battlefield, the radio system would be used “where you have a large combat operation, and civilians need to be evacuated and find medical treatment and food and water,” he said. “It would not be used for nefarious purposes.”

The radio system appears to be part of a larger Socom effort to improve its MISO capabilities through a wide range of technology. According to Socom budget documents, the command is seeking, among other capabilities, multifrequency broadcast systems; digital broadcast capabilities; remote-controlled electronic paper; near-real-time command and control of unattended MISO systems, especially in denied areas; focused/beam speaker sound technologies; visual projection technologies; advanced commercial broadcast technologies including AM and FM radio transmitters and antenna; television transmitter and antenna systems; internet and telephony dissemination and broadcast systems and “technologies capable of disseminating MISO products to reach target audiences across a wide variety of media into denied areas; and technologies that automate and improve MISO planning and analytical capability through integrated capabilities.”

For the radio system, Socom is “contemplating a Foreign Comparative Test of a light-weight, multifrequency, simultaneous over-broadcast system,” the solicitation states.

The test, according to the Defense Department, helps determine whether the items in question “satisfy U.S. military requirements or address mission area shortcomings.” The Pentagon’s Comparative Technology Office would pay for the testing and evaluation; Socom would pay for all procurements that result from a successful test.

At the moment, Socom is only looking for parties interested in providing the radio system technologies and has not even reached the request for proposal stage, according to the solicitation.



Michael Peck
Sept. 19, 2013

If you want to take over a nation, then first take over its airwaves. Broadcast your messages and interdict the enemy’s ability to broadcast theirs. When the U.S. attacked Iraq in 1991, or NATO bombed Serbia in 1999, among the first targets destroyed were TV and radio stations. When there is a military coup in Africa, the first buildings the rebels usually grab are the radio and TV studios.

So it is illuminating that the United States Special Operations Command (USSOCOM), the organization that oversees America’s elite special forces, is quietly searching for equipment that will effectively give it control over every FM and AM radio station in an area. The short, innocuous-sounding announcement on the Federal Business Opportunities site states that SOCOM seeks vendors to provide “a radio broadcast system capable of searching for and acquiring every AM and FM radio station in a specific area and then broadcasting a message(s) in the target area on all acquired AM and FM radio station frequencies.” SOCOM wants equipment that is both lightweight and sophisticated enough to detect and broadcast over multiple frequencies simultaneously. And SOCOM wants it fast. The equipment must be at least Technology Readiness Level 8, a Pentagon measure of technological maturity that means that it is fully developed, tested and ready for use.

“It appears that SOCOM is looking to purchase a preferably commercial off the shelf friendly-foreign or domestic advanced form of Software-Defined Radio (SDR) as a solution for their tactical and theater Psyops or MISO missions,” says a military expert who asked to remain anonymous. “The exact platform – whether it’s ground-based or airborne – cannot be determined from the solicitation. It would appear to be an urgent request because of the TRL 8 or above stipulation. ”

This is what the Pentagon now calls Military Information Support Operations, or MISO. This is a far less sinister name for what the rest of us call Psychological Operations, or Psyops. that subtle form of warfare that uses carefully tailored information – truthful or not – to change foreign hearts and minds in a way that furthers U.S. interests.

“MISO units have the mission to broadcast information and messages to neutral, hostile and, in certain cases, friendly audiences,” says Bryan Karabaich, a former Special Forces colonel and a consultant to the U.S. government on information operations. “Obviously, to do that, one needs to know where on the broadcast spectrum people are listening and what is being said.”

Currently, U.S. special operations forces (SOF) use a Flyaway Broadcast System (FABS), according to SOCOM spokeswoman Lt. Comm. Ligia Cohen (an example of FABS gear for natural disasters is here). However, FABS can only broadcast on a single frequency. “Historically, one got a receiver that operated on the desired spectrum and worked through the channels.  An operator would note time, signal strength and perhaps content, then move on,” Karabaich notes. “If it seemed important, another operator with another set would go directly to the frequency and monitor.  If there were multiple frequencies in use, one needed multiple sets. Then scanners came along and things speeded up.  However, one still needed multiple sets to go back to exploit the hits.  One problem was that as the scanner progressed, it wasn’t listening to other channels.  Should someone come up and broadcast after the scanner passed by, it could be several seconds or longer before it came back.”

An automated, software-based system that could scan and transmit over multiple frequencies would save time and manpower. But there is another benefit as well, and that is electronic warfare. If U.S. forces are transmitting messages over local radio frequencies, then local stations can’t broadcast their messages. And if this happens to every station in an area, then the target government’s ability to communicate with its people, such as exhorting them to fight the Americans, would be muzzled. “This system could be used to jam a frequency,” says Cohen. “During a conflict, an enemy radio station would not be able to broadcast their message at the same time. The FABS capability is required to meet combatant commanders’ need to shape foreign attitude and behavior in support of U.S. regional objectives, policies, interests, and theater military missions.”

Some might wonder whether this technology can be used inside the United States. The answer is yes. “The requirements outlined for this technology are specific to conduct operations overseas,” Cohen says. “However, in some instances and when directed, the MISO forces and equipment can be used during Civil Authority Information Support operations.  During these events, MISO equipment simply is a platform that is used to support organizations such as FEMA to disseminate information to the public regarding safety, and so on.”

Lawrence Dietz, a retired U.S. Army Reserve Colonel who participated in Psyops for 13 years and writes a Psyops blog, suggests that a mass broadcast capability would be very useful during a Katrina-like natural disaster that can transmit emergency information when civilian transmitters have been knocked out. However, he also asks whether it would make more sense to focus on mass messages to cell phones, given how people rely on them for communications. “Perhaps mobile phone ‘takeover’ technology would be in the SOCOM procurement pipeline down the road,” he writes.

However, before Uncle Sam rides roughshod over the radio spectrum, there are some limitations. Karabaich, who thinks the technology will improve U.S. Psyops capabilities, points out that one problem is power. He recalls that in the First Gulf War in 1991, U.S forces could “broadcast on Iraqi frequencies, but the Iraqi transmitters were four times larger than the biggest we had. On top of which, sand absorbs radio waves, cutting down our range and signal strength. We just couldn’t make a dent until the Iraqi transmitters were taken down.” In other words, Iraqi transmitters are so powerful that they can only be taken down by old-fashioned high explosives. And in Afghanistan, “we had cases in Afghanistan where we could hear stations operating but the position of our transmitters could not generate enough signal strength to reach the target audience on the ground.”

And just as stray Hellfire missiles from a Predator drone create collateral damage, so do errant Psyops. Karabaich remembers when a Psyops training exercise by U.S. forces in Germany spilled over from military frequencies into Swiss civilian traffic:  ”Swiss listeners were not happy that their re-broadcasts of Dallas had rock music sound tracks.”



  • The disaster drill is being described as a crisis practice unlike anything the real power grid has ever experienced.

  • The GridEX II drill Nov. 13-14, will focus primarily on how governments will react if the electrical grid fails or the food supply chain collapses!



Written by: Tara Dodrill |

August 29, 2013

Power grid vulnerabilities are finally garnering some attention by government officials.

An electrical grid joint drill simulation is being planned in the United States, Canada and Mexico. Thousands of utility workers, FBI agents, anti-terrorism experts, governmental agencies, and more than 150 private businesses are involved in the November 2013 power grid drill.

The downed power grid simulation will reportedly focus on both physical and cyber attacks. The antiquated electrical system in the United States has been one of the most neglected pieces of integral infrastructure.

The EMP Commission, created by Congress, released a report in 2008 calling for increased planning and testing, and a stockpiling of needed repair items.

The SHIELD Act, which is stalled in Congress, is the first serious piece of legislation in many years to attempt to address the vulnerabilities of the power grid in. As previously reported by Off The Grid News, a recent American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) report gave the power grid a “D+” when grading various pieces of infrastructure and public services in the United States.

The disaster drill is being described as a crisis practice unlike anything the real power grid has ever experienced. The GridEX II drill Nov. 13-14 will focus primarily on how governments will react if the electrical grid fails and, for instance, the food supply chain collapses.

American utility companies are responsible for running approximately 5,800 power plants and about 450,000 high-voltage transmission lines, controlled by various devices which have been put into place over the past decades. Some of the utility companies which oversee the power grid reportedly use “antique computer protocols” which are “probably” safe from cyber hackers,” The New York Times reported.

The Times said experts call the power grid the nation’s “glass jaw.” Even the military gets 99 percent of its power the same way everyday citizens get it – from commercially run companies.

“If an adversary lands a knockout blow, [experts] fear, it could black out vast areas of the continent for weeks; interrupt supplies of water, gasoline, diesel fuel and fresh food; shut down communications; and create disruptions of a scale that was only hinted at by Hurricane Sandy and the attacks of Sept. 11,” The Times said.

Former Federal Energy Regulatory Commission chairman Curt Hebert stated that if the nation fails at electricity, “we’re going to fail miserably” at everything else.

Hebert also noted that during prior power grid drills, the scenario assumed the system would be up and running again relatively quickly after an attack. This drill will assume it’s out much longer.

If the power grid fails, a lack of electricity and food delivery are only the first wave of troubles facing the American people. Police could face major problems with civil unrest. Of course, there also would not be any electric heating or cooling, which easily could lead to many deaths depending on the season.

A 2012 report by the National Academy of Science said terrorists could cripple the nation by damaging or destroying hard-to-replace components, some of which aren’t even made in the United States.

“Of particular concern are giant custom-built transformers that increase the voltage of electricity to levels suited for bulk transmission and then reduce voltage for distribution to customers,” The Times said in a summary of the report. “… Replacing them can take many months.”

Said Clark W. Gellings, a researcher at the Electric Power Research Institute, “I don’t think we pay quite enough attention to the technology fixes that would allow us to make the power system more resilient.”



August 16, 2013

WASHINGTON — The electric grid, as government and private experts describe it, is the glass jaw of American industry. If an adversary lands a knockout blow, they fear, it could black out vast areas of the continent for weeks; interrupt supplies of water, gasoline, diesel fuel and fresh food; shut down communications; and create disruptions of a scale that was only hinted at by Hurricane Sandy and the attacks of Sept. 11.

This is why thousands of utility workers, business executives, National Guard officers, F.B.I. antiterrorism experts and officials from government agencies in the United States, Canada and Mexico are preparing for an emergency drill in November that will simulate physical attacks and cyberattacks that could take down large sections of the power grid.

They will practice for a crisis unlike anything the real grid has ever seen, and more than 150 companies and organizations have signed up to participate.

“This is different from a hurricane that hits X, Y and Z counties in the Southeast and they have a loss of power for three or four days,” said the official in charge of the drill, Brian M. Harrell of the North American Electric Reliability Corporation, known as NERC. “We really want to go beyond that.”

One goal of the drill, called GridEx II, is to explore how governments would react as the loss of the grid crippled the supply chain for everyday necessities.

“If we fail at electricity, we’re going to fail miserably,” Curt Hébert, a former chairman of the Federal Energy Regulatory Commission, said at a recent conference held by the Bipartisan Policy Center.

Mr. Harrell said that previous exercises were based on the expectation that electricity “would be up and running relatively quick” after an attack.

Now, he said, the goal is to “educate the federal government on what their expectations should or shouldn’t be.” The industry held a smaller exercise two years ago in which 75 utilities, companies and agencies participated, but this one will be vastly expanded and will be carried out in a more anxious mood.

Most of the participants will join the exercise from their workplaces, with NERC, in Washington, announcing successive failures. One example, organizers say, is a substation break-in that officials initially think is an attempt to steal copper. But instead, the intruder uses a USB drive to upload a virus into a computer network.

The drill is part of a give-and-take in the past few years between the government and utilities that has exposed the difficulties of securing the electric system.

The grid is essential for almost everything, but it is mostly controlled by investor-owned companies or municipal or regional agencies. Ninety-nine percent of military facilities rely on commercial power, according to the White House.

The utilities play down their abilities, in comparison with the government’s. “They have the intelligence operation, the standing army, the three-letter agencies,” said Scott Aaronson, senior director of national security policy at the Edison Electric Institute, the trade association of investor-owned utilities. “We have the grid operations expertise.”

That expertise involves running 5,800 major power plants and 450,000 miles of high-voltage transmission lines, monitored and controlled by a staggering mix of devices installed over decades. Some utilities use their own antique computer protocols and are probably safe from hacking — what the industry calls “security through obscurity.”

But others rely on Windows-based control systems that are common to many industries. Some of them run on in-house networks, but computer security experts say they are not confident that all the connections to the public Internet have been discovered and secured. Many may be vulnerable to software — known as malware — that can disable the systems or destroy their ability to communicate, leaving their human operators blind about the positions of switches, the flows of current and other critical parameters. Experts say a sophisticated hacker could also damage hard-to-replace equipment.

In an effort to draw utilities and the government closer, the industry recently established the Electricity Sub-Sector Coordinating Council, made up of high-level executives, to meet with federal officials. The first session is next month.

Preparation for the November drill comes as Congress is debating laws that could impose new standards to protect the grid from cyberattacks, but many in the industry, some of whom would like such rules, doubt that they can pass.

The drill is also being planned as conferences, studies and even works of fiction are raising near-apocalyptic visions of catastrophes involving the grid.

A National Academy of Sciences report last year said that terrorists could cause broad hardship for months with physical attacks on hard-to-replace components. An emerging effort led in part by R. James Woolsey, a former director of the Central Intelligence Agency, is gearing up to pressure state legislatures to force utilities to protect equipment against an electromagnetic pulse, which could come from solar activity or be caused by small nuclear weapons exploded at low altitude, frying crucial components.

An attack using an electromagnetic pulse is laid out in extensive detail in the novel “One Second After,” published in 2009 and endorsed by Newt Gingrich. In another novel, “Gridlock,” published this summer and co-written by Byron L. Dorgan, the former senator from North Dakota, a rogue Russian agent working for Venezuela and Iran helps hackers threaten the grid. In the preface, Mr. Dorgan says such an attack could cause 10,000 times as much devastation as the terrorists’ strikes on Sept. 11, 2001.

Despite the growing anxiety, the government and the private sector have had trouble coordinating their grid protection efforts. The utility industry argues that the government has extensive information on threats but keeps it classified. Government officials concede the problem, and they have suggested that some utility executives get security clearances. But with hundreds of utilities and thousands of executives, it cannot issue such clearances fast enough. And the industry would like to be instantly warned when the government identifies Internet servers that are known to be sources of malware.

Another problem is that the electric system is so tightly integrated that a collapse in one spot, whether by error or intent, can set off a cascade, as happened in August 2003, when a power failure took a few moments to spread from Detroit to New York.

Sometimes utility engineers and law enforcement officials also seem to speak different languages. In his book “Protecting Industrial Control Systems From Electronic Threats,” Joseph Weiss, an engineer and cybersecurity expert, recounted a meeting between electrical engineers and the F.B.I. in 2008. When an F.B.I. official spoke at length about I.E.D.’s, he was referring to improvised explosive devices, but to the engineers the abbreviation meant intelligent electronic devices.

And experts fear government-sponsored hacking. Michael V. Hayden, another former C.I.A. director, speaking at the Bipartisan Policy Center conference, said that the Stuxnet virus, which disabled some of Iran’s centrifuges for enriching uranium, might invite retaliation.

“In a time of peace, someone just used a cyberweapon to destroy another nation’s critical infrastructure,” he said. “Ouch.”



The power grid as we know it is destined to fail, if you believe the authorities. Who will be there to pick up the pieces and patch it back together?

By Aaron Dykes and Melissa Melton | Truthstream
August 30, 2013

Outgoing Homeland Security chief Janet Napolitano issued an ‘open letter’ to her successor warning that a cyber or physical event that knocks out the power grid will occur – and it is not a question of “if” but “when.”

Notoriously known as “Big Sis” for her role at the Orwellian mega-agency, she claims the supposed ‘imminent’ event will pose challenges to all aspects of life, and make powering homes, providing food and facilitating transportation difficult. Napolitano seems so sure, one wonders how she knows that such a catastrophe is not only possible, but sure to happen, as she prepares to officially leave office September 6th.

ABC News reports: The outgoing Homeland Security Secretary has a warning for her successor: A massive and “serious” cyber attack on the U.S. homeland is coming, and a natural disaster — the likes of which the nation has never seen — is also likely on its way.

These are not Napolitano’s first comments on the subject; instead, they’ve been a frequent an unnerving talking point.




To that end, FBI terrorism experts – operating under the Homeland Security umbrella –  are staging a massive emergency drill dubbed GridEx II [PDF] for grid takedown scenarios in November that will include North America-wide agency officials, including those from Mexico and Canada.

Emphasizing the fear of disruption on a scale “only hinted at” by Hurricane Sandy and 9/11, these administrators and experts claim an infrastructure attack “could black out vast areas of the continent for weeks; interrupt supplies of water, gasoline, diesel fuel and fresh food; shut down communications.”

What is clear from both Hurricane Sandy, 9/11 and other events such as Hurricane Katrina is that the typical response to from governments is to soak up massive amounts of funding while hampering actual relief efforts through late and inept management of disasters. While anecdotal evidence like the FEMA office “closed due to weather” in the aftermath of Hurricane Sandy and many aspects of the delayed and deadly Hurricane Katrina response make this travesty abundantly clear, a recent GAO report has made this conclusion official.


The nation’s outdated power grid has spurned expectations that it is vulnerable, which for some experts, seems to beg an attack.

House Democrats issued a report in May 2013 claiming not only that the power grid was vulnerable to cyber attack, but that it faced threats on a daily basis. One utility cited in the report incredibly [as in, without credibility] claimed that it faced 10,000 attempts at a takedown per month.

Rep. Ed Markey, who co-authored the House Democrat’s controversial Climate Bill in 2010 – that would have taxed carbon dioxide and imposed new regulations on many aspects of ordinary life – played to the dangers, stating “With one well-placed keystroke, Americans could be plunged into darkness and chaos through the damage to our electric grid.” Markey emphasized the the threat of attack by foreign armies, adding “Foreign enemies are employing Web warriors to attack our way of life, and it’s time that our actions respond to the potential threat.”

Now, security experts are warning that bank and utilities (with power grids chief among those utilities) could be targeted for take down by Syrian or Iranian hackers in retaliation for strikes on Syria (the New York Times and Twitter take downs have already been attributed to the Syrian Electronic Army).

A story hyping the threat even quoted the dreaded former Homleand Security chief Michael Chertoff, who has profited handsomely off of post-9/11 security measures, including Rapiscan body scanners whose implementation he lobbied for as a former security official in the wake of the attempted terror attack by the Underwear Bomber patsy.

“The line between national security and private security is eroding,” said Chertoff, founder of a Washington consulting company. “It is a reasonable concern to be prepared for the possibility of some kind of retaliation — asymmetric retaliation — if we take action in Syria.”

In 2009, the NSA – embroiled in an ongoing controversy over its illegal surveillance – was granted authority over US CYBER COMMAND which monitors cyber activity and conducts offensive strikes, as well as defensive maneuvers in a globalized and electronic world.

Another possibility for taking down the grid involves Electromagnetic Pulse weapons or EMP. Boeing and the Air Force U.S. Air Force Research Laboratory successfully tested an EMP missile over Utah last year as part of the Counter-electronics High-powered Microwave Advanced Missile Project (CHAMP).


A massive power grid failure would negatively affect almost everyone, for sure. But failure is expected, and there are those, as with all disasters, who stand to benefit from it – often via contracts and construction costs.

Under this scenario, “smart grid” and “green energy” proponents who are in the process of implementing smart meters and other features of the coming new system – which will tie massive amounts of analyzable tracking data to power usage at the household and even appliance level – could indeed benefit from the rebuilding.

In fact, the current grid is considered inadequate for the needs of the designed ‘intelligent’ power grid that will facilitate two way communication and advanced monitoring, much less electric-powered vehicles.

The National Grid company website explains:


A smart grid is an “intelligent” electricity distribution network that uses two-way communications, advanced sensors and controls, advanced meters, and computers that can help reduce customers’ energy use, improve the efficiency and reliability of the electricity grid, facilitate the connection of distributed generation facilities to the system, and optimize the integration of renewable energy systems.


It also includes in-home energy management systems and intelligent controls in appliances […] We expect the Smart Grid to play an important role in reducing greenhouse gas emissions and other pollutants, especially in how it can facilitate the connection of large amounts of renewable energy—more than is possible with the current electricity distribution system.


It is also expected to be an important enabler for electric vehicles and plug-in hybrid vehicles, two promising technologies that can help dramatically reduce oil consumption. [emphasis added]


According to the Environmental Defense Fund, an environmental group whose president attended to the 2012 Bilderberg meeting, this means new investments will be needed to fund the new infrastructure. And, course, people will have to agree to the new plans:

New investments are coming: An estimated $1.5 trillion will be spent upgrading our electric grid infrastructure over the next 25 years. But how should it be spent—building ever larger versions of Edison’s machine? […]


The alternative is building a smart, “green” grid that maximizes efficiency and reduces waste.


“This country is going to spend a ton of money upgrading the grid,” says Jim Marston, EDF vice president for energy. “The question is whether we just replace the old system or create a new one open to innovative, clean technologies.” [emphasis added]


These statements and others like them make clear that for the newer, smarter grid to emerge (and allow the behaviorizing of society to accelerate), the old power grid must fall. With the widespread claims of frequent attempts at taking it down via a cyber attack, disabling these utilities would be believable enough, even if it weren’t clear who the real perpetrators were.



Drills are notoriously the perfect cover for false flag ops

Adan Salazar
Sept. 6, 2013

A multi-national terror drill is scheduled to take place in the coming months that supposedly aims to assess, test and validate vital infrastructure resources should they come under an unlikely cyberattack.

Click image to view PowerPoint PDF.

Click image to view PowerPoint PDF.

According to the New York Times, “…thousands of utility workers, business executives, National Guard officers, F.B.I. antiterrorism experts and officials from government agencies in the United States, Canada and Mexico are preparing for an emergency drill in November that will simulate physical attacks and cyberattacks that could take down large sections of the power grid.”

The various companies and organizations across North America set to take part in the drill will be able to do so from their workplaces, with the North American Electric Reliability Corporation (NERC) in Washington “announcing successive failures.”

“One example, organizers say, is a substation break-in that officials initially think is an attempt to steal copper. But instead, the intruder uses a USB drive to upload a virus into a computer network,” reports the Times.

A NERC PowerPoint presentation explains scenarios will “have far-reaching application that can exercise the plans and processes of all players,” will “feature prolonged black-out,” and says NERC will provide “several scenario workstreams for entities to select from.”

Over the past few years, the Department of Homeland Security, the CIA and others have moved to instill fears that a terrorist cyberattack could potentially wipe out power grids, crippling infrastructure and leaving hundreds of Americans without power, food, and water. These types of drills should be red flags for those who know the establishment’s problem-reaction-solution model.

In February 2010, we reported on the Bipartisan Policy Center’s “Cyber Shockwave” drill, which provided “an unprecedented look at how the government would develop a real-time response to a large-scale crisis affecting much of the nation.” A BPC promotion video insinuated that the cyber threat would likely come from China or Russia.

Last November, the National Academy of Sciences also released a report entitled “Terrorism and the Electric Power Delivery System,” detailing how“Terrorists could destroy key elements of the electricity generation and delivery system, causing blackouts that are unprecedented in this country in duration and extent,” and how “Under some circumstances (e.g. a heat wave) such blackouts could also lead to significant loss of life.”

Earlier this year, former DHS Secretary Janet Napolitano also warned that a “cyber 9/11” could happen “imminently,” that is, unless Congress passed legislation “governing cyber security so the government could share information with the private sector to prevent an attack on infrastructure, much of which is privately owned,” according to a Reuters article.

Former CIA boss Robert James Woolsey, also earlier this year, warned the House Committee on Energy and Commerce of the threats to critical infrastructures posed by an electromagnetic pulse (EMP) attack.

“Because cyber preparedness should encompass EMP preparedness – and since EMP is an

existential threat – it is imperative that Government play a supervisory and coordinating role to achieve protection against these threats swiftly,” Woolsey concluded.

Drills are notoriously the guise by which governments dismantle citizens’ rights, and have a propensity for being used as cover in the event that actual attacks occur – often perpetrated by the very governments conducting the drills (i.e. 9/11, 7/7).

Former NSA employee Charlie Miller has also gone on record stating it would be extremely difficult to pinpoint from where a cyberattack originates. “Maybe a computer from China is attacking you but really that computer is some Russian dude who’s logged into that computer,” he said. “So you can’t tell if it was Russia or China.”

Miller continued: “On the opposite side, it will make attribution really hard for your opponent because you’ll be able to attack from a thousand different places, and from all over the world and they’re not going to know who you are.”

Will November’s drill merely be an exercise testing the effectiveness of the establishment’s ability to cut off power in various areas?

Will it be used as an excuse to usher in a soft form of martial law complete with riot police and checkpoints?

Or is this just more theater justifying further government restrictions on the Internet, which Sen. Jay Rockefeller has said we might “…have been better if we had never invented…,” and which former foreign policy advisor Zbigniew Brzezinski has lamented for accelerating a global awakening and resistance to the New World Order?



Written by: Daniel Jennings

September 2, 2013

Many of America’s largest corporations now believe the electric grid is unreliable and are quietly developing the capability to operate without it.

Companies in a wide variety of industries are scrambling to produce their own energy. Retailers, technology companies, and banks now recognize the need for alternative sources of electricity.

The Bloom Box

Walmart, Google, eBay, Coca-Cola, Bank of America, FedEx, Safeway, Verizon, AT&T, Adobe, Honda, and Kaiser Permanente are among the corporate giants that have invested in the Bloom Box energy cell technology. A Bloom Box is literally a power plant in a box that uses next generation fuel cell technology to generate electricity.

Bloom Boxes don’t come cheap; each one costs around $800,000, but these companies are willing to invest in them. The companies claim they are going green or reducing pollution by purchasing such technology. What they’re also doing is ensuring that they can stay open when the electric grid goes down.

The interest in the Bloom Box indicates that these companies’ executives think that the electric grid is not dependable. Wal-Mart and Safeway want to keep their refrigerators and their cash registers running. Google wants to keep providing Internet even if the lights go out.

Companies Embracing Solar, Too

The Bloom Box is only the tip of the iceberg when it comes to corporate efforts to have dependable power. IKEA has purchased 500,000 solar panels as part of an effort to produce 70 percent of its own electricity.

Walmart plans to put solar panels on 75 percent of its stores in California, a state with a notoriously unreliable electric grid. The company has made a deal with Elon Musk’s company Solar City to buy the panels.

Walmart claims it is motivated by concern for the environment, but we all know that the real “green” Walmart is interested in is money. The businesspeople that run Walmart wouldn’t be making a major investment in “alternative energy” if they didn’t think they might need it.

Grid Is No Longer Reliable

It is easy to see why corporations are looking into alternatives.

The Washington Post reported that the electric grid is pricier and less reliable. The number of power outages that affected more than 500,000 people in the United States more than doubled between 2004 and 2009, The Post’s Wonkblog noted.

The length of blackouts has also increased by around 20 percent in the last decade, Off The Grid News previously reported. Large companies simply can no longer afford to depend on the grid, so they are investing in the resources needed to generate their own power.

In August, the American Society of Civil Engineers graded America’s power grid a D+, Off The Grid News reported. The rating means the energy infrastructure is in “poor to fair condition and mostly below standard, with many elements approaching the end of their service life.” It further means a “large portion of the system exhibits significant deterioration” with a “strong risk of failure.”

Learn from Walmart and Google

Families and individuals need to consider generating their own electricity for their homes and small businesses. Whether you are a freelancer who depends on a computer or the operator of a small machine shop, you need electricity. Big business’s investment in alternate technologies indicates the grid may no longer be a reliable source of electricity.

Every family and small business owner needs to start looking into solar panels, fuel cells, wind technology, and other means of generating electricity. That way they can keep operating if and when the grid goes down, just like Walmart and Google intend to do. Self-sufficiency in electricity is no longer just green; it is now imperative for economic survival.



September 12, 2013

DETROIT (WWJ) – A major power outage is affecting Wayne State University, the Frank Murphy Hall of Justice, the City-County building, the Detroit Historical Museum, and the People Mover in downtown and Midtown Detroit.

“Some institutional public lighting customers are experiencing service interruption caused by extreme heat, cable failure, and routine maintenance — all combining causing system overload,” said Robert Warfield, a spokesman for the Detroit Mayor’s Office.

Wayne State spokesperson Jessica Archer said the campus would be closed for the rest of the day, Wednesday, after about half of all buildings — maybe 40 or 50 — lost power.  She said they would decide later about Thursday’s schedule.

Passengers aboard the People Mover were directed off at the nearest station. The People Mover is closed until further notice.

At City Hall, EMS crews were called out to help a pregnant woman on the 4th floor after an evacuation forced people to walk down the stairs to safety.  Officials said she’d doing fine.

“We made sure that there was somebody was with every person that was stuck on the floors until we could get them down, said Detroit Fire Chief Gene Biondo. ”When I found out that she was eight months pregnant, I said we’ve gotta get her out of there first.”

Biondo said they were able to get power restored to the building briefly through an emergency system to get that woman and two others down on elevators.

Courtrooms at the Frank Murphy Hall of Justice were evacuated and proceedings in a high-profile Grosse Pointe Park murder case were delayed.

“… The courtroom was plunged into darkness,” reported WWJ’s Marie Osborne. “A few very scary moments as deputies tried to make their way to their prisoner, Bob Bashara. Within seconds, though, the generator kicked on, and there was a bit of light.”

Presiding judge Kenneth King said continuing problems with the city’s aging electrical grid are a huge security concern.

“That’s a whole different dimension in very scary proposition,” King said. “Now, because we can’t use the elevator, the deputy sheriffs have to escort the prisoners down a dark stairway.”

“Given what happened just a few days ago, it’s not a good situation,” King added, referring to an incident during which a prisoner, being moved into a holding cell at the courthouse, stabbed a deputy with a makeshift knife and fled.

The lights went out at around 1 p.m. Warfield said he hoped power would be restored to all affected buildings sometime Wednesday night.

“The Public Lighting Department is asking customers, once power is restored, to only turn on lights …. not to use air conditioners or other non-essential appliances,” Warfield said.

A DTE Energy spokesman said, although it’s not a DTE problem, DTE crews are assisting the city in working to decrease load on the system to avoid more outages.

DTE said full restoration in the city could take up to 24 hours.

There were no reports of power problems at downtown hospitals.



Mac Slavo

If you think that our multi-billion dollar electrical power grids are secure and capable of withstanding a coordinated attack, think again.

According to one group of engineers, the grid is so vulnerable that it wouldn’t even require a skilled hacker to compromise. In fact, when Adam Crain and Chris Sistrunk decided to test some new software they were developing they identified a vulnerability so serious that it could literally blind operational controllers to such an extent that they would be locked out of monitoring systems and unable to maintain grid integrity.

The consequences, according to the engineers who note they are in no way security specialists, could be a total downing of the national power grid with nodes across the nation being taken over all at once. Moreover, the same systems used to maintain the U.S. power grid are also being used in other industries, like water treatment facilities.

You’d think that such a vulnerability would be a top priority for the Department of Homeland Security, considering they are spending millions of dollars and promoting their coming Grid Ex exercise in November.

But you’d be wrong. The kicker is that when Crain and Sistrunk advised the DHS Industrial Control Systems Cyber Emergency Response Team, they got what essentially amounts to no response. It took Homeland Security a full four months before they even acknowledged the problem.

The two engineers who discovered the vulnerability say little is being done.

Adam Crain and Chris Sistrunk do not specialize in security. The engineers say they hardly qualify as security researchers. But seven months ago, Mr. Crain wrote software to look for defects in an open-source software program.

The program targeted a very specific communications protocol called DNP3, which is predominantly used by electric and water companies, and plays a crucial role in so-called S.C.A.D.A. (supervisory control and data acquisition) systems. Utility companies use S.C.A.D.A. systems to monitor far-flung power stations from a control center, in part because it allows them to remotely diagnose problems rather than wait for a technician to physically drive out to a station and fix it.

Mr. Crain ran his security test on his open-source DNP3 program and didn’t find anything wrong. Frustrated, he tested a third-party vendor’s program to make sure his software was working. The first program he targeted belonged to Triangle MicroWorks, a Raleigh, North Carolina based company that sells source code to large vendors of S.C.A.D.A. systems.

It broke instantly.

“When Adam told me he broke Triangle, I worried everything else was broken,” said Mr. Sistrunk.

Over the course of one week last April, the two tested Mr. Crain’s software across 16 vendors’ systems. They did not find a single system they couldn’t break.

By the end of the week, the two had compiled a 20-page report replete with vulnerabilities in 16 different system vendors for the Department of Homeland Security’s Industrial Control Systems Cyber Emergency Response Team, I.C.S.-C.E.R.T., which notifies vendors of vulnerabilities and issues public advisories.

And then, they waited. It would take I.C.S.-C.E.R.T. another four months to issue a public advisory for Triangle MicroWorks’ system.

D.H.S. did not return a request for comment.

Mr. Crain found that he could actually infiltrate a power station’s control center from afar. An attacker could use that capability to insert malware to take over the system, and like Stuxnet, the computer worm that took out 20 percent of Iran’s centrifuges, inflict actual physical harm.

“This is low-hanging fruit,” said Mr. Crain. “It doesn’t require some kind of hacker mastermind to understand the protocol and do this.”

What makes the vulnerabilities particularly troubling, experts say, is that traditional firewalls are ill-equipped to stop them. “When the master crashes it can no longer monitor or control any and all of the substations,” said Dale Peterson, a former N.S.A. employee who founded Digital Bond, a security firm that focuses on infrastructure.

“There is no way to stop this with a firewall and other perimeter security device today.”

The New York Times

When outgoing DHS head Janet Napolitano suggested that a cyber attack on the nation’s power grid is imminent, she meant it.

They know that these systems are vulnerable, and the steps needed to protect the grid from cyber attacks and other potential hazards like a Super EMP or a severe geo-magnetic event would cost in the multiple billions of dollars to fix.

The fact of the matter is that DHS and the vendors who produce these software control systems are dragging their feet, leaving the entire country vulnerable.

Crain and Sistrunk are not hackers or security experts. They are software engineers and they were able to compromise our entire national power grid and water utility systems from remote locations.

What do you think China, Russia, and rogue hackers are capable of doing?

If you don’t think they’ve mapped our entire grid and its vulnerabilities you are kidding yourself.

This is deadly serious.

And when we say deadly, we mean it, because according to a report from the Center for Security Policy presented to Congress in 2010, if our power grid were to be taken offline for an extended period of time, 9 out of 10 Americans would be dead within a year.

There would be no way to transport food because gas stations pumps would be inoperable. And even if they did work, the commerce systems which makes the exchange of goods possible would be offline. Couple that with water utilities not functioning due to lack of electricity, and we’re talking about a worst-case scenario so bad that this country may never recover.

Former Congressman Roscoe Bartlet has urged those who can to move out of major cities for this reason.




Power Outage


You awaken to a deafening silence; the bedside clock is blank, no hum of the air conditioner and no traffic noises. The silence, is unlike any you have ever heard before. Habit makes you reach for the coffee as you enter the kitchen and you have the filter basket full of grounds before it sinks in you have no power.

You grab the cell phone and it’s off. Pushing buttons, removing and replacing the battery has no affect. You are shut off from the world. The inside of the refrigerator is damp and has that peculiar smell that only the insides of refrigerators have, when they are warm. Condensation is dripping off of everything.

The power goes out from time to time and it will only be a few hours, you convince yourself, and yet something nags at the back of your mind. When the power has gone out in the past people still raced back and forth along the US highway that is a quarter mile from your house. Whether the traffic lights work or not traffic always moves along the highway.

You picked this house because it’s remote and yet you found that even at a quarter of a mile away you could always hear traffic. The nearest neighbor is two miles north. Now you feel the need to talk to someone, anyone, and it has only been a few hours.

It just dawns on you that you are trapped as your car is in the garage and the overhead door is electric. You have no idea how to open it, all you know is it cannot be operated by hand. Something must be done first is all you know, and what that is, is a mystery, something about springs, disconnect levers and balance and tracks. You did not pay any attention when they installed it; now you feel trapped, and it is quiet outside.

Two Hours Later

You need coffee so you fire up the gas grill and just as the pot of water you filled from water bottles is beginning to bubble, you run out of propane. The kitchen faucet, when you open it, delivers a hiss of air and the rest of them give up nothing. You pour the hot water through the filter of coffee grounds as it rests in the machine and let it slowly drip into the pot. It’s a slow process, the coffee took an hour to make and it’s horrid.

Now you begin to worry about the lack of electricity. You are not sure how long it has been out because it went out while you were sleeping. Not normally a breakfast eater, you are now hungry and you have no way to make anything.

Fear of the Unknown

Was there another 911 type of attack, who hates us today? No storms, not any flooding or high winds that you could see, so what happened? You had heard somewhere that the power grid could be shut down by remote control or some such thing, and some people even have devices that could destroy all of the electronic components by some type of electrical pulse. You were never one to give into the propaganda about doomsday or the Mayan calendar; however, now you are getting worried because it has been close to five hours and it’s getting hot inside the house.

Dusk the First Day

You pace around for hours munching on whatever you can find. You pull every drawer out but cannot find a manual can opener, and stabbing the top of a can of soup with the butcher knife almost cost you a finger. Warm and soggy celery and carrots with some sliced cheese is all you have that does not require opening a can or cooking.

You drink at least three bottles of water out of nervousness before you realize you need to slow down, what if the power and water never come back on. It has been 12 hours and you feel panic welling up.

You do not dare use the bathroom all day because what if it doesn’t flush, so like a criminal you slink around outside looking for a spot because between the water and being nervous you need to go and often.


You rifle through all the drawers and cabinets looking for candles, and you find several along with some obviously ornamental ones that you have no idea where you got them or if someone gave them to you. They’re lit and on the kitchen table and you’re not just hungry you are starving, and someone has stolen your hand operated can opener, obviously this has to be the case because who doesn’t have one of these around the house.

You find a screwdriver and manage to stab a hole in a can of soup big enough to pour the contents into a bowl. Cold soup isn’t the greatest but it helps quell the panic you keep feeling.

You smell sour from nervous sweat and you constantly rub your hands on your pant legs, you want to wash them but do not dare waste any water. You feel trapped and it’s dark outside.

Middle of the Night 

The heat is unbearable and the open windows make you more nervous so you pace back and forth and then you flop on the couch. For some reason you don’t want to get undressed and climb into bed. You have the feeling of something; something’s on the verge of happening. The candles smell and they don’t give off much light and you don’t want to fall asleep with them lit, so you are constantly blowing them out and re-lighting them until you realize you might run out of matches.

Outside on the deck isn’t much of a relief because the bugs and mosquitoes swarm around you making it impossible to stay out long enough to catch a breeze. Your stomach is protesting and you decide that first thing in the morning you will figure out how to make a fire and heat some food, surely there is some wood that could be used laying about the property.


Twenty-four hours have passed and it feels like a week. Your teeth are fuzzy and your eyes have a gritty feeling, your clothes feel damp and you smell. There’s no helping it, a bottle of water has to be used to brush your teeth and then food is next.

You change out of your clothes and after that with clean teeth, you feel well, so it’s time to start thinking instead of reacting. You venture into the garage to see if you can figure out how to get the door to open and then realize the radio in the car probably still works and you need information.

The battery is dead, there are obviously no dome lights, no radio, no power at all.

You give up on the door, because what’s the use now and you even have thoughts of crashing through with the car, but that was not happening as the car won’t even start. Instead, you grab your mountain bike and maneuver it to the front door. If nothing else, you can always ride to the neighbors’ house but first you must start a fire.

It always looked easy on television when the experts toss a match down or strike a couple of rocks together to engulf a pile of wood into flames. The pile you have isn’t very big, but once you have it going you’ll explore further into the woods for bigger pieces of wood. Some old newspaper and six matches later you have a small fire going just off the back deck.

You gather up a small stainless steel pot, fill it with soup and some soggy carrots and add the rest of the celery, and set it near the flames, it’s not gourmet but edible. Most of the food in the refrigerator has ruined and you spend over an hour digging a pit deep enough to dump the spoiled food in, which smells so bad it almost ruins your appetite.

You have five matches left, so it seems you have to keep the fire going and what happens if it rains. The next two hours after you gulp down three cans of soup are spent wondering what to do next.

Realistic or Not

This is what many will experience if they awaken one day and the power, water, gas and other services are stopped. The utilities interruption and the fact the individuals vehicle didn’t work were caused by an Electromagnetic Pulse (EMP). The possibility of this happening is getting more realistic every day for those who do not believe this can happen.

There are an untold number of nuclear weapons unaccounted for in the world today, and a surface or atmospheric detonation of a nuclear device can cause an EMP, whether that was the intent of the detonation or not.

The feelings of panic and frustration that the individual felt are real and anyone in that position will feel them. People like to know what is going to happen so they can prepare for it, but in today’s world preparedness must be a state that is maintained at all times. Always be prepared, do not wait until you think something will happen, or until an alert is issued. Anything can happen to anyone, at anytime, without any warning.

Between 36 and 48 hours either things will completely unravel or you can wake up, grab a hold of yourself and start surviving. The individual in the scenario described had the typical 48 to 72 hours worth of supplies such as canned food and bottled water on hand.

Once you realize you cannot eat you become hungry and once you understand there is no more water you become thirsty, these are real feelings and you will experience them in the same situation. The old saying goes, “you never miss the water until the well runs dry” definitely does apply to emergencies.

The individual had no way of communicating with others. The concept of an EMP was foreign to them, and something they’d only seen on the Science Channel. They would never have guessed it could be the reason for such an interruption, nor would they have known how to prepare for such an event.

Identifying any and all possible threats ahead of time and knowing in advance, how to prepare for them is extremely important. In the case of an EMP attack, they would have known to shield any electronics, such as radios and flashlights, prior to it taking place. Knowledge, skills sets and the belief it can happen will save your life some day.



by Daisy Luther
The Organic Prepper

September 23rd, 2013

If you haven’t been in a bubble cut off from all forms of media lately, it would be impossible to have missed all of the warnings being issued about the impending loss of our electrical grid.

This isn’t just coming from so-called “gloom and doom” sites or from alternative media.  Major mainstream media sources such as ABC News, the Washington Post, the New York Times, and CBS News have all issued the alerts. Unfortunately, the hordes seem to be brushing these warnings off as something that cannot happen, because the reality is too unpleasant to even contemplate.  Many seem to think that they are far better to stick their heads in the sand and be assured it can never happen than to prepare ahead of time.

Who Is Ringing the Warning Bell?

In case you’ve missed it, here are some of the warnings over the past few months that most people are ignoring.

When Janet Napolitano stepped down from her role as head of the DHS she released an open letter to her successor.  One chilling tidbit she passed on was this.

The outgoing Homeland Security Secretary has a warning for her successor: A massive and “serious” cyber attack on the U.S. homeland is coming, and a natural disaster — the likes of which the nation has never seen — is also likely on its way. (source)

Read more on Napolitano’s warning HERE.

But there’s more.  Big Sis isn’t the only one warning us about the possibility of a grid-down scenario.

Former North Dakota Senator Byron Dorgan has co-authored a book about the topic with David Hagberg – his novel Gridlock is a fictional account of a very real threat.

“Our power system is very vulnerable. You could see a shutdown by hackers in cyber terror. You could see it shutdown for days, weeks or months, crippling this country and causing enormous havoc.” (source)

Rep. Ed Markey (D-Mass.) also actively agrees with the threat assessment.  He released a report last May that said our power infrastructure was “highly vulnerable to attacks from Iran and North Korea” and as well as to natural threats such as geomagnetic storms from solar activity.

“With one well-placed keystroke, Americans could be plunged into darkness and chaos through the damage to our electric grid. Foreign enemies are employing Web warriors to attack our way of life, and it’s time that our actions respond to the potential threat.” (source)

Other people in the know have attempted to make the public aware of the potential for apocalyptic disaster, but few seem to be taking them seriously.

We are only one act of madness away from a social cataclysm unlike anything our country has ever known.
-Congressman Trent Franks (R-AZ), Senior Member House Armed Service Committee

EMP is one of the small number of threats that could hold at risk the continued existence of U.S. civil society.
-Dr. Robert Hermann, Commissioner US Congress EMP Commission

Just one violent active region on the sun can cause continent-wide, perhaps even planetary-scale impacts to our critical infrastructure.
-John Kappenman, Principal Investigator US Congress EMP Commission

The Likelihood of a severe geo-magnetic event capable of crippling our electric grid is 100%.
-Congresswoman Yvette Clarke (D-NY), Senior Member House Homeland Security Committee


Former Congressman Roscoe Bartlett has been preaching the dangers of EMP, whether deliberate or natural, for many years:

We could have events in the future where the power grid will go down and it’s not, in any reasonable time, coming back up. For instance, if when the power grid went down some of our large transformers were destroyed, damaged beyond use, we don’t make any of those in this country. They’re made overseas and you order one and 18 months to two years later they will deliver it. Our power grid is very vulnerable. It’s very much on edge. Our military knows that.

There are a number of events that could create a situation in the cities where civil unrest would be a very high probability.

I think that those who can, and those who understand, need to take advantage of the opportunity when these winds of strife are not blowing to move their families out of the city. (source)

Don’t forget the veiled warnings implicit in predictive programming entertainment.  One of last year’s biggest television hits was the show “Revolution“, which portrayed life 15 years after a deliberate takedown of the power grid.

Grid Ex Drill in November

And finally, if all of these warnings aren’t enough to alert your Spidey senses, here is one that is undeniable.

The United States, Mexico, and Canada intend to participate in a drill in November that will simulate the takedown of the grid.

An electrical grid joint drill simulation is being planned in the United States, Canada and Mexico. Thousands of utility workers, FBI agents, anti-terrorism experts, governmental agencies, and more than 150 private businesses are involved in the November power grid drill.

The downed power grid simulation will reportedly focus on both physical and cyber attacks. The antiquated electrical system in the United States has been one of the most neglected pieces of integral infrastructure.

The disaster drill is being described as a crisis practice unlike anything the real power grid has ever experienced. The GridEX II drill Nov. 13-14 will focus primarily on how governments will react if the electrical grid fails and, for instance, the food supply chain collapses.

American utility companies are responsible for running approximately 5,800 power plants and about 450,000 high-voltage transmission lines, controlled by various devices which have been put into place over the past decades. Some of the utility companies which oversee the power grid reportedly use “antique computer protocols” which are “probably” safe from cyber hackers,” The New York Times reported.

“If an adversary lands a knockout blow, [experts] fear, it could black out vast areas of the continent for weeks; interrupt supplies of water, gasoline, diesel fuel and fresh food; shut down communications; and create disruptions of a scale that was only hinted at by Hurricane Sandy and the attacks of Sept. 11,” The Times said.

If the power grid fails, a lack of electricity and food delivery are only the first wave of troubles facing the American people. Police could face major problems with civil unrest. Of course, there also would not be any electric heating or cooling, which easily could lead to many deaths depending on the season. (source)

The most alarming thing about this drill is the trend of suspected false flag events in America that have corresponded with “drills”.  Whether or not this will coincide in a real take-down of the grid remains to be seen, but one only needs to think back to events such as the Boston Marathon Bombing, the 9/11 attacks, and the Oklahoma City Bombing to see that there is a possibility that when “drills” occur, often the players are simply being moved into place right under the nose of the public.

What Can You Do to Be Ready?

It doesn’t honestly matter HOW the grid goes down. Whether it is an enemy attack, as in the novel One Second After, a government false flag in order to institute martial law, or a natural act that is the result of a solar flare, a long-term grid collapse will result in an extremely high death toll.

If you are already of the preparedness mindset, you’ll fare better than the average North American.  However, many people have never contemplated the following questions:

  • How will you get food if the grocery stores are closed?
  • How will you cook food if you are able to acquire it?
  • What will happen to the perishable food in your refrigerator and freezer?
  • How will you heat and cool your home if you are in an area subject to extreme temperatures?
  • What will you use for light once the scented candle that sits on your coffee table is gone?
  • How will you transport yourself if a) your vehicle doesn’t run because the computers are fried or b) it runs but you can’t get gas because the pumps at the station run on electricity?
  • What will you drink and wash with if the municipal water facilities are no longer providing water or if the pump on your well runs on electricity?

Find as many solutions as possible for the issues you would face if going for weeks (or longer) without power.  You must stay warm, eat, and drink.  Everything else is a bonus. You can live without the television, the video game console, the microwave in the kitchen, and the laptop.

Some people like to give arguments as to why they can’t resolve these issues.  They live in an apartment, they rent, they have a limited budget….the list is as long as indefinite detention.  The fact is, by realizing these things are necessary and refusing to face them and find solutions for your particular situation, you are setting your family up to suffer, and possibly even die, when it could be avoided.

A recent article encouraged readers who were new to prepping to start out by getting ready for a two week power outage.  Apply the following  information to create your own preparedness plan for the grid failure that is sure to come. Modify the suggestions to adapt them to your particular home, family, and climate.


Everyone knows that clean drinking water is something you can’t live without. In the event of a disaster, the water may not run from the taps, and if it does, it might not be safe to drink, depending on the situation.  If there is a boil order in place, remember that if the power is out, boiling your water may not be as easy as turning on your stove.

Each family should store a two week supply of water. The rule of thumb for drinking water is 1 gallon per day, per person.  Don’t forget to stock water for your pets, also.

You can create your water supply very inexpensively.  Many people use clean 2 liter soda pop bottles to store tap water.  Others purchase the large 5 gallon jugs of filtered water from the grocery store.  Consider a gravity fed water filtration device and water purification tablets as well.

Food and a Way to Prepare It

There are two schools of thought regarding food during a power outage.  One: you need a cooking method that does not require the grid to be functioning.  Two: you can store food that doesn’t require cooking.

If you opt for a secondary cooking method, be sure that you have enough fuel for two weeks.  Store foods that do not require long cooking times – for example, dried beans would use a great deal of fuel, but canned beans could be warmed up, or even eaten cold.

Click HERE for a short term food storage list

Click HERE to find a list of foods that require no cooking.

Heat (Depending on Your Climate)

If your power outage takes place in the winter and you live in a colder climate, heat is another necessity.  During the first 24 hours after a power outage, you can stay fairly warm if you block off one room of the house for everyone to group together in.  Keep the door closed and keep a towel or blanket folded along the bottom of the door to conserve warmth.  You can safely burn a couple of candles also, and in the enclosed space, your body heat will keep it relatively warm.  As well, dress in layers and keep everything covered – wear a hat, gloves (fingerless ones allow you to still function), and a scarf.

Click HERE to learn how to stay warm with less heat.

However, after about 48 hours, that’s not going to be enough in very cold weather. You will require back-up heat at this point in certain climates.  If you are lucky enough to have a source of heat like a fireplace or woodstove, you’ll be just fine as long as you have a supply of wood.

Consider a portable propane heater (and propane) or an oil heater.  You have to be very careful what type of backup heat you plan on using, as many of them can cause carbon monoxide poisoning if used in a poorly ventilated area.

Learn more about off-grid heat options HERE.

Sanitation Needs

A common cause of illness, and even death, during a down-grid situation is lack of sanitation.  We’ve discussed the importance of clean drinking water, but you won’t want to use your drinking water to keep things clean or to flush the toilet.

For cleaning, reduce your need to wash things. Stock up on paper plates, paper towels, and disposable cups and flatware.  Keep some disinfecting cleaning wipes and sprays (I don’t recommend using antibacterial products on a regular basis, however in the event of an emergency they can help to keep you healthy.)  Use hand sanitizer after using the bathroom and before handing food or beverages – there may be a lot more germs afoot in a disaster.

Look at your options for sanitation.  Does your toilet still flush when the electricity is out?  Many people discovered the hard way that the toilets didn’t work  when the sewage backed up in the highrises in New York City in the aftermath of Hurricane Sandy.  At our cabin, the toilet won’t flush without power because the pump is electric.

If you are on a septic system, with no risk of the toilet backing up into the house, simply store some water for flushing in the bathroom.  (At the first sign of a storm, we always fill the bathtub for this purpose.)  Add the water to the tank so that you can flush.

If this is not an option, another solution is to stock up on extremely heavy duty garbage bags (like the kind that contractors use at construction sites) and kitty litter.  Place a bag either in your drained toilet or in a bucket.  Sprinkle some kitty litter in the bottom of the bag.  Each time someone uses the bathroom, add another handful of litter. Be very careful that the bag doesn’t get too heavy for you to handle it.  Tie it up very securely and store it outside until services are restored.


Lighting is absolutely vital, especially if there are children in the house.  Nothing is more frightening than being completely in the dark during a stressful situation. Fortunately, it’s one of the easiest things to plan for, as well as one of the least expensive.

Some lighting solutions are:

  • Garden stake solar lights
  • Candles
  • Kerosene lamps
  • Flashlights (don’t forget batteries)
  • Hand crank camping lantern
  • Don’t forget matches or lighters

Tools and Supplies

Some basic items will make your life much easier during an emergency. Here are some things that are essential in the event of a power outage:

  • Lighter/waterproof matches
  • Batteries in various sizes
  • Manual can opener
  • Basic tools: Pliers, screwdriver, wrench, hammer
  • Duct tape
  • Crazy glue
  • Sewing supplies
  • Bungee cords

If you’d like to expand on the basic supplies, a more detailed list of tools and hardware can be found HERE.

First Aid Kit

It’s important to have a basic first aid kit on hand at all times, but particularly in the event of an emergency.  Your kit should include basic wound care items like bandages, antibiotic ointments, and sprays.  As well, if you use them, keep on hand a supply of basic over-the-counter medications, like pain relief capsules, cold medicine, cough syrup, anti-nausea pills, and allergy medication. Particularly important if sanitation is a problem are anti-diarheal medications.

If you want to put together a more advanced medical kit, you can find a list HERE.

Special Needs

This is something that will be unique to every family. Consider the things that are needed on a daily basis in your household. It might be prescription medications, diapers, or special foods.  If you have pets, you’ll need supplies for them too.  The best way to figure out what you need is to jot things down as you use them over the course of a week or so.

Get Started Today

You can start right now – this very minute – all you have to do is grab a pad of paper and a pen.

  1. Begin by personalizing the suggestions above to fit your family’s needs and make a list of your requirements.
  2. Next, do a quick inventory – as I mentioned above, you may be surprised to see that you already have quite a few of the supplies that are recommended.
  3. Make a shopping list and acquire the rest of the items you need.  If you can’t afford everything right now, prioritize the most important things first.
  4. Organize your supplies so that they are easily accessible when you need them. It’s hard to find seldom-used items in the dark.

When the lights go out, don’t be left to the not-so-tender mercies of those who would place themselves in charge.  Maintain your independence by strengthening the position of your family.  Take steps towards preparedness and self-sufficiency so  that you won’t need the government’s assistance to weather the storm.

If you must comply to survive, your freedom is just an illusion. You’ve been warned – what you do with the information is up to you.



by Timothy Gardner and Mark Hosenball; Editing by Eric Beech and Eric Walsh |

WASHINGTON (Reuters) – U.S. officials have warned energy companies to be on the alert for “potential terrorist activities” at fuel storage plants but there were no immediate threats, an oil industry group told members on Friday.

The Petroleum Marketers Association of America told members the Federal Bureau of Investigation “is concerned about terrorists attempting to purchase or steal fuel from a bulk plant to use in a weapon of mass destruction.”

The PMAA said it sent members a message on Friday after the FBI handed out the warning at an energy conference last week ahead of the anniversary of the 9/11 attacks on New York and Washington.

The FBI had no immediate comment.

The PMAA message to members said the FBI warned fuel marketers should be on alert for new customers who are not from the area, drivers who are not familiar with truck or vehicle operations, and people who store fuel in unusual locations or containers.

A PMAA official said the FBI wrote the alert last year. “It is not for any recent activity just a list red flags to alert bulk plant operators of suspicious activity,” the official said.

A senior law enforcement official in the New York area said he was unaware of any alert or any threat to oil storage plants. A senior national security officer said he was not aware of any “acute alert” related to fuel storage facilities.



By: Jacob Goodwin |
September 3, 2013

In an effort to monitor the reported outbreaks of infectious diseases worldwide, the DHS office of health affairs plans to contract with a small business to provide a “real-time data feed,” drawn from at least 25,000 online sources, on a 24/7 basis, with its content updated at least hourly.

The data feed, which would be delivered in an email or RSS format, would give the U.S. Government the right to share the information inside the government, as well as outside the government “for U.S. Government purposes,” says a small business set-aside solicitation that was issued by DHS on September 3.

“Through management of the Department’s operational biodefense programs, including the National Biosurveillance Integration Center (NBIC), [the office of health affairs] conducts biosurveillance activities to enable early warning and situational awareness of acute biological events and support better decisions through rapid identification, characterization, localization, and tracking,” explains the solicitation.

The real-time data feed would be based on “publicly available reported information,” would originate in material published in at least five different languages (English, Spanish, French, Russian and Chinese), and be translated into English.

The information presented in the data feed would include the specific disease, location, time stamp of the original publication and details of the event derived from the original reporting source.

The Office of Health Affairs is envisioning a contract with a one-year base period plus a one-year option period, says the solicitation. Prospective vendors are required to respond to DHS by September 13.



by Dave Hodges |

September, 8, 2013

It is being reported in multiple locations that Dyess Air Force Base in West Texas conducted an unauthorized nuclear weapons transfer. There was no signature required for the transfer and it was totally off the books, thus, making this a black ops activity.

On the same day of transfer, Senator Lindsay Graham (R-SC), stated that if the United States did not immediately go to war with with Syria, Charleston Harbor would be nuked.

One of the reasons my show is called The Common Sense Show is that we like to use our heads when analyzing news events. Let’s take a moment and review the illogical statements by Lindsey Graham where he links the missing nukes with Syria launching a preemptive strike on South Carolina’s Charleston Harbor:

1) What does moving a nuke to South Carolina have to do with going to war with Syria? Did the Syrians steal the Nuke from West Texas? Are we being asked to believe that the nuke was handed over to the Syrians? This is completely illogical.

2) Senator Graham has said that we must stop the development of Iran’s nuclear weapons program to prevent his state from being nuked. What in the world does Iran’s nuclear weapons program have to with moving nukes from Texas to South Carolina? These globalist clowns can’t even event a plausible cover story to justify what they’re really up to.

In addition to the November 13th blackout drill being conducted by DHS, we believe there will be a nuclear strike on an American city in which Syria and Iran will be blamed, similar to 9/11, the 7/7 bombings and the Boston Marathon bombing. The unauthorized transfer of a nuclear weapons from Texas to South Carolina speaks loudly to this fact.

However, I want to make it clear that for over a year I have stated that Chicago would be the site of a nuclear event and you can read about it here.

It is clear now that the globalists are planning to attack the United States on multiple fronts:

  • Grid take down drill on November 13-14, 2013
  • The goal of the 11/13 blackout will be to shut down the banking system, devalue the dollar, confiscate accounts, and perhaps usher in a new currency
  • A possible nuclear event in South Carolina as per Senator Graham
  • A monumental terrorist event in Chicago to usher in martial law in the United States

It is clear that the globalists are going for broke because there are two dates that quickly coming into play. First, the 50th anniversary (11/22) of the JFK Assassination, and all the accompanying attention brought to the event in the alternative media, will wake up untold numbers of people below the age of 40, many of whom will see the truth on who is running this country for the first time. Secondly, the 100 year charter of the Federal Reserve is set to expire. The Federal Reserve is the organization that about 65% of the country believes is Federal and does a good job managing our money when, in effect, they have personally stolen almost 97% of the value of the dollar over the last century. When the Federal Reserve’s anniversary date rolls around, the globalists cannot afford to have the attention that the alternative media will bring to this criminal organization. Millions will come to see our fiat money system for what it is, a Ponzi scheme of the highest order.

There is a clear reason why the blackout drill and the subsequent take down of the banks will occur on 11/13, nine days before the JFK assassination and 40 days before the Fed anniversary. Simply put, the globalists cannot afford top provide the 10% who are awake to posses the ammunition necessary to wake up another 50% of the country. Therefore, a massive strike against the people must be launched with extreme vengeance prior to the so-called Great Awakening coming in November/December.

Again, by calling attention to these intentions we can likely push these events back and may even force the globalists to abandon this particular course of action.

I want to give credit to Alex Jones for being at the forefront of this exposure of the missing nukes. Below is the link to a very good synopsis of the missing nuke incident as Alex’s staff does an excellent job connecting the dots.

The time to prepare to depend on only yourself is now and make certain that you possess the means to protect your assets.





by Dave Hodges |
September 8, 2013

As November 13th approaches, it is my sincere hope that America can place so much attention on the “terror attack drill” on our power grid, that is causes the globalists to delay their plans to create a false flag event during the drill.

Not only does the potential exist for a false flag terrorist drill on 11/13 which could result in a collapse of the power grid, I think it is likely that that a more sinister false flag attack will be hidden within the overt event of a major power blackout across this country. Specifically, I am speaking about a banking collapse in which the effects of the event are not immediately felt given the chaos in the period immediately following the grid collapse. An economic collapse is coming and the banks have been preparing for this for over a year.

This article is not written for the novice who is just waking up.  It is written for my colleagues and those that fully understand how high the stakes truly are. It is likely that we have reached the end of the road as far as the Republic is concerned and I believe that the following paragraphs accurately describe how this is going to be accomplished.

The Petrodollar Is In Trouble

The globalists have made no secret of the fact that they seek to introduce a global currency to the world. However, that time has not yet come for the roll out of a global currency because the United States military is not done being used as the world’s policeman for the global elite as they are still attempting to consolidate their personal power and control in such places as the Middle East.

Therefore, in the interim, the Petrodollar must be preserved because without a sound dollar, the US military will be limited in its ability to impose the elite’s will upon humanity. The banks and their subsidiary corporations must control all oil and as much property as possible prior to any collapse being implemented because when the planned economic collapse is over and the central bankers control the lions share of the world’s assets, they can dictate terms to humanity.

The Short Term Goal of Preserving the Petrodollar

To preserve the Petrodollar, Iran must be forced to stop selling its oil for gold to the Russians, Chinese and the Indians and these nations must be forced to return to the Federal Reserve to purchase American dollars before purchasing oil. To that end, the US has attempted to overthrow Assad in Syria as a first step which will culminate in attacking and occupying key Iranian oil fields. Yet, Assad has proven resourceful. To accomplish the goal of deposing Assad, the US military must be brought into the conflict to break the stalemate between the CIA backed al-Qaeda (Syrian) rebels and Assad’s forces. From the globalist perspective, Syria must be conquered as a precursor to subjugating Iran and that is not going very well.

Short of unseating Assad, the establishment needs an immediate game changing event to break the stalemate in Syria, thus the false flag chemical weapons attack that was perpetrated in Damascus and Assad falsely blamed.  All of this is being done as a pretext to a U.S. invasion. However, the globalists have played this hand too often and the world is not buying what Obama and Kerry are selling.

If consensus is not offered by Congress to go ahead with the attack on Syria, a Plan B must be quickly initiated which consists of perpetrating a false flag attack within the United States, and subsequently blaming Syria and Iran, thus providing justification for retaliation against the two nations.

Subsequently, no approval from Congress will be required because the United States will be under martial law resulting from the false flag attacks.

Summary of the Elite’s Position

The elite want a global currency, but they need to consolidate their holdings in preparation of a planned economic collapse. To accomplish this goal, the central bankers need to control the oil fields and temporarily keep the dollar alive. Syria and Iran must be conquered to that end. Mark my words, Saudi Arabia is next on the central bankers invasion list.

A false flag event, or event(s) could serve to move Congress towards war if Syria and/or Iran can be shouldered with the blame. If the central bankers can subjugate the entire Middle East with the US military, the dollar and the rest of the world’s fiat currencies will be collapsed when the last drop of oil is obtained and all military and political opposition is eliminated. Following that, a world currency will be forced upon the people of the world. It will likely be digitized and to buy and sell, you will have to take an implantable chip. I wished I was saying the latter statement in jest, I am not.

If Obama does not get authoziation from Congress to attack Syria, look for Obama to take the false flag route to make an end run around Congress. Although I do not discount any of the false flag scenarios which are surfacing as I write these words, I will focus exclusively on the 11/13 blackout.

The Banks Have Been Preparing for a Collapse Since Last Year

If the banks had any notion that a massive power outage was coming, they would seek to minimize their exposure by severely limiting the amount of loans they had in circulation and they would continue to acquire as many hard assets as possible (e.g. houses and shopping centers) and they would do so at breakneck speed. To limit the amount of capital in circulation, subsequent lending practices would make loaning money next to impossible. Further, the banks would seek to act upon a newly granted legal right to seize control of deposits once the blackout came. Well, this is exactly what we see happening on all points.

A power grid take down would absolutely cripple the banking system since nearly all banking transactions are electronic. To minimize exposure to the banks, the Federal Reserve Chairman, Ben Bernanke, has moved to severely limit the amount of loans that are in the system. A power grid shut down could potentially prevent the banks from ever getting their investments back from lenders much of the collateralization of outstanding loans would be destroyed under such a set of circumstances. Subsequently, before banks will be targeted for a take down, lending must be brought to a crawl and that is exactly what has been happening for the past two years. The trend of banks not lending money is exponentially growing.

I also believe the anticipation for a banking shutdown explains some of the abhorrent behavior by the five megabanks as they move to steal as many houses and properties as possible by creating a robo signing MERS system which produces so many mortgage notes for one property that the banks stand a good chance, in court, of confusing a judge and thus stealing millions of properties. These heinous practices have been fully exposed by people such as Dave Kreiger of Clouded Titles. Many State Attorney Generals’ have brought law suits against the banks for these mortgage practices, but no one has gone to jail because to the establishment, this is acceptable behavior.

The coming banking collapse also explains why the Federal Reserve is printing $85 billion dollars a month to purchase Mortgage Backed Securities, so they can buy up distressed properties.  When the collapse comes, he who holds the most hard assets, wins! A fiat currency is not a hard asset.  A house, a shopping mall, diamonds, gold, and silver are.

To soften the blow of the banking collapse that is coming, America is in the final days of the last great American garage sale as the Federal Reserve and her key banks are literally stealing as much property as they can. The Federal Reserve has positioned themselves to literally own nearly every piece of property following a banking collapse and most American homeowners will be turned into serfs under the control of the banks after the economic collapse. What will emerge on the other side of the collapse will be a neo-feudal fascist police state surveillance grid where individual liberty and private ownership of anything will be gone forever!

Why the Military Option is Preferable

At this point, some are wondering why the globalists would prefer the military option in the Middle East as compared to perpetrating a banking collapse within a contrived black out. The answer is as old as central banking itself. The globalists love war for a number of reasons. First, war is the biggest money making “racket” on the planet. And secondly, any possible military and political opposition to the establishment to a New World Order will be wiped out through military conquest.
Finally, I truly believe that the sociopaths comprising the central banking cartel are completely insane and they literally enjoy the power rush they will get from killing millions, if not billions of innocent people. When one serves Satan, one loves to enjoy the death and destruction associated with traveling on the highway to hell.

The Real False Flag Event Is Embedded Within the Primary False Flag

A grid shut down and the imposition of martial law is certainly a plausible goal of the elite. However, if a successful war cannot be prosecuted against Syria and Iran, the Petrodollar will fail and will fail fairly quickly. A grid shutdown, accompanied by a bank failure would allow the international banking cartel to abandon the dollar and issue a new world currency that they control. You see, it would not just be the US that would experience a banking collapse, it would be the whole world because the collapse of the dollar will collapse every other currency except for gold and silver. And didn’t the Goldman Sachs brokers lead a sell-off of gold from their investors, while at the same time, the elite commenced a gold buying program at rock bottom prices this last spring? What did Goldman Sachs know?

More Evidence of a Planned Banking Collapse

There is additional evidence to support the assertion of a coming banking collapse which comes from the top of the international banking institutions, the Bank of International Settlements (BIS). There are new standards which have been introduced called the Base III accord, which severely limits lending. The public cover story states that these policies will soften the blow to banks resulting from “severe” economic events such as a banking collapse. In this case, I contend that the severe economic events are already planned and the banks are storing capital and money in anticipation of a banking collapse.

In support of BIS’ policies which severely restrict lending, Bernanke recently stated that “With these revisions to our capital rules, banking organizations will be better able to withstand periods of financial stress, thus contributing to the overall health of the U.S. economy.” Bank of America, Bank of New York Mellon, Citigroup and JP Morgan Stanley are among the banks that Bernanke stated must raise 4.5 billion dollars by 2019 to remain solvent and called for bank loans to be severely limited in the interim. Bernanke further stated that until that goal is reached, banks need to be cautious about lending. What? The banks only have to raise 4.5 billion dollars to reach solvency before resuming normal lending? The amount that the banks need to raise, is ridiculously low! This is clearly a cover story for public consumption which is designed to limit lending in anticipation of a banking collapse.

Further, the Bank of International Settlements (BIS) and the Basel Committee on Banking Supervisors (BCBS) has applied the underlying pressure on US banks to liquidate soft assets to appease global markets to not loan money. The European Central Bank (ECB) is clearly preparing for the complete financial collapse of fiat currencies across the planet. Joining the Federal Reserve and the BIS in this plot to collapse the currencies of the world is the Bank of England. Bank of Canada, the Swiss National Bank and the Bank of Japan.

Why Is the Currency Collapse Being Embedded in the 11/13 Blackout?

In this era of mistrust, what would happen across the United States if on a Friday, Ben Bernanke announced that the banking system had collapsed, but would reopen on Monday? If bank customers did not have access to their full bank accounts on the following Monday, DHS might have to use some of that 2.2 billion rounds of ammunition that they have acquired in the past several months to restore order.  The elite would like to avoid this kind of a confrontation at this point in time.

Instead, if a “blackout” were to occur which supposedly destroyed bank records, the banks would “collapse”, and the immediate aftermath would hardly be noticed.  Make no mistake about it, the banks will not truly collapse, they will come to a soft landing. Your resources will be the only ones that will be collapsed as this will be the biggest wealth transfer in the history of the planet and this event will make the bailouts seem miniscule by comparison.

A blackout and the ensuing chaos would be the perfect time to pretend to collapse the banks and not risk incurring the wrath of the public. Amid the extreme social unrest accompanying a massive blackout, the banking issue would be secondary in importance by comparison because people would be on the streets looking for food by the third day following the blackout. Looting, rioting and starvation would rule the day. The amount of computer digits in one’s bank account, would become a secondary issue.  In the midst of the chaos and the violence, martial law would be imposed and America will never be the same.

In the Aftermath of the Blackout

At the end of the day, the world’s central banking cartel will not allow the dollar to collapse due to a global shift away from the Petrodollar. If there is a going to be a collapse of the dollar, these banksters will control the collapse so that they can control what comes in the place of the dollar.

Certainly, the bankers would love to continue to use the US military to subjugate the Middle East and its resources. However, if invading Syria and Iran are not cost effective, and American and international public opinion continues to run against this action, a blackout followed by a banking collapse would constitute an effective Plan B. The Petrodollar would be gone and a brand new currency would be unveiled in its place following a planned collapse. And after the United States is placed under strict martial law following the blackout and banking collapse, a war could be commenced to subjugate the Middle East because domestic opposition would have been suppressed.

What follows most banking collapses? Banking collapses are usually followed by a reformed or revamped currency in which bank customers would be compensated by offering pennies on the dollar. I believe that this strategy was beta tested twice in the past couple of years to gauge the public’s reaction to being ripped off. When MF Global was deliberately collapsed and John Corzine stole over a billion dollars of customer segregated accounts, the resolve of the account holders was tested. Currently, only pennies on the dollar are being paid back to the MF Global customers. Also, in September of 2012, in a very similar case to MF Global, the Illinois Seventh Circuit Court of Appeals ruled that once a depositor puts their money in the bank, the money belongs to the bank. There was no rioting, very little mainstream media coverage and people were still fighting to get pennies on the dollar. The Greeks make Americans look like a bunch of pansies as they only turned over a few cars in their expression of frustration at the thieving ways of the central banking cartel. In short, the central bankers know they can get away with stealing from the public.

The elite have a very simple plan for subjugating this country. Here is the elite’s three step plan:

1. Power grid collapse on 11/13 lasting five to seven days.

2. The banking system collapses within the blackout event and this event will almost go unnoticed in the midst of the chaos.

3. Martial law is rolled out and all political opposition is swiftly dealt with.

Once this three step plan is implemented, it will take an act of God to turn this country around, and some feel that this country is already under God’s judgment and His help will not be forthcoming.

Any street fighter will tell you the importance of getting in the first punch. We have that opportunity in a very narrow window of time to land that first punch. If this plan was exposed to the masses in the coming days and few short weeks we have left, and we were relentless in calling attention to what is unfolding, perhaps we could temporarily push these events back. We would not be able to stop it, but we might delay the onset of humanity’s darkest days. However, if we think we can wait until we are in crisis to finally fight for our lives, our liberty and our property, we will be sadly disappointed and soundly defeated. This is what Hitler and Stalin dreamed about doing. As my friend Jim Marrs would accurately say, the Fourth Reich is being unveiled as we speak.



Each fully loaded, magazines combined hold almost 18 million rounds of ammunition

Kit Daniels
August 16, 2013

The U.S. Army is buying almost 600,000 Soviet AK-47 magazines, enough to hold nearly 18 million rounds of 7.62x39mm ammo which is not standard-issue for either the U.S. military or NATO.

All the magazines combined weight more than the operating weight of a C-5 Galaxy. Credit: USAF

All the magazines combined weigh more than the operating weight of a C-5 Galaxy.

A U.S. Army solicitation on the Federal Business Opportunities site asks for approximately 592,825 new AK 30-round magazines.

The solicitation even refers to the magazines as being for “non-standard weapons.”

More specifically, they are for the AK-47 designed by the Soviet Union at the start of the Cold War, which is now commonly used by opposition forces in proxy wars around the world.

This magazine order is an astronomical amount.

Assuming an individual, unloaded magazine weight of 0.95 pounds, all of these magazines combined weigh more than the operating weight of a Lockheed Martin C-5 Galaxy, one of the largest aircraft in the world.

The C-5 Galaxy wouldn’t even be able to carry all of these magazines. Two trips would be necessary.

To put it in another perspective, all these magazines combined weigh more than seven 18-wheelers at the maximum legal weight of 80,000 pounds.

The U.S. Army Armament Research, Development and Engineering Center (ARDEC) made the request for the immense amount of magazines, which seems excessive for only research and development purposes.

Chances are these magazines will end up in one of the numerous conflicts around the world.

This isn’t the first time that the federal government has made massive bulk purchases of guns, gun parts, and ammunition which are extremely popular with private gun owners but not in NATO use.

Last month, we reported that the army bought 2,550,000 live rounds of 7.62x39mm ammo.

The army is storing a portion of the ammo at Camp Stanley in Boerne, Texas, which is also supposedly a CIA outpost.

The Obama-backed Syria rebels could definitely use the 7.62x39mm for their AKs, especially considering that Congress has already cleared the CIA to openly ship munitions to them.

In 2012, ARDEC looked for a vendor who could “reach around the world at any given moment to gather and provide multiple types of weapons and weapon parts.”

The weapons requested included both foreign non-standard and obsolete U.S. military weapons, such as the aforementioned AK-47, 1911s and M1903 Springfields.

Expect to see even more large orders for “non-standard” ammunition in the future.

Below is a video on AK-47 magazines:



Compelling proof Dept. of Defense is joining DHS in drying up firearms and ammo supply.

Kit Daniels
July 26, 2013

The U.S. Army is now looking to stockpile nearly 3,000,000 live rounds of Soviet-era Russian ammo popular with civilian shooters.

A U.S. Army solicitation posted July 18 on the Federal Business Opportunities web site asks for “non-standard” ammunition from vendors which includes:

- 2,550,000 rounds of 7.62x39mm ball ammo
– 575,000 blank rounds of 7.62x39mm ammo and
– 425,000 rounds of 9x18mm Makarov ball ammo

The army intends to store all these rounds in ammo storage facilities at both Camp Stanley in Boerne, Texas and the Blue Grass Army Depot in Kentucky.

As the solicitation implies, the 7.62x39mm and the 9x18mm Makarov are not standard-issue in the U.S. military or NATO.

Rather they are calibers developed by the former Soviet Union which are now commonly used by civilian shooters in the United States.

The 7.62x39mm in particular is extremely popular with private gun owners due to the wide availability and affordability of both military surplus ammo and firearms chambered for this round, such as the AK-47 and the SKS.

Handguns chambered for the 9x18mm Makarov, such as the FEG PA-63, are common, inexpensive imports.

The desired list of calibers attached to a previous, related acquisition request also included oddball rounds such as the .303 British and the 7.62×25mm Tokarev.

In addition to this solicitation for nearly 3,000,000 live rounds of Russian calibers popular with the public, the army made a similar request last year for a long-term weapon supplier who can ship both foreign non-standard and obsolete U.S. military weapons anywhere in the world.

According to this 2012 request, the U.S. Army Armament Research, Development and Engineering Center (ARDEC) wanted to find a vendor who could “reach around the world at any given moment to gather and provide multiple types of weapons and weapon parts.”

The extensive list of desired weapons included firearms popular with civilians such as the aforementioned AK-47, 1911s, M1903 Springfields, Walther PP/PPKs (another common import), and other “commercial and para-military weapons.”

This solicitation also asked for “books, manuals, tools, and gauges” pertaining to the firearms.

Headquartered in New Jersey, ARDEC is primarily known for its research in advanced weapons such as lasers and nanotechnology.

These unusual requests prompt the question as to why the U.S. Army, and especially the army’s advanced weapons research and development division, needs a vast quantity of non-NATO rounds and decades-old – sometimes even 100-year-old – firearms popular with civilians for worldwide deployment “at any given notice.”

The ARDEC request in particular seems too broad.

Are World War I era M1903 Springfields really that common in today’s battlefields, or even the popular CZ-52 imports which have been retired from Czechoslovakian service since 1982?

Are these obsolete weapons used that frequently in current world conflicts to warrant specific mention in an army acquisition request?

Do century-old firearms really need to be shipped all around the world for “research and development?”

What about the huge purchase of 425,000 9x18mm Makarov rounds?

Are they going to somehow end up in the sidearms of Obama-backed Syrian rebels, especially after two congressional panels cleared the way for shipping small arms to Syria?

Handguns chambered in 9x18mm Makarov are still commonplace among Syrian militants because Syria received military aid from the Soviet Union for over 20 years.

These solicitations, with planned acquisitions ranging between $500,000 to $22,000,000, definitely forge fears of back door gun control by creating artificial scarcity that denies Americans access to a wide-range of firearms and ammo, especially in the wake of the U.N. arms trade treaty which was signed by Obama but rejected by the Senate.

Regardless of the army’s intentions, these large-scale purchases will only further intensify firearm and ammo shortages for gun owners across the country.



The Silent Invasion of the United States by Russia…Undercover Over Time

Russian, United Nations, and other foreign troops are training in the United States to disarm American citizens under martial law on U.S. soil.

by Dave Hodges |

August 24, 2013

I have never taken as much ridicule over a topic as I have over my reporting of the presence of Russian soldiers on American soil under some very suspicious circumstances which I published last September/October. Conversely, I have never received so many tips from insider sources and average people who have just happened to have seen something related to the presence of Russian troops on American soil.

Because of the controversy, followed by the chastisement and the possible danger of reporting on this topic, this would be a very easy subject for me to back away from. However, since I first published my concerns over Russian troops on American soil, coupled with our apparent military stand down in places like Alaska, my contention is that the Russians are soon going to be playing a major role in the subjugation of the United States.

Where Is This Headed?

The Federal government is attempting to terrorize the American people with open admissions of in-your-face-tyranny which are designed to induce fear and a sense of helplessness. Even the local police are becoming an extension of Federal tyranny since most departments have become federalized under the Department of Homeland Security and are beginning to act with extreme prejudice and brutality in dealing with the public.

What we really have to be afraid of is the fact that we are fast approaching the end game. The globalists are making their move and the chess pieces have been lined up and positioned on the board for checkmate.

DHS and FEMA Are Preparing for War

By now, it’s clear that several Federal agencies including DHS and FEMA are preparing for war. In the past several months, DHS has purchased 2.6 billion rounds of ammunition. The TSA, the National Weather Service, the Social Security Agency, the Environmental Protection Agency and other Federal agencies are arming to the teeth to take on the American people.

Everything that has happened since I first published on this topic nearly a year ago has also reinforced the fact that there is indeed a categorized enemies list.

Recently, I spoke with an unnamed source introduced to me by Michael Edwards of Activist Post who claimed that he was working on the DARPA projects that had been recently revealed to the American people. What had not been released to the American people was the fact that American citizens are now being given a threat matrix score. Presumably, this will become a life or death list. The source also told me that he had seen, firsthand, the monitoring of talk show host Alex Jones, by the Arizona State University DARPA program. The source took this information to mean that all Americans are receiving a threat matrix score which will be acted upon when DHS and FEMA make their move.

I believe that this country is (1) going to to be attacked by Russians and our guard has been purposely let down to facilitate the invasion, and/or, (2) the Russians are going to be used as a supplemental force to round up dissenters into FEMA camps and to seize the guns that are banned by the UN Small Arms Ban which Obama is preparing to sign during the late fall and early winter during the Congressional recess.

Whatever is coming, it is clear that the American military is NOT going to be a big player because large segments of the military cannot be trusted to mindlessly follow orders. This also explains DHS’ demonization of the veterans because they would be leaders of an American citizen resistance in the coming strife.

Why the Russians?

Some of you will remember the survey which asked American military respondents to answer the following question: “Would you fire upon U.S. citizens who refuse or resist confiscation of firearms banned by the United States government?” This late 1990′s survey was a litmus test to determine if the globalists could depend upon the American military. One would presume that the raw data did not produce the results that the globalists were looking for and they concluded that major elements of the American military could not be counted on to support the imposition of a holocaust on American soil. This might be the best reason why we are still fighting in Afghanistan and other parts of the Middle East, so that the bulk of the active duty forces are rendered useless in the defense of the country when the administration and the Russians make their final move.

Does it make sense now why I carefully detailed Obama’s communist background, particularly with Bill Ayers? This is the same Bill Ayers who told FBI informant, Larry Grathwohl that 50 million Americans would have to be put into re-education camps and half of those would have to be killed. This is the same man who launched Obama’s political career from his living room and whose father paid for Obama’s Harvard education.

Because the administration has been caught bringing in the Russians, these traitors were forced to invent a cover story. Subsequently, the administration announced the creation of a series of extra-constitutional “agreements” (that means illegal agreements) which justified the presence of Russian soldiers on American soil. These agreements  were inked in June of 2013 in Washington, D.C., at the fourth annual meeting which led to the the illegally created “U.S.-Russia Bilateral Presidential Commission Working Group on Emergency Situations.” This extra-governmental organization, formed under the Obama administration, is one of almost two dozen similar “working groups” bringing together top U.S. and Russian officials. These two bodies are cooperating on everything from the drug war and agriculture to terror, science, “rule of law” (could that be code for martial law?), health, environment, energy, nuclear issues, education, culture, media, business, arms control, and more, according to the U.S. State Department. The Senate has not ratified any of the international deals, as required by the Constitution of the United States. And as such, this is an illegal agreement. However, this is not just an illegal agreement, IT CONSTITUTES TREASON AGAINST THE AMERICAN PEOPLE.

If there was ever a case for impeachment, this is it. Obama is betraying every man, woman and child in the United States. He needs to leave office and he needs to be arrested, tried and convicted for treason.

The agreement also calls for at least 15,000 Russian troops to engage in policing activities at American public events on American soil. In actuality, there are at least 150,000 Russian troops on American soil. This bilateral agreement is designed to conceal the fact of what the Russians are up to while they have been on American soil for some time.

No Staging Necessary, the Russians Are Ready To Go

I have done radio interviews on the topic of Russians on American soil with people like Dr. Susan Helman from Gatlinburg, TN. in which she claims that there are Russians in her small town. They speak perfect English, are all about the same age and rarely interact with the local population. How many times have you ever heard an immigrant population being about the same age and having no one speak proficient English? These are clearly Russian military plants.

Dr. Helman further discussed on my show how the nearby Smokey Mountains Park is largely blocked off to what used to be joggers and hikers. Dr. Helman has reported that unmarked helicopters routinely land on the golf course next to her house.  She believes that the Russians represent the vanguard of a Russian occupation force.

Sherrie Wilcox has also photographed Russian soldiers dressed up and riding in Homeland Security vehicles, and also details how the Smoky Mountains are now under the control of the United Nations and people are being denied access. She has identified the fact that the Russians are emanating from an area where massive chemical weapons are being stockpiled. In the following video, a detention facility is revealed with railroad tracks stopping at buildings. I would strongly recommend taking the time to watch the following video as the contents are chilling and have enormous implications for all Americans.



The Wilcox report makes it clear that DHS is partnering with the Russians to subjugate America. DHS’ minion agency, FEMA, is currently activating FEMA camps and purchasing as much food as they can get their hands on.  Former FEMA officials have also relocated to remote enclaves as a means to avoid what is coming. The establishment wants Americans as dependent on the government as possible because the takeover will be meet with less resistance. With 101 million Americans on food stamps, this is the perfect time carry out this occupation plan since many of us will not raise a finger to those who are in government.

From Victorville, California, I have had numerous eyewitness accounts, both from respondents to my articles and to callers to my show relating to me that they are not only seeing Russian soldiers, but Russian tanks training on American soil!

The Pending Russian Takeover

It is time for some very straight talk. The bailouts were primarily responsible for the near instantaneous collapse of our economy. The Banksters have conquered our country. Their allies, the Russians, are preparing to occupy the United States.



Any Military Invasion Will Begin with Alaska

Nowhere have I received more information than I have from Alaska regarding the presence of Russian soldiers, in uniform, on American soil.

F-22 flights between Russia and Alaska have been suspended leaving the coastline more vulnerable. According to naval sources, submarine patrols have been greatly reduced and many locals have been reporting seeing fully surfaced Russian subs off of the coast of Alaska in multiple locations.

Obama is not just a traitor for bringing in Russian troops to police Americans, his treason started much earlier. Obama has given away seven strategic, oil-rich Alaskan islands to the Russians at a time when we could be going to war with Russia. At minimum, the oil, alone, from these Islands should be considered to be a military asset. I remain very concerned that these seven islands in the Arctic Ocean and Bering Sea could also be used as a military staging area from which to invade Alaska and defend its new claims of the mineral rich resources at the North Pole.

Russian troops began carrying out joint anti-terrorism drills in America in May of 2012. What terrorists could they be practicing for? The influx of Russian soldiers may begin as a trickle with a couple dozen Russian soldiers stationed at Fort Carson, Colorado, however, with the FEMA bilateral agreement, it’s clear the floodgates are getting ready to burst wide open and Obama’s treachery against the American people fully exposed.


Since I wrote the first account of this preparation of the Russians to occupy this country, nearly a year ago, my fear of a Russian occupation have been greatly heightened.  Prepare now before it is too late. Store as much food and water as you can. Store guns and ammo for the looters which will roam America in the months ahead.  A clear picture is beginning to emerge and the coming events which will usher in a new age of tyranny in the United States are crystallizing.





FEMA signs deal with Russian Emergency Situations Ministry to “exchange experts”

Paul Joseph Watson
July 1, 2013

As part of a deal signed last week in Washington DC between the Russian Emergency Situations Ministry and FEMA, Russian officials will provide “security at mass events” in the United States, a scenario that won’t sit well with Americans wary of foreign assets operating on US soil.


Russian troops. Image: Wikimedia Commons

According to a press release by the Ministry of the Russian Federation for Civil Defense and Emergencies, US and Russian officials met on June 25 at the 17th Joint U.S.-Russia Cooperation Committee on Emergency Situations.

In addition to agreeing with FEMA to “exchange experts during joint rescue operations in major disasters,” the Russian Emergency Situations Ministry will also be providing “security at mass events” in the United States.

This suggests that events designated as “National Special Security Events” by the Department of Homeland Security, which include the Super Bowl, international summits such as the G8 and presidential inaugurations, will now rely partly on Russian authorities to provide security.

The meeting last week also agreed on the conclusion that US and Russian emergency authorities will increase their co-operation, “in order to respond efficiently to all kinds of disasters.”

The use of foreign troops or other officials in a law enforcement capacity providing “security” inside the United States is illegal under Posse Comitatus. Capt. William Geddes of the U.S. Army Reserve acknowledged last year that it is against federal law to use US troops to conduct police patrols, despite the fact that such occurrences are becoming increasingly common. The use of foreign troops is an even more clear cut violation of Posse Comitatus.

Last year we reported on how Russian troops were invited to the US as part of a Fort Carson, Colorado drill focused around anti-terror training. Aside from learning how to target terrorists in America, the Russian soldiers were also out in the local community attending a baseball game in Colorado Springs.

As Mac Slavo writes, “Rumors have circulated for years about the possibility of foreign troops being deployed on U.S. soil in the event of a widespread declaration of a national emergency. For quite some time there have been anecdotal reports to support the claim that the U.N., Russia and other nations would be used in a policing capacity should some critical event befall our nation.”

“The fear should such a scenario take place has been that these soldiers would act under the banner of their own flags, ignoring the fundamental protections afforded to our citizens, leaving Americans under the jurisdiction of people who don’t speak our language or respect our fundamental rights to self defense, to be secure in our homes, and to be presumed innocent in the eyes of the law.”

Concerns about foreign troops being used on US soil have lingered ever since the release of State Department Publication 7277, which is a blueprint for the harmonization of US and Russian forces under a framework of United Nations-led global government.

Back in 2008 it was also reported that US and Canadian authorities had signed an agreement that would pave the way to using each other’s militaries on both sides of the border “during an emergency”.

Alex Jones has documented foreign troops being trained on U.S. soil to deal with “insurgents” since the late 1990′s as part of “urban warfare drills”.

Back in July 2010, our reporters covered the Operation Vigilant Guard exercises in Chicago which involved Polish troops training alongside U.S. National Guard troops in drills focused around raiding terrorists and drug dealers.

According to SFC Mark Ballard of the Illinois National Guard, the Polish forces were “integrating into some of the civil military units that are participating in this exercise” as part of Illinois’ partnership with the Republic of Poland, a relationship based around “integrative training” and blending military and civilian forces in the event of a national emergency, as well as making this process of integration with foreign troops more “visible”.





FEMA denies report of Russian forces providing security at US events

Paul Joseph Watson
July 3, 2013

FEMA’s denial of a report that suggested Russian forces would be operating inside the United States at “mass events” ignores the manifestly provable fact that Russian and other foreign troops are already active inside the US and have been for at least two decades.


Russian troops training on US soil.


The federal agency was forced to deny a report published by Infowars on Monday which cited an official Russian government press release that detailed a plan for Russian authorities to be involved in the “provision of security at mass events” in the United States.

“There will be “no exchange of security or military personnel” under a recently renewed partnership between the US Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) and Russia’s Emergency Situations Ministry, a FEMA spokesman told RIA Novosti.”

“The agreement continues information-sharing meetings and observation opportunities with first responders and emergency managers,” the spokesman said.

This contradicts a June 25 press release issued by the Ministry of the Russian Federation for Civil Defense and Emergencies which said that, “The Russian Emergency Situations Ministry and the USA Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) are going to exchange experts during joint rescue operations in major disasters,” a deal that would include the “provision of security at mass events.” The dictionary definition of the word ‘provision’ is “the providing or supplying of something.”

The admission that FEMA and Russian authorities would “exchange experts” who would be active “during joint rescue operations in major disasters” clearly contradicts the claim that the deal was only about information sharing. Either the press release was inaccurate or FEMA is lying.

The accuracy of the Infowars report was then muddied by it being connected with an unrelated hoax published by a known disinformation website which falsely claimed Obama had requested 15,000 Russian troops for an “upcoming disaster” in America.

Even if we accept FEMA’s denial that Russian forces will be in place at “mass events” in the US, the fact that Russian forces are already operating inside America is proven.

Last year we reported on how Russian troops were invited to the US as part of a Fort Carson, Colorado drill focused around anti-terror training. Aside from learning how to target terrorists in America, the Russian soldiers were also told to go out and mingle with the local community by attending a baseball game in Colorado Springs.



The Department of Defense subsequently confirmed that 20 Russian Spetsnaz troops were set to train on US soil for a period of three weeks as part of a “formal bilateral exchange program between the U.S. and Russia.” Images of Russian troops working with US soldiers at Fort Carson can be seen above.

The process of acclimatizing Americans to accept the presence of foreign troops on US soil has been ongoing since the release of State Department Publication 7277, which is a blueprint for the harmonization of US and Russian forces under a United Nations framework.

There are numerous other instances where foreign troops have been active on U.S. soil as part of security exchange programs.

- In 2008, US and Canadian authorities signed an agreement that paves the way to using each other’s militaries on both sides of the border “during an emergency”.

- During FEMA’s 2009 NLE exercise, foreign troops from Mexico, Canada, Australia and the United Kingdom were involved in a major exercise focused on “terrorism prevention and protection.”

- Back in July 2010, our reporters covered the Operation Vigilant Guard exercises in Chicago which involved Polish troops training alongside U.S. National Guard troops in drills focused around raiding terrorists and drug dealers.

- Alex Jones has documented foreign troops being trained on U.S. soil to deal with “insurgents” since the late 1990′s as part of “urban warfare drills”.

- Only last month, foreign troops from Canada, New Zealand and Japan as well as observers from Australia, Chile, Colombia, Israel, Mexico, Peru and Singapore took part in multi-lateral exercises with US Marines under the banner of Operation Dawn Blitz, during which foreign soldiers staged a mock invasion of a beach in Southern California and then “moved inland for additional training ashore.”

- In addition, as Frank Drover details, “Troops and personnel under the command of the United Nations have been training all over the United States in joint exercises that include policing operations and terrorist suppression.”

Drover cites a 1994 UN training mission named Agile Provider (watch the clip above), during which 44,000 blue helmeted UN troops from nations such as France and the Netherlands trained in Georgia, North and South Carolina, Arkansas, and Tennessee.

- There were also fresh eyewitness reports of UN troops arriving for exercises in Texas, Florida, Mississippi and Georgia as recently as May of this year.

Exercises involving foreign troops on US soil have become commonplace over the last 20 years as Americans become increasing acclimatized to seeing international forces prepared for involvement in domestic security operations, largely ignorant of the fact that this is a violation of the Posse Comitatus Act.



Written by  Alex Newman | The New American

July 4, 2013

Following outrage and controversy last year over the Obama administration’s unprecedented decision to invite Russian troops for terror drills on U.S. soil, the U.S. Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) is now under fire for signing more agreements to “cooperate” with Vladimir Putin’s Russian “Emergencies Ministry” (EMERCOM) in a wide array of fields. Among the controversial deals outlined in an official Russian press release: exchanging of “experts” and “experience,” “provision of security at mass events,” and “cooperation in disaster response operations.” Critics of the scheme reacted with a mixture of fury and deep concerns.

After the news was picked up in the alternative media, it quickly went viral, stirring widespread fears that Russian forces could be deployed inside the United States under the bogus guise of “security.” Officials from both governments rushed to deny the speculation, trying to downplay the agreements as merely routine international collaboration. However, it remains unclear why the American people would need or want any sort of “assistance” from the Russian government, which, despite the supposed fall of communist tyranny, is still widely regarded as a lawless gangster regime.

According to government press releases and statements by officials, the latest agreement between the Department of Homeland Security’s FEMA and the Russian Emergency Situations Ministry provides for “expert cooperation in disaster response operations” and further “study” of latest practices. “In addition, the parties approved of U.S.-Russian cooperation in this field in 2013-2014, which envisages exchange of experience including in monitoring and forecasting emergency situations, training of rescuers, development of mine-rescuing and provision of security at mass events,” continued a statement released by EMERCOM after the summit, adding that the level of cooperation between the two governments would continue to develop.

Apparently, protecting the planet from potential threats from space was on the agenda as well. “We have decided that the U.S. Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) and Russia’s Emergencies Ministry will work together to develop systems to protect people and territory from cosmic impacts,” claimed Russian “Emergencies Minister” Vladimir Puchkov in a statement to journalists. “I believe we can make a technological breakthrough in this area if the Emergencies Ministry and FEMA supervise this project, attracting the finest minds and research groups including in Canada, Europe, China, and Southeast Asia.”

The extra-constitutional “agreements” were inked late last month in Washington, D.C., at the fourth annual meeting of the so-called “U.S.-Russia Bilateral Presidential Commission Working Group on Emergency Situations.” The shady outfit, formed under the Obama administration, is one of almost two dozen similar “working groups” bringing together top U.S. and Russian officials. The bodies are cooperating on everything from the drug war and agriculture to terror, science, “rule of law,” health, environment, energy, nuclear issues, education, culture, media, business, arms control, and more, according to the U.S. State Department. The Senate has not ratified any of the international deals, as required by the Constitution.

“The [Emergency Situations] Working Group promotes enhanced U.S.-Russia cooperation in the field of emergency management,” the State Department says online about its controversial scheme. “In partnership with a wide range of U.S. and Russian agencies, including the Russian Ministry of Foreign Affairs and EMERCOM, the U.S. Departments of State, Homeland Security, Defense, FEMA, and the U.S. Agency for International Development (USAID) have conducted many joint-exercises, exchanges, and conferences with the goal of sharing best practices and improving emergency response capabilities.”

News about the most recent round of agreements between FEMA and EMERCOM first went viral after being reported by the alternative site Infowars, which has readership numbers that dwarf more than a few establishment media sources. Citing the EMERCOM government press release, reporter Paul Joseph Watson said the agreements suggested that some major public events in the United States could rely in part on authorities from Russia to provide security. As the report pointed out, that would be a violation of federal law — not to mention the Constitution.

Commenting on the FEMA deal with Russian authorities, popular conservative talk-radio host Michael Savage called for the arrest of responsible U.S. officials. “You know who FEMA is — don’t you? — the people with the camps ready for you,” he said on July 1, also suggesting that Russian troops would be providing “security” at events in the United States in violation of Posse Comitatus restrictions. Throughout the segment on the U.S.-Russia agreements, Savage continually referred to the Obama administration as a criminal regime that needed to be stopped.

“Many people fear that this government is getting ready for some major action against the people, they think that this gang that targeted its political enemies through the IRS and the NSA is getting ready to use foreign troops on our soil who will not hesitate to shoot to kill,” he continued. “This is illegal. Whoever signed it for the U.S. government should go to prison… This is what’s emerged under this criminal administration… Obama is a gangster — he’s running the country like he’s a gangster commander.”

The New American reached out to FEMA and other relevant U.S. agencies for comment through multiple channels, but officials did not respond to repeated requests. Instead, a spokesman for FEMA tried to downplay the bilateral “agreements” in a statement offered to Kremlin-funded media outlets, saying there would be “no exchange of security or military personnel” under the latest bilateral arrangement. “The agreement continues information-sharing meetings and observation opportunities with first responders and emergency managers,” the unidentified FEMA spokesman claimed, adding that the dubious “partnership” between U.S. and Russian authorities existed for 17 years.

In the 1950s, congressional investigator Norman Dodd was tasked with investigating the subversive activities of major tax-exempt foundations. As part of the project, Dodd said he spoke with Ford Foundation President Rowan Gaither, who reportedly told him that the immensely powerful institutions were working under White House directives. “The substance of the directives under which we operate is that we shall use our grant-making power to so alter life in the United States that we can be comfortably merged with the Soviet Union,” Gaither is widely quoted as having told Dodd.

Indeed, more than a few independent researchers came to similar conclusions. The Infowars report about the FEMA agreements, for example, cites State Department Publication 7277. Entitled Freedom From War: The United States Program for General and Complete Disarmament in a Peaceful World, this document was presented by the Kennedy administration to the United Nations in 1961. Long quoted by the John Birch Society and other opponents of world government, it outlines the official U.S. government policy to progressively disarm the world while strengthening the United Nations and the capabilities of its armed forces. The eventual goal, in essence, is to create a global government under the UN with a monopoly on force that would merge the “Free World” with the countries already enslaved under communist dictatorships.

While cooperation between Western governments and U.S. administrations has been steadily increasing since the supposed collapse of the communist Soviet Union, President Obama has increased the depth and scope of that “partnership” to unprecedented levels. Among the most stunning examples of Obama’s cozy relationship with Russian authorities: telling then-Russian President Dmitry Medvedev that after the 2012 election he would have “more flexibility,” continually praising the Russian government while cutting back America’s nuclear arsenal, defying Congress and federal law to send U.S. taxpayer money to the Russian military, inviting Russian troops to Colorado for terror drills, and more.

Of course, the controversial agreements between FEMA and EMERCOM make up just one small piece of the larger puzzle and the big picture. As The New American has documented extensively, the plan to foist a dictatorial one-world government on humanity has been in the works for many decades — likely more than a century, at least. Cooperation between the U.S. government and Russian authorities would obviously be central to the scheme. In recent years, the troubling trends have been accelerating quickly, and without a major outcry by the American people, there will be little standing in the way of the global establishment’s sinister plot.



Russian Special Forces are training with U.S. forces in Colorado starting May 2012.  The reason: to counter terrorists here in the U.S.  That’s a little frightening when you consider so many experts say the U.S. is on shaky ground financially.  What are they preparing for–a financial collapse in the United States perhaps?



Are America’s treasured National Parks being co-opted by the New World Order under the guise of designating them World Heritage Sites,thus allowing foreign troops and United Nations agencies to take over our country in a soft coup d’etat? A blogger has photographed heavily equipped armored vehicles carrying the “Special Response Team” logo in and around the Great Smoky Mountains National Heritage site in Gatlinburg,TN. (1) ”It is a deadly serious piece of equipment never before used inside the US until now,” says the blogger “Sherrie” who then adds,“The vehicles don’t come more heavily armored.”

Sherrie has put up several pictures of these in-country tanks which she said she saw on and near Interstate 75 when she was traveling back roads near Winchester,Richmond,KY,and lists Rt. # 627 as an area of interest. “This spot is (around) the US Army Chemical Depot” which covers 14,000 acres in Kentucky backwoods,” the blogger says on the video which the Liberty web site is putting up for general viewing. She mentions chemical weapons involving 523 tons of nerve agents and shows aerial photography of train tracks going up to several buildings in this compound! “I’m not sure what they are,” she says,positing the notion of a possible FEMA camp in the Kentucky woods.

Now in addition to sighting of MRAP vehicles,“Sherrie” tells readers that “Russians were stopping and questioning people in the Gatlinburg,Smoky Mountain Parks region.” She quotes a high ranking individual in a local area state militia organization who she says she trusts as being truthful. The scenario developed when these apparently foreign troops wearing DHS uniforms with the Eagle insignia tried to enter Tennessee from Kentucky. “They were NOT Americans. . .appeared to be Russian or Eastern European!”

The Tennessee State Guard is being formulated as part of the 22 state Governors’ Militia Organization of volunteers which answers only to the Governors,not to the Federal government. (2) What has developed is the confiscation of equipment belong to National Guard Units nationwide. Trucks and other equipment sent to Iraq are not being replaced or returned to the states by the federal government because it is “too expensive” to transport the vehicles and equipment back into the country. This has prompted 22 governors to form State Militia Units paid for by the states and thus kept out of the reach of the federal government. (2)

Has the Division of Homeland Security partnered with the United Nations One World military apparatus with a sleight of hand operation known as World Heritage Site designation? The observant blogger lists these US treasures also as being so designated:Statue of Liberty,Everglades,Mammoth Cave,Yellowstone,Yosemite,all former National Parks. Folks,this designation and UN involvement coincides with the ten region DHS map of the United States! Has this under-the-radar give away of America already taken place,thus allowing the constitutionally prohibited onus of foreign troops being stationed on American soil? What is your Congress doing about this?



Unprecedented drills cause consternation amongst conservatives

Paul Joseph Watson
Friday, April 27, 2012

The Department of Defense has confirmed foreign media reports that Russian troops are set to target terrorists on Americans soil as part of an unprecedented joint drill with the United States which will take place in Colorado next month.

As we reported yesterday, Airborne troops from Russia are set to take part in drills focused around targeting terrorists at Fort Carson between May 24 and May 31. The soldiers will also be mingling with the local community, attending a baseball game in Colorado Springs during their stay.

Although it marks the first time Russian troops will train on U.S. soil, soldiers from a plethora of different nations have been involved in similar drills for well over a decade.

“The Russian soldiers are here as invited guests of the U.S. government; this is part of a formal bilateral exchange program between the U.S. and Russia that seeks to develop transparency and promote defense reform,” Cmdr. Wendy L. Snyder, U.S. Defense Press Officer for policy, told The New American in an e-mail. “This is the first time that American and Russian special operations troops have participated in a bilateral exercise.”

“According to Snyder, the exercises — which she said would last about three weeks in all — will serve to train and improve skills related to terror-war fighting. About 20 Russian soldiers will be participating, with most of the training to take place on the Fort Carson, Colorado, Army base and a mountain training area several hours away.”

The presence of foreign troops on U.S. soil has long caused consternation with many on the American right for a number of reasons, both historical and contemporary, stretching right back to when the British called upon German Hessian soldiers during the Revolutionary War.

More modern fears revolve around global UN peacekeeping troops being used to quell unrest inside America, an issue touched upon by Henry Kissinger during the 1991 Bilderberg meeting when he stated, “Today Americans would be outraged if U.N. troops entered Los Angeles to restore order; tomorrow they will be grateful.”

Drills such as FEMA’s 2009 NLE exercise, during which foreign troops worked alongside U.S. authorities, have led to concerns that the federal government would be forced to rely on foreign mercenaries to restore order, confiscate weapons or even incarcerate citizens during a national emergency, because of the likelihood that Americans would refuse to carry out such orders against other Americans.

One of the primary reasons why this story hasn’t gone viral is because doubt was cast on the issue when a known disinformation outlet (European Union Times) decided to embellish the details by adding completely manufactured nonsense about Russian troops “seizing the CIA’s main computer facility in Denver, the NSA’s main computer facility in Bluffdale, Utah, and taking control of main runways and terminals of the Denver International Airport.”

Despite the fact that these claims come from a source who is notorious for making a living out of fooling people into believing bogus stories, Glenn Beck’s The Blaze website carried them without retraction.

This in turn poisoned the well and led some to believe that the drills themselves, which are completely confirmed and admitted, were a hoax.

The Department of Defense’s acknowledgment that the exercises as described in the initial media reports are indeed taking place will hopefully put an end to this confusion and allow focus to return to the question of why Russian troops are training to kill “terrorists” on U.S. soil.



By Eloise Lee    | Business Insider

Apr. 25, 2012


Russian soldiers


Russian paratroopers will meet up with American forces next month for an unprecedented military exercise in Colorado, according to RT News.

It’s the first time Russian service members will be invited into the United States for a joint drill.

A Russian airborne task force will “exercise with U.S. special service weapons,” an announcement by Russian Defense Ministry spokesperson Col. Aleksandr Kucherenko revealed.

The official purpose of the joint training is to practice airborne tactics and anti-terror operations, such as dropping into a hostile area and conducting a “terrorist camp raid.”

“Soldiers of the two countries will hold a tactical airborne operation, including reconnaissance of an imaginary terrorists’ camp and a raid,” said Kucherenko.

It’s worth noting the Russians will have access to U.S. military weapons training at the Army’s Fort Carson — “Home of America’s Best” — ahead of the scheduled May 24-31 drills. They’ll also be trained to understand and operate hardware used by U.S. forces in airborne missions including “parachuting, operation planning, reconnaissance, assault operations and evacuations by helicopter.”

This announcement comes at a time when Russia actually has troops working in cooperation with China.

A joint naval drill in the Yellow Sea is currently underway, with Xinhuanet reporting the military exercises are focused on sea-to-air defense, anti-submarine warfare, recovery of hijacked vessels and shooting down aerial, maritime and underwater targets.

With 25 vessels and 13 aircraft deployed for the drill, it’s reportedly one of the largest Russian-Sino drills in recent history. Xinhuanet reports:

Four Russian warships from the Pacific fleet, including the aircraft carrier Varyag are also participating in the drills. Missile destroyers, missile frigates, missile boats, a support vessel and a hospital ship gathered from China’s side for the drills.

But while Russia and China join forces for this week’s Yellow Sea exercise, America isn’t standing by idly. The U.S. military is conducting its own annual drills and war games in the Asia Pacific region — much to the displeasure of Chinese officials.


flikr/III Marine Expeditionary Force/MCI Pacific

Philippines and U.S. Marine Corps service members provide cover during a 2011 boat raid exercise.

Manuel Mogato at Reuters reports U.S. Marines, partnered with Philippine troops, took part in a drill simulating an “assault to retake a small island” — a little too close to reality for China, which has been embroiled in a dispute with the Philippines, and other neighbors, over contested territory around the South China Sea.

Mogato reports China warned that the US-Philippines war gaming would “raise the risk of armed conflict.”

But so far there’s no official word from Beijing about what it thinks of its Russian ally traipsing over to Colorado next month. Perhaps the Chinese government has a keen interest in the upcoming American-Russian drills and is keeping quiet for the sake of learning something from Russia following the U.S.-hosted exercises at Fort Carson.



By Patrick Goodenough

( – The U.S. may be troubled by Russian support for Syria’s Assad regime, freedom of expression violations and politically motivated prosecutions, but military-to-military cooperation continues, in line with the administration’s so-called “reset” of relations with the Kremlin.

For the third summer in a row, Russian Air Force personnel will join their American and Canadian counterparts in a joint counter-terror exercise beginning Monday, simulating a cooperative response to an aircraft hijacked by terrorists in international airspace.

Exercise “Vigilant Eagle” involves Russian, U.S. and Canadian personnel operating from command centers in the U.S. and Russia.

It is one of several exercises and exchanges agreed upon in a July 2009 agreement – an early product of the “reset” – signed by then chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, Adm. Mike Mullen and his Russian counterpart, Gen. Nikolai Makarov, restoring joint activities that were halted by the Bush administration in response to the Russian invasion of Georgia in August 2008.

A statement by North American Aerospace Defense Command (NORAD) said the Aug. 27-29 exercise will simulate an international flight “originating in Alaska and traveling into Russian airspace followed by one originating in Russia and traveling into the U.S. airspace.”

“The basic premise is that a foreign-flagged commercial air carrier on an international flight has been seized by terrorists,” it said. “The aircraft will not respond to communications. The exercise scenario creates a situation that requires both the Russian Air Force and NORAD to launch or divert fighter aircraft to investigate and follow the aircraft. The exercise will focus on the cooperative hand-off of the aircraft between fighter aircraft of the participating nations.”

NORAD said the exercise was part of an initiative aimed at transforming the relationship between the U.S. and Russian militaries and improving cooperation in preventing possible threats of air terrorism.

According to a Russian military spokesman, the exercise will involve personnel at NORAD headquarters at Peterson Air Force Base in Colorado Springs, Colo. and Elmendorf AFB in Anchorage, Ala., and at two Russian bases in the country’s Far East.

Other initiatives to come out of the 2009 U.S.-Russia agreement included strategic discussions between U.S. Joint Staff and Russian General Staff, orientation for Russian military cadets at the U.S. Military Academy at West Point, other military academy faculty visits and a naval war game.

“As global powers, the United States and Russia have a special responsibility for ensuring peace and stability in the world,” the White House said in a statement at the time.

“Reestablishing our military-to-military bonds will enhance transparency, establish clear paths of communication, and focus our collective efforts on today’s global strategic challenges.”

In recent weeks U.S. officials have expressed strong concerns about Russian policies at home and abroad since Putin began this third presidential term in May, particularly its decision to join China in vetoing – for a third time – a U.N. Security Council resolution responding to the crisis in Syria.

State Department spokesman have also spoken out about “the democratic trend in Russia,” including prosecutions of opposition figures and “cases where freedom of expression has been squelched,” such as the jailing of members of the anti-Putin rock group, Pussy Riot.



BRUSSELS, January 16, 2013

(Itar-Tass) – Russia and NATO will hold a number of joint exercises and training sessions in 2013, Colonel-General Valery Gerasimov, Chief of the General Staff of the Armed Forces of the Russian Federation, told reporters after the meeting of the Russia-NATO Council at the level of Chiefs of General Staff on Wednesday.

He said their aim will be to drill practical interaction in logistics and fighting terrorism and also rescue on the high seas.

Supplying army contingents with fuel, foodstuffs and other resources will be drilled in the exercise in Slovakia in summer. Russia will also take part in NATO exercise scheduled for the second half of 2013 aimed for training in fighting terrorism on air transport, Gerasimov said.

He said the plan of military cooperation in 2013 was adopted at the meeting of the Russia-NATO Council at the level of Chiefs of General Staff on Wednesday. “We will continue cooperation in the fight against terrorism and piracy and in search and rescue on the high seas, in logistics and military-academic exchange,” he said.



Sovereignty apparently set aside as agency exempted from law

by Bob Unruh | World Net Daily

A little-discussed executive order from President Obama giving foreign cops new police powers in the United States by exempting them from such drudgery as compliance with the Freedom of Information Act is raising alarm among commentators who say INTERPOL already had most of the same privileges as diplomats.

At David Horowitz’s Newsreal, Michael van der Galien said the issue is Obama’s expansion of President Ronald Reagan’s order from 1983 that originally granted those diplomatic privileges.

Reagan’s order carried certain exemptions requiring that INTERPOL operations be subject to several U.S. laws such as the Freedom of Information Act. Obama, however, removed those restrictions in his Dec. 16 amendment to Executive Order 12425.

That means, van der Galien wrote today, “this foreign law enforcement organization can operate free of an important safeguard against government and abuse.”

“‘Property and assets,’ including the organization’s records, cannot be searched or seized. Their physical locations are now immune from U.S. legal or investigative authorities,” he wrote.

Obama’s order said he was removing the Reagan limitations on INTERPOL:


“By the authority vested in me as President by the Constitution and the laws of the United States of America, including section 1 of the International Organizations Immunities Act (22 U.S.C. 288), and in order to extend the appropriate privileges, exemptions, and immunities to the International Criminal Police Organization (INTERPOL), it is hereby ordered that Executive Order 12425 of June 16, 1983, as amended, is further amended by deleting from the first sentence the words “except those provided by Section 2(c), Section 3, Section 4, Section 5, and Section 6 of that Act” and the semicolon that immediately precedes them,” he wrote.

At the website, authors Steve Schippert and Clyde Middleton gave their interpretation of the result.

“In light of what we know and can observe, it is our logical conclusion that President Obama’s Executive Order amending President Ronald Reagans’ 1983 EO 12425 and placing INTERPOL above the United States Constitution and beyond the legal reach of our own top law enforcement is a precursor to more damaging moves,” they wrote.

“When the paths on the road map converge – Iraq withdrawal, Guantánamo closure, perceived American image improved internationally, and an empowered INTERPOL in the United States – it is probable that President Barack Obama will once again make America a signatory to the International Criminal Court. It will be a move that surrenders American sovereignty to an international body whose INTERPOL enforcement arm has already been elevated above the Constitution and American domestic law enforcement,” they said.

“For an added and disturbing wrinkle, INTERPOL’s central operations office in the United States is within our own Justice Department offices. They are American law enforcement officers working under the aegis of INTERPOL within our own Justice Department. That they now operate with full diplomatic immunity and with ‘inviolable archives’ from within our own buildings should send red flags soaring into the clouds,” they said.

“Ultimately, a detailed verbal explanation is due the American public from the President of the United States detailing why an international law enforcement arm assisting a court we are not a signatory to has been elevated above our Constitution upon our soil.”

International Criminal Court

Records show that the original order designated INTERPOL as a public international organization. Reagan had extended “appropriate privileges, exemptions, and immunities,” but kept it subject to searches and seizures under appropriate legal circumstances.

Obama’s decision, analysts have concluded, exempted Interpol from all restrictions.

“This international law enforcement body now operates – now operates – on American soil beyond the reach of our own top law enforcement arm, the FBI, and is immune from Freedom Of Information Act (FOIA) requests,” ThreatsWatch reported.

At the Patriot Room, it was explained there is a reason for a certain level of immunity.

“Before we get our knickers in a bunch, there is logic to this immunity. While we like our Constitution and laws, other countries like their Constitution and laws. It doesn’t matter if the concept of personal freedom is more expansive here. If we expect immunity in their country, we have to extend it to them here.”

But with Obama’s change, “It means that we have an international police force authorized to act within the United States that is no longer subject to 4th Amendment Search and Seizure.”

Anthony Martin at the Examiner noted the international agency now can operate in the U.S. will “full immunity” from U.S. laws and “with complete independence from oversight from the FBI.”

At National Review Andy McCarthy asked, “Why would we elevate an international police force above American law? Why would we immunize an international police force from the limitations that constrain the FBI and other American law-enforcement agencies? Why is it suddenly necessary to have, within the Justice Department, a repository for stashing government files which, therefore, will be beyond the ability of Congress, American law-enforcement, the media, and the American people to scrutinize?”

At UNDispatch, which is a blog on the United Nations, Mark Leon Goldberg, who explained he worked at Interpol’s headquarters in France in 2002, said there isn’t much danger of INTERPOL agents whisking Americans off to jail. But he confirmed, “As to the specific reason why the Obama administration would decide, last week, to extend to INTERPOL the same suite of diplomatic privileges that are typically accorded to international organizations? I don’t have a good answer for that. My sense is that it probably has something to with the accessibility of INTERPOL’s secure criminal databases (on things like stolen passports and the like).”

But the Obama critics at the Obamafile weren’t convinced.

“By this EO, Obama has conferred diplomatic immunity upon INTERPOL, exemption from being subject to search and seizure by law enforcement, exemption from U.S. taxes, and immunity from FOIA requests, etc. … Does INTERPOL have a file on Obama – or his associations?”


For Immediate Release
December 17, 2009

Executive Order 13524 — Amending Executive Order 12425

– – – – – – -

By the authority vested in me as President by the Constitution and the laws of the United States of America, including section 1 of the International Organizations Immunities Act (22 U.S.C. 288), and in order to extend the appropriate privileges, exemptions, and immunities to the International Criminal Police Organization (INTERPOL), it is hereby ordered that Executive Order 12425 of June 16, 1983, as amended, is further amended by deleting from the first sentence the words “except those provided by Section 2(c), Section 3, Section 4, Section 5, and Section 6 of that Act” and the semicolon that immediately precedes them.


December 16, 2009.



By Dave Hodges | The Common Sense Show

July 8, 2013

I am stunned and shocked at the brass of the Obama administration as they have just announced the completion of a formal bilateral exchange program between the US and Russia that seeks to “develop transparency and promote defense reform.”

The extra-constitutional “agreements”(that means illegal agreements) were inked late last month in Washington, D.C., at the fourth annual meeting of the illegally created “U.S.-Russia Bilateral Presidential Commission Working Group on Emergency Situations.” This extra-governmental organization, formed under the Obama administration, is one of almost two dozen similar “working groups” bringing together top U.S. and Russian officials. These two bodies are cooperating on everything from the drug war and agriculture to terror, science, “rule of law” (could that be code for martial law?), health, environment, energy, nuclear issues, education, culture, media, business, arms control, and more, according to the U.S. State Department. The Senate has not ratified any of the international deals, as required by the Constitution of the United States. And as such, this is an illegal agreement. However, this is not just an illegal agreement, IT CONSTITUTES TREASON AGAINST THE AMERICAN PEOPLE.

The agreement calls for Russian troops to engage in policing activities at American public events on American soil.

The Giveaway of the US Is Beginning to Crystallize

Last year, I reported that Russia, through the traitorous cooperation and complicity of President Obama, is positioning its assets in order to attack Alaska. I was wrong in relation to the scope of my reporting. I was not wrong because Obama isn’t doing exactly what I said he was doing.You see, it is not just Alaska that Obama wants to give away, it is the entire country.

I do not want to mince words, Obama is preparing to subjugate the entire country. This is a purposeful act and Obama, his Cabinet and FEMA are making conscious decisions to destroy the sovereignty of this country.

Before I review the many elements of the planned Russian “surprise attack”, it is important for America to understand that it takes a communist to bring communism to America. Obama was bred by communists, raised by communists, educated at the finest schools with communist money, his political career was launched by communists and his controllers in the White House are communists. Obama is the lynchpin of a multigenerational plan to hand America over to the Russians and to the Chinese communists. Click on the hypertext links in this paragraph to read the proof of what I speak.

Obama did not just wake up one day and decide to weaken American defenses and hand over the country to the Russian communists. Obama was groomed for this position for the past several years. He is indeed the right communist, at the right time, whose mission is to bring America the most crippling form of communism the world has ever seen.

Public Perception Has Changed in Nine Months

Since October of 2012, I have been screaming at the top of my lungs that there were dangerous numbers of Russian troops on American soil. And this was occurring as Russian and the United States were inching closer to war over Syria and Iran and this is still a possibility.

The Russians have previously threatened to nuke America if it invades either Syria or Iran after threatening the Petrodollar scheme through the buying of oil from Iran in exchange for Gold. The Chinese have made multiple threats to the same tune. Knowing that this is all true, why in the world would FEMA make a deal with Russian troops to operate on American soil?

The Bilateral Agreement: A Wolf In Sheep’s Clothing

Ostensibly, the Russian troops are only here to offer “assistance” to FEMA during emergencies, disasters and to participate in “regular” policing activities. According to media reports, 15,000 Russian troops have been requested by the Obama administration for this “training” exercise on American soil. Training for what? The government says they are training for a massive influx of illegal aliens. News flash for Obama, the illegals are already here and there are 30 million of them. The other FEMA excuse we hear is that the Russians will be trained to interact with the American public in preparation for some future unknown natural disaster. What disaster would that be? Would it be the roll out of martial law, gun confiscation or the evacuation of the Gulf? Substitute the word Hessian for Russian and their purpose becomes crystal clear.

The Red Dawn Smokescreen

This bilateral FEMA agreement is nothing but a smokescreen. The Russian troops have been in Alaska and in their little enclaves for years.

This depiction is on the wall at Denver International Airport. Doesn’t soldier armed with an AK-47, overseeing a cataclysm, look like a Russian soldier?

According to the locals who have contacted me, the Russians walk freely in Alaskan cities in full view of the residents. Amanda Mitchell, from Ketchikan, Alaska, has seen Russian troops in full uniform walking the streets of her town. The people are afraid of them. The Russians keep to themselves and don’t interact with the locals. Since I first wrote about this, I have been contacted by people in Fairbanks, Juneau and the outlying northern areas with similar reports. Most of the people who have contacted me are to cowardly to allow me to use their names, but people like Amanda Mitchell are not and neither is Dr. Susan Helman of Gatlinburg, TN.

Dr. Helman was on my talk show three weeks ago and reported on young Russians (20′s and 30′s) who live in Russian enclaves in her town and do not interact with the locals, yet they speak perfect English and unlike most immigrant groups, there are no English speaking stragglers. In other words, these young Russians are plants and are being pre-positioned for assignment when the time is right. Things are so bad in Helman’s town, that she sees unmarked helicopters landing on the grass adjacent to her home which borders a golf course.

Then there is Sherrie Wilcox of Knoxville,TN. Sherrie has seen and photographed DHS armored vehicles back in March with Russian soldiers manning the vehicles in eastern Tennessee and Western Kentucky. I have reports from dozens of citizens from around the country who have sighted Russian soldiers in places as innocuous as at a Walmart in Houston.

Julie Telegenhoff, owner of the popular Facebook site A Sheep No More, sent me a Youtube video of Russian troops in California. Mark Stephens, a marine corps veteran sent me reports of Russian troops operating in and around Twenty Nine Palms, California.

The Russians are not coming into the country under a bilateral agreement with FEMA, they are here and they have been here for a long time.

Obama Has Given Away American Territory to Russia

Giving away these islands constitutes a blatant act of treason.

Obama is not just a traitor for bringing in Russian troops to police Americans, his treason started much earlier. Obama has given away seven strategic, oil-rich Alaskan islands to the Russians at a time when we could be going to war with Russia. At minimum, the oil, alone, from these Islands should be considered to be a military asset. I remain very concerned that these seven islands in the Arctic Ocean and Bering Sea could also be used as a military staging area from which to invade Alaska and defend its new claims of the mineral rich resources at the North Pole.

Russian troops began carrying out joint anti-terrorism drills in America since in May of 2012. What terrorists could they be practicing for? The influx of Russian soldiers maybe began just as a trickle with a couple of dozen of Russians stationed at Fort Carson. However, with the FEMA bilateral agreement, it is clear the floodgates are ready to burst wide open and Obama’s treachery is fully exposed.


There will be no “I told you so.” Things are too dire for us to resort to petty ego battles. It can now truthfully be said that America is indeed an occupied nation. If you are of the mindset that these Russian troops are here because they will have no compunction to shoot Americans for failure to comply with gun confiscation or mass deportation activities. I have no proof that this is what they are doing, but it is clear to me that the Russians are likely going to be used as death squads. These Russian soldiers certainly did not come to this country to improve our ice hockey skills.

My advice to my fellow citizens is to disobey every Russian soldier and their commands at any event that Americans attend. Ignore them, they have no authority. If they bark orders at you, spit on their Russian boots and tell them to get out of our country and go back to Russia and continue abusing their own citizens, where they also murder their journalists. Obama has proven we do not Russia’s help in murdering our journalists, we are doing quite a fine job of that ourselves, just ask the Hastings and Breitbart families.

The Russians are our enemy and always will be.



by Dave Hodges | The Common Sense Show

July 8, 2013

Some Americans are over 30 years behind the times. Some think the Cold War is over. The Cold War starts and stops when the Wall Street Banksters say so.

The recent  “U.S.-Russia Bilateral Presidential Commission Working Group on Emergency Situations.”which permits Russian soldiers on American soil is a smokescreen. Russian troops have been here for some time. And the Russian troops are in this country because a higher force wants them here. The Russians are needed to carry out some specific purpose. Putin is not calling the shots. The Russians are puppets and nothing more. Russia and communism have always served a contrived purpose. It is not a political movement borne out desperation and purpose. Communism is a fabricated enemy designed to promote a fabricated, dichotomous conflict for profit.

Meet the Wall Street Bolsheviks

Communism dictatorships and in particular, the Bolshevik Revolution, owe their origins to Wall Street. The Cold War was a creation of Wall Street controlled defense contractors and a president once alluded to it. In his farewell address, Eisenhower stated that the US government formerly functioned to solely “…keep the peace, to foster progress in human achievement, and to enhance liberty, dignity and integrity among people and among nations….In the councils of government, we must warn against the acquisition of unwarranted influence, whether sought or unsought, by the military-industrial complex. The potential for the disastrous rise of misplaced power exists and will persist.” The Wall Street Banksters are determining every move. Here we had an outgoing President telling us how bad things were and how much worse they could get, and the people did nothing. To some, Ike must have looked like a nutty conspiracy theorist following his farewell address.

In 1961, JFK warned the people about the “covert” strategies of “secret societies” and their “repugnant tactics to “subvert” our way of life. JFK was murdered and the people did nothing.

George Bush I proclaimed that the first Gulf War would see the ushering in of the “New World Order.” We begin to fight elective wars of foreign occupation on behalf of the military industrial complex, of which oil corporations are a part of, and the people still did nothing.

Bill Clinton and Al Gore once sold missile technology to the Chinese communists in exchange for campaign donations in a brazen act of treason. This was even exposed in the mainstream media by the Republicans and the people still did nothing.

George Bush II once said, “Either you are with us, or you are with the terrorists.” And then he proceeded to install the largest police state surveillance grid in the history of the world in the name of fighting al-Qaeda. Now, our government is siding with the terrorists. We funded and armed al-Qaeda to overthrow Libya on behalf of the international bankers. We are presently funding al-Qaeda in Syria. Yet, according to Bush, al-Qaeda killed 3,000 people at the World Trade Center on 9/11. The Mujahedeen, led by Osama Bin Laden, was created and supplied by the CIA to fend off the Soviet invasion of Afghanistan. Then they ostensibly carried out 9/11 and despite these contradictions and obvious lies, the people did nothing.

Every  conflict, every crisis, is the result of contrived action on the part of the banksters. Ike had it nailed over 50 years ago..

All sides of nearly every conflict are funded by the same source. How many of you hate an individual in Iraq, Afghanistan, Syria, Iran, Russia, China or North Korea? But you are conditioned to hate them and then kill them when told to do so. Your children will willingly go and kill or be killed by people from these nations without personally knowing the “enemy” or understanding what they are fighting for. The coming war, both the Civil War II and WWIII, will involve strangers killing strangers for reasons which makes no sense. It only makes sense when you realize that all sides are merely pieces on a chess board being controlled by the banksters to further their greedy ambitions related to power and wealth. There is nobody they will not use to this end.

No tree has branches so foolish as to fight amongst themselves.

Ojibwa Indian saying

The Russians are not coming, they’re here! Despite government documented, publicly reported evidence demonstrating that Russian troops are in the country, there are those that refuse to acknowledge that the Russians have a presence in this country.

Saving What We Can

Whether we realize it or not, the alternative media is performing triage on America. Triage is “the sorting of and allocation of treatment to patients and especially battle and disaster victims according to a system of priorities designed to maximize the number of survivors.”  Triage is most often used to focus on saving those who have the best chance for survival and not waste resources on those that are not likely to be saved.

Those of us that see the unfolding tyranny, are baffled by the abject ignorance that we see from many of our fellow Americans. Present day Americans can be divided into three groups, the aware, those that have a chance to become aware and those who will remain hopelessly unaware.

The first group, the least numerous of the three groups, have varying degrees of awareness and some will survive because they will act based upon their knowledge and experience.  Many have become informational missionaries in that they selflessly attempt to educate the unaware as to the dangers we face and will face.

The second group consists of Americans who know that something is terribly wrong but are conditioned that there could never be a conspiracy theory that was valid and most of these people will perish because this belief.

The truth is that the vast majority of Americans are dead from the neck up and they cannot be saved. This third group will continue to clutch on to their precious material holdings up until the time they meet their untimely and collective end at the hands of the globalists who have proclaimed that they are intent on a 90% population reduction.

Most of us in the alternative media have dedicated their lives to waking up America. However, time is short and we cannot waste precious resources on those that are so blind that they will not see. Every week, I have conversations with my colleagues in the alternative media who are profoundly discouraged about how badly we are losing and how hopelessly ignorant most people are.

Some in the resistance have left the country. Others have just given up on educating a dumbed down population. Most of us go through vacillating feelings of a desire to serve humanity and wanting to withdraw because we are losing ground and it feels like our efforts are for naught.

We need to come the realization that we cannot save everyone, or even most. Therefore, we need to tailor our message for those who know something is wrong, but aren’t sure exactly what. For there will come a time when those who are unprepared are on the other side of the fence and when they reach out, the rest of us will have to say “I know you not.”

Why Are They Here?

Since we now have two official admissions that Russian troops are in the country training to “police” Americans, what do the rest of you think about what they are really doing here? Does anyone really believe that nonsense that our police need so much help that FEMA has to import 15,000 soldiers to begin to assist in these efforts? Does that explanation make any sense? In short, the reasons given are absolutely ludicrous.

If Russians are not here to “police,” then what is their purpose?  Certainly gun confiscation comes to mind. If some Americans resist, Russians would presumably be more likely to use lethal force. The stories of death squads are rampant and perhaps this is their purpose. Or, maybe it is both. Either way, our way of life is changing before our eyes and it is about to get dramatically worse. And even when the government admits to the presence of Russian troops on our soil, most of the flock still won’t believe it. Consequently, save who you can in the time we have left.





Daniel Taylor
May 1, 2013

On this first of May, 2013 – a day celebrated by communists in their struggle for “liberation” – it is appropriate to reflect on the communist agenda. Many of its goals have manifested systemically in the decades gone by. Whether or not you believe there is a conscious agenda behind the changes we are witnessing is irrelevant. Forget the “Communist” label for a moment and recognize these labels for what they are: Different ways of describing despicable tyrants making their move for total control. As we can see with the examples below (of which there are many more) the political and social aspects of our country have been successfully altered.

As entered into the Congressional Record of 1963:

“Discredit the American Founding Fathers. Present them as selfish aristocrats who had no concern for the “common man.””

– FEMA has been caught on video instructing local police that the founding fathers were America’s first terrorists.

– In 2009 a leaked Missouri Information Analysis Center (MIAC) document listed Ron Paul and Libertarians as terrorists

– West Point’s Combating Terrorism Center lists “anti-federalists” as a terrorist group. As the document states, “They… espouse strong convictions regarding the federal government, believing it to be corrupt and tyrannical, with a natural tendency to intrude on individuals’ civil and constitutional rights… they support civil activism, individual freedoms, and self government.”

“Discredit the American Constitution by calling it inadequate, old-fashioned, out of step with modern needs, a hindrance to cooperation between nations on a worldwide basis.”

– New York mayor Michael Bloomberg, in response to the Boston bombings, says that the U.S. Constitution will “have to change”. Of course, it is in the name of increased security.

– In December of last year, the New York Times published an article by Louis Michael Seidman, professor of constitutional law at Georgetown University, which proudly admonished “Let’s Give Up on the Constitution.” Seidman dares to blame our problems on following the constitution, which he calls “evil” and “archaic”.

– In waging the war on terror after 9/11 the Bill of Rights was an inconvenience that Bush administration officials sought to remove. President Obama has continued down the same path with the NDAA and other unconstitutional measures.

“Break down cultural standards of morality by promoting pornography and obscenity in books, magazines, motion pictures, radio, and TV.”

The prevalence of pornography in today’s society is nothing short of shocking. Its impact on society is corrosive, which is why it must be promoted if a revolutionary group wants to alter the social landscape. According to the Washington Post, 1 in 6 women are addicted to porn. In 2004 Dr. Jill Manning testified before the U.S. Senate regarding the impact of pornography on marriage in the United States. She presented statistics gathered from lawyers around the country. She found that, “56 percent of divorce cases involved one party having an obsessive interest in pornographic websites.” As Kevin Skinner writes in Psychology Today, “If half of the people divorcing claim pornography as the culprit, that means there are 500,000 marriages annually that are failing due to pornography.”

“Support any socialist movement to give centralized control over any part of the culture–education, social agencies, welfare programs, mental health clinics, etc.”

The Cloward–Piven strategy is going full force under the Obama administration. This socialist strategy, developed in 1966 by Richard Cloward and Frances Fox Piven, sought to push welfare on the masses in order to create division and economic crisis. A program of “wealth redistribution” is then presented as a solution. Under Obama, welfare is at an all time high. From 2007 to 2011 the number of food stamp recipients rose 70% to 45 million. A 1966 article published in the The Nation outlined the plan,

“A series of welfare drives in large cities would, we believe, impel action on a new federal program to distribute income, eliminating the present public welfare system and alleviating the abject poverty which it perpetrates… These disruptions would generate severe political strains, and deepen existing divisions among elements in the big-city Democratic coalition: the remaining white middle class, the white working-class ethnic groups and the growing minority poor… a national Democratic administration would be con-strained to advance a federal solution to poverty that would override local welfare failures, local class and racial conflicts and local revenue dilemmas. By the internal disruption of local bureaucratic practices, by the furor over public welfare poverty, and by the collapse of current financing arrangements, powerful forces can be generated for major economic reforms at the national level.”

Regardless of its political label, tyranny is rising in the United States of America. It is the responsibility of every upstanding citizen to denounce it and work to restore the values and liberty loving spirit that sustained our ancestors.



From Greg Swank

You are about to read a list of 45 goals that found their way down the halls of our great Capitol back in 1963. As you read this, 39 years later, you should be shocked by the events that have played themselves out. I first ran across this list 3 years ago but was unable to attain a copy and it has bothered me ever since. Recently, Jeff Rense posted it on his site and I would like to thank him for doing so.

Communist Goals (1963) Congressional Record–Appendix, pp. A34-A35 January 10, 1963


Mr. HERLONG. Mr. Speaker, Mrs. Patricia Nordman of De Land, Fla., is an ardent and articulate opponent of communism, and until recently published the De Land Courier, which she dedicated to the purpose of alerting the public to the dangers of communism in America.

At Mrs. Nordman’s request, I include in the RECORD, under unanimous consent, the following “Current Communist Goals,” which she identifies as an excerpt from “The Naked Communist,” by Cleon Skousen:

[From "The Naked Communist," by Cleon Skousen]

1. U.S. acceptance of coexistence as the only alternative to atomic war.

2. U.S. willingness to capitulate in preference to engaging in atomic war.

3. Develop the illusion that total disarmament [by] the United States would be a demonstration of moral strength.

4. Permit free trade between all nations regardless of Communist affiliation and regardless of whether or not items could be used for war.

5. Extension of long-term loans to Russia and Soviet satellites.

6. Provide American aid to all nations regardless of Communist domination.

7. Grant recognition of Red China. Admission of Red China to the U.N.

8. Set up East and West Germany as separate states in spite of Khrushchev’s promise in 1955 to settle the German question by free elections under supervision of the U.N.

9. Prolong the conferences to ban atomic tests because the United States has agreed to suspend tests as long as negotiations are in progress.

10. Allow all Soviet satellites individual representation in the U.N.

11. Promote the U.N. as the only hope for mankind. If its charter is rewritten, demand that it be set up as a one-world government with its own independent armed forces. (Some Communist leaders believe the world can be taken over as easily by the U.N. as by Moscow. Sometimes these two centers compete with each other as they are now doing in the Congo.)

12. Resist any attempt to outlaw the Communist Party.

13. Do away with all loyalty oaths.

14. Continue giving Russia access to the U.S. Patent Office.

15. Capture one or both of the political parties in the United States.

16. Use technical decisions of the courts to weaken basic American institutions by claiming their activities violate civil rights.

17. Get control of the schools. Use them as transmission belts for socialism and current Communist propaganda. Soften the curriculum. Get control of teachers’ associations. Put the party line in textbooks.

18. Gain control of all student newspapers.

19. Use student riots to foment public protests against programs or organizations which are under Communist attack.

20. Infiltrate the press. Get control of book-review assignments, editorial writing, policy-making positions.

21. Gain control of key positions in radio, TV, and motion pictures.

22. Continue discrediting American culture by degrading all forms of artistic expression. An American Communist cell was told to “eliminate all good sculpture from parks and buildings, substitute shapeless, awkward and meaningless forms.”

23. Control art critics and directors of art museums. “Our plan is to promote ugliness, repulsive, meaningless art.”

24. Eliminate all laws governing obscenity by calling them “censorship” and a violation of free speech and free press.

25. Break down cultural standards of morality by promoting pornography and obscenity in books, magazines, motion pictures, radio, and TV.

26. Present homosexuality, degeneracy and promiscuity as “normal, natural, healthy.”

27. Infiltrate the churches and replace revealed religion with “social” religion. Discredit the Bible and emphasize the need for intellectual maturity, which does not need a “religious crutch.”

28. Eliminate prayer or any phase of religious expression in the schools on the ground that it violates the principle of “separation of church and state.”

29. Discredit the American Constitution by calling it inadequate, old-fashioned, out of step with modern needs, a hindrance to cooperation between nations on a worldwide basis.

30. Discredit the American Founding Fathers. Present them as selfish aristocrats who had no concern for the “common man.”

31. Belittle all forms of American culture and discourage the teaching of American history on the ground that it was only a minor part of the “big picture.” Give more emphasis to Russian history since the Communists took over.

32. Support any socialist movement to give centralized control over any part of the culture–education, social agencies, welfare programs, mental health clinics, etc.

33. Eliminate all laws or procedures which interfere with the operation of the Communist apparatus.

34. Eliminate the House Committee on Un-American Activities.

35. Discredit and eventually dismantle the FBI.

36. Infiltrate and gain control of more unions.

37. Infiltrate and gain control of big business.

38. Transfer some of the powers of arrest from the police to social agencies. Treat all behavioral problems as psychiatric disorders which no one but psychiatrists can understand [or treat].

39. Dominate the psychiatric profession and use mental health laws as a means of gaining coercive control over those who oppose Communist goals.

40. Discredit the family as an institution. Encourage promiscuity and easy divorce.

41. Emphasize the need to raise children away from the negative influence of parents. Attribute prejudices, mental blocks and retarding of children to suppressive influence of parents.

42. Create the impression that violence and insurrection are legitimate aspects of the American tradition; that students and special-interest groups should rise up and use ["]united force["] to solve economic, political or social problems.

43. Overthrow all colonial governments before native populations are ready for self-government.

44. Internationalize the Panama Canal.

45. Repeal the Connally reservation so the United States cannot prevent the World Court from seizing jurisdiction [over domestic problems. Give the World Court jurisdiction] over nations and individuals alike.



Book names names, details strategies to ‘transform’ U.S.

by Jerome R. Corsi | World Net Daily
August 19, 2013

NEW YORK – New Zealander Trevor Loudon has just published an encyclopedic new 689-page volume, “The Enemies Within: Communists, Socialists and Progressives in the U.S. Congress,” to accompany his 668-page 2011 book, “Barack Obama and the Enemies Within.”

In both volumes, Loudon has proved himself to be among the foremost experts in the world investigating and reporting the penetration of communists, socialists and the current group of “progressives” affiliated with Democratic Party politics who portray themselves as liberals.

In his 2011 book, Loudon presented documented evidence that Barack Obama’s rise in politics was not an accident, but a conscious, decade-long effort by the radical left to promote a candidate with African roots. Obama, he said, was packaged as an engaging and seemingly harmless Trojan Horse radical, sent to Chicago to refine his skills running for office as a Democratic Party politician.

It is impossible to read “Barack Obama and the Enemies Within” without being convinced that Obama’s education in communist ideology stretches from the extracurricular education he received from Communist Party mentor Frank Marshall Davis in Honolulu to his recruitment as a New Party candidate in Chicago, with strong ties to the Democratic Socialists of America.

Loudon continues naming names in his current volume, “The Enemies Within,” which documents how extensively communists, socialists and progressives have penetrated the U.S. Congress, running on the Democratic Party ticket.

The goal of these radicals in Congress, Loudon demonstrates, is the same goal Obama announced when running for president in 2008, to transform the United States from the constitutional republic established by its Founding Fathers into a radical socialist state. The aim is to be achieved through passing extensive social welfare legislation designed to bankrupt a government adhering to concepts of private property and private enterprise.

In an insightful essay on the Democratic Socialists of America, Loudon emphasizes the impact on U.S. radicals of the late Italian Communist Party theoretician Antonio Gramsci, whose writings from prison declared that the “working class revolution” is a dead end, arguing instead that communism can best be achieved “by infiltrating civil society – political parties, churches, labor unions, universities, the media, community groups, etc., to turn them into revolutionary vehicles.”

Similarly, Loudon documents how the Communist Party of the USA itself has adopted a stealth plan to achieve revolutionary goals by decisions made in the 1970s to infiltrate and manipulate the Democratic Party. The plan is to form alliances with the radical elements in organized labor in conjunction with radicals in the African-American community and the feminist movement to establish a progressive coalition on the left that could dominate the national political agenda for decades to come.

His essay on the Institute for Policy Studies provides extensive evidence that the IPS, operating today with the distinction of being oldest – founded in 1963 – and most influential of the far left “think tanks” in Washington, D.C., “works closely with several U.S. Marxist groups, but is particularly close to the Democratic Socialists of America.”

The congressional profiles of current members of Congress provides extensive evidence of radical leftist ties in the backgrounds of top Democratic Party legislators, including Democratic Party Sens. Barbara Boxer, Dick Durbin, Tom Harkin, Barbara Mikulski, Elizabeth Warren, Ed Markey, Debbie Stabenow, Al Franken, Sherrod Brown, Ron Wyden, Jeff Merkley, Patty Murray and Tammy Baldwin.

In the House of Representatives, Loudon profiles the radical left background of Democratic Party Reps. Nancy Pelosi, Louis Gutierrez, John Conyers, Charles Rangel, Marcy Kaptur, Peter DeFazio, Sheila Jackson Lee, Jim McDermott and dozens more.

Loudon’s profiles of the radical lawmakers is extensively footnoted, complete with photos, news clips, website screen captures and quotations from published sources that leave no doubt as to the authenticity and accuracy of his allegations.

In documenting the success with which the radical left has captured the politically correct core of Democratic Party politics since the 1970s and the end of the Vietnam War, Loudon joins bestselling author Paul Kengor, who published in 2010 “Dupes: How America’s Adversaries Have Manipulated Conservatives for a Century,” followed in 2012 by “The Communist: Frank Marshall Davis, The Untold Story of Barack Obama’s Mentor.”

What authors Loudon and Kengor show is that communism in America did not die with the fall of the Berlin Wall. It is alive and well, with ties that run deep today with Barack Obama in the White House and the radical leftist Democrats serving in the halls of Congress.

Loudon will be in Washington, D.C., at the National Press Club Aug. 20 to participate in the all day conference “The Crisis in American Journalism and the Conservative Response,” hosted by the public policy group America’s Survival Inc.

Joining Loudon, who is listed on the program to speak about his book “The Enemies Within,” will be Kengor, presenting his new book, “All the Dupes Fit to Print: Journalists Who Have Served as Tools of Communist Propaganda.”



Michael Snyder
Economic Collapse
Aug 8, 2013

The Russian Bear is stronger and more powerful than it has ever been before.  Sadly, most Americans don’t understand this.  They still think of Russia as an “ex-superpower” that was rendered almost irrelevant when the Cold War ended.

Credit: Wikimedia Commons

Credit: Wikimedia Commons

And yes, when the Cold War ended Russia was in rough shape.  I got the chance to go over there in the early nineties, and at the time Russia was an economic disaster zone.  Russian currency was so worthless that I joked that I could go exchange a 20 dollar bill and buy the Kremlin.  But since that time Russia has roared back to life.  Once Vladimir Putin became president, the Russian economy started to grow very rapidly.  Today, Russia is an economic powerhouse that is blessed with an abundance of natural resources.  Their debt to GDP ratio is extremely small, they actually run a trade surplus every year, and they have the second most powerful military on the entire planet.  Anyone that underestimates Russia at this point is making a huge mistake.  The Russian Bear is back, and today it is a more formidable adversary than it ever was at any point during the Cold War.

Just check out the following statistics.  The following are 18 signs that Russia is rapidly catching up to the United States…

#1 Russia produces more oil than anyone else on the planet.  The United States is in third place.

#2 Russia is the number two oil exporter in the world.  The United States is forced to import more oil than anyone else in the world.

#3 Russia produces more natural gas than anyone else on the planet.  The United States is in second place.

#4 Today, Russia supplies 34 percent of Europe’s natural gas needs.

#5 The United States has a debt to GDP ratio of 101 percent.  Russia has a debt to GDP ratio of about 8 percent.

#6 The United States had a trade deficit of more than half a trillion dollars last year.  Russia consistently runs a large trade surplus.

#7 The United States has an unemployment rate of 7.4 percent.  Russia has an unemployment rate of 5.4 percent.

#8 Since Vladimir Putin first became president of Russia, the Russian economy has grown at a very rapid pace.  The following is fromWikipedia

Under the presidency of Vladimir Putin Russia’s economy saw the nominal Gross Domestic Product (GDP) double, climbing from 22nd to 11th largest in the world. The economy made real gains of an average 7% per year (1999: 6.5%, 2000: 10%, 2001: 5.7%, 2002: 4.9%, 2003: 7.3%, 2004: 7.2%, 2005: 6.4%, 2006: 8.2%, 2007: 8.5%, 2008: 5.2%), making it the 6th largest economy in the world in GDP(PPP). In 2007, Russia’s GDP exceeded that of 1990, meaning it has overcome the devastating consequences of the recession in the 1990s.

During Putin’s eight years in office, the industry grew by 75%, investments increased by 125%, and agricultural production and construction increased as well. Real incomes more than doubled and the average salary increased eightfold from $80 to $640. The volume of consumer credit between 2000–2006 increased 45 times, and during that same time period, the middle class grew from 8 million to 55 million, an increase of 7 times. The number of people living below the poverty line also decreased from 30% in 2000 to 14% in 2008.

#9 According to Bloomberg, Russia has added 570 metric tons of gold to their reserves over the past decade.  In the United States, nobody seems to be quite sure how much gold the Federal Reserve actually has left.

#10 Moscow is the second most expensive city in the world.  Meanwhile, the United States actually has the unfriendliest city in the world (Newark, New Jersey).

#11 More billionaires live in Moscow than in any other city on the globe.

#12 The Moscow metro system completely outclasses the subway systems in Washington D.C. and New York City.

#13 The United States has the most powerful military on the planet, but Russia is in second place.

#14 Russia has introduced a new “near silent” nuclear submarine which is far more quiet than anything the U.S. has…

The Borey Class submarine, dubbed Vladimir Monomakh, has a next generation nuclear reactor, can dive deeper than 1,200 feet, and carries up to 20 nuclear intercontinental ballistic missiles (ICBM).

Each of these “Bulava” ICBM’s can carry ten detachable MIRV warheads, what they call “re-entry vehicles,” capable of delivering 150 kiloton yields per warhead

#15 While Barack Obama is neutering the U.S. strategic nuclear arsenal, Vladimir Putin is working hard to modernize Russian nuclear forces.

#16 Russian missile forces will hold more than 200 drills during the second half of 2013.

#17 Russian Prime Minister Vladimir Putin made headlines all over the world when he climbed into the cockpit of Russia’s new “fifth generation” fighter jet and announced that it was far superior to the F-22 Raptor.

#18 It is estimated that Russia has more spies inside the United States today than it did at any point during the Cold War.

Unfortunately, whenever I write an article about Russia I find that most people simply do not get it.  They will make statements such as “the Cold War is over” or “Russia is our friend” which show a complete and total lack of understanding of the current geopolitical situation.

Russia has been steadily building a stronger relationship with China, and collectively they represent the number one strategic threat to the United States.

Someday this will become abundantly clear to the American people.  Hopefully it will not be too late by the time they realize it.



by Paul Craig Roberts

I spent the summer of 1961 behind the Iron Curtain. I was part of the US-USSR student exchange program. It was the second year of the program that operated under auspices of the US Department of State. Our return to the West via train through East Germany was interrupted by the construction of the Berlin Wall. We were sent back to Poland. The East German rail tracks were occupied with Soviet troop and tank trains as the Red Army concentrated in East Germany to face down any Western interference.

Fortunately, in those days there were no neoconservatives. Washington had not grown the hubris it so well displays in the 21st century. The wall was built and war was avoided. The wall backfired on the Soviets. Both JFK and Ronald Reagan used it to good propaganda effect.

In those days America stood for freedom, and the Soviet Union for oppression. Much of this impression was created by Western propaganda, but there was some semblance to the truth in the image. The communists had a Julian Assange and an Edward Snowden of their own. His name was Cardinal Jozef Mindszenty, the leader of the Hungarian Catholic Church.

Mindszenty opposed tyranny. For his efforts he was imprisoned by the Nazis. Communists also regarded him as an undesirable, and he was tortured and given a life sentence in 1949.

Freed by the short-lived Hungarian Revolution in 1956, Mindszenty reached the American Embassy in Budapest and was granted political asylum by Washington. However, the communists would not give him the free passage that asylum presumes, and Mindszenty lived in the US Embassy for 15 years, 79% of his remaining life.

In the 21st century roles have reversed. Today it is Washington that is enamored of tyranny. On Washington’s orders, the UK will not permit Julian Assange free passage to Ecuador, where he has been granted asylum. Like Cardinal Mindszenty, Assange is stuck in the Ecuadoran Embassy in London.

Washington will not permit its European vassal states to allow overflights of airliners carrying Edward Snowden to any of the countries that have offered Snowden asylum. Snowden is stuck in the Moscow airport.

In Washington politicians of both parties demand that Snowden be captured and executed. Politicians demand that Russia be punished for not violating international law, seizing Snowden, and turning him over to Washington to be tortured and executed, despite the fact that Washington has no extradition treaty with Russia.

Snowden did United States citizens a great service. He told us that despite constitutional prohibition, Washington had implemented a universal spy system intercepting every communication of every American and much of the rest of the world. Special facilities are built in which to store these communications.

In other words, Snowden did what Americans are supposed to do–disclose government crimes against the Constitution and against citizens. Without a free press there is nothing but the government’s lies. In order to protect its lies from exposure, Washington intends to exterminate all truth tellers.

The Obama Regime is the most oppressive regime ever in its prosecution of protected whistleblowers. Whistleblowers are protected by law, but the Obama Regime insists that whistleblowers are not really whistleblowers. Instead, the Obama Regime defines whistleblowers as spies, traitors, and foreign agents. Congress, the media, and the faux judiciary echo the executive branch propaganda that whistleblowers are a threat to America. It is not the government that is violating and raping the US Constitution that is a threat. It is the whistleblowers who inform us of the rape who are the threat.

The Obama Regime has destroyed press freedom. A lackey federal appeals court has ruled that NY Times reporter James Risen must testify in the trial of a CIA officer charged with providing Risen with information about CIA plots against Iran. The ruling of this fascist court destroys confidentiality and is intended to end all leaks of the government’s crimes to media.

What Americans have learned in the 21st century is that the US government lies about everything and breaks every law. Without whistleblowers, Americans will remain in the dark as “their” government enserfs them, destroying every liberty, and impoverishes them with endless wars for Washington’s and Wall Street’s hegemony.

Snowden harmed no one except the liars and traitors in the US government. Contrast Washington’s animosity against Snowden with the pardon that Bush gave to Dick Cheney aide, Libby, who took the fall for his boss for blowing the cover, a felony, on a covert CIA operative, the spouse of a former government official who exposed the Bush/Cheney/neocon lies about Iraqi weapons of mass destruction.

Whatever serves the tiny clique that rules America is legal; whatever exposes the criminals is illegal.

That’s how the United States became the USSR.



(Before It’s News)

ARE Americans practicing Communism? This has ALWAYS been their Plan.

Read the 10 Planks of The Communist Manifesto to discover the truth and learn how to know your enemy…

Karl Marx describes in his communist manifesto, the ten steps necessary to destroy a free enterprise system and replace it with a system of omnipotent government power, so as to effect a communist socialist state. Those ten steps are known as the Ten Planks of The Communist Manifesto… The following brief presents the original ten planks within the Communist Manifesto written by Karl Marx in 1848, along with the American adopted counterpart for each of the planks. From comparison it’s clear MOST Americans have by myths, fraud and deception under the color of law by their own politicians in both the Republican and Democratic and parties, been transformed into Communists.

Another thing to remember, Karl Marx in creating the Communist Manifesto designed these planks AS A TEST to determine whether a society has become communist or not. If they are all in effect and in force, then the people ARE practicing communists.

Communism, by any other name is still communism, and is VERY VERY destructive to the individual and to the society!!

The 10 PLANKS stated in the Communist Manifesto and some of their American counterparts are…

1. Abolition of private property and the application of all rents of land to public purposes.
Americans do these with actions such as the 14th Amendment of the U.S. Constitution (1868), and various zoning, school & property taxes. Also the Bureau of Land Management (Zoning laws are the first step to government property ownership)

2. A heavy progressive or graduated income tax.
Americans know this as misapplication of the 16th Amendment of the U.S. Constitution, 1913, The Social Security Act of 1936.; Joint House Resolution 192 of 1933; and various State “income” taxes. We call it “paying your fair share”.

3. Abolition of all rights of inheritance.
Americans call it Federal & State estate Tax (1916); or reformed Probate Laws, and limited inheritance via arbitrary inheritance tax statutes.

4. Confiscation of the property of all emigrants and rebels.
Americans call it government seizures, tax liens, Public “law” 99-570 (1986); Executive order 11490, sections 1205, 2002 which gives private land to the Department of Urban Development; the imprisonment of “terrorists” and those who speak out or write against the “government” (1997 Crime/Terrorist Bill); or the IRS confiscation of property without due process. Asset forfeiture laws are used by DEA, IRS, ATF etc…).

5. Centralization of credit in the hands of the state, by means of a national bank with State capital and an exclusive monopoly.
Americans call it the Federal Reserve which is a privately-owned credit/debt system allowed by the Federal Reserve act of 1913. All local banks are members of the Fed system, and are regulated by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) another privately-owned corporation. The Federal Reserve Banks issue Fiat Paper Money and practice economically destructive fractional reserve banking.

6. Centralization of the means of communications and transportation in the hands of the State.
Americans call it the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Department of Transportation (DOT) mandated through the ICC act of 1887, the Commissions Act of 1934, The Interstate Commerce Commission established in 1938, The Federal Aviation Administration, Federal Communications Commission, and Executive orders 11490, 10999, as well as State mandated driver’s licenses and Department of Transportation regulations.

7. Extension of factories and instruments of production owned by the state, the bringing into cultivation of waste lands, and the improvement of the soil generally in accordance with a common plan.
Americans call it corporate capacity, The Desert Entry Act and The Department of Agriculture… Thus read “controlled or subsidized” rather than “owned”… This is easily seen in these as well as the Department of Commerce and Labor, Department of Interior, the Environmental Protection Agency, Bureau of Land Management, Bureau of Reclamation, Bureau of Mines, National Park Service, and the IRS control of business through corporate regulations.

8. Equal liability of all to labor. Establishment of industrial armies, especially for agriculture.
Americans call it Minimum Wage and slave labor like dealing with our Most Favored Nation trade partner; i.e. Communist China. We see it in practice via the Social Security Administration and The Department of Labor. The National debt and inflation caused by the communal bank has caused the need for a two “income” family. Woman in the workplace since the 1920′s, the 19th amendment of the U.S. Constitution, the Civil Rights Act of 1964, assorted Socialist Unions, affirmative action, the Federal Public Works Program and of course Executive order 11000.

9. Combination of agriculture with manufacturing industries, gradual abolition of the distinction between town and country, by a more equitable distribution of population over the country.
Americans call it the Planning Reorganization act of 1949 , zoning (Title 17 1910-1990) and Super Corporate Farms, as well as Executive orders 11647, 11731 (ten regions) and Public “law” 89-136. These provide for forced relocations and forced sterilization programs, like in China.

10. Free education for all children in public schools. Abolition of children’s factory labor in its present form. Combination of education with industrial production.

Americans are being taxed to support what we call ‘public’ schools, but are actually “government force-tax-funded schools ” Even private schools are government regulated. The purpose is to train the young to work for the communal debt system. We also call it the Department of Education, the NEA and Outcome Based “Education” . These are used so that all children can be indoctrinated and inculcated with the government propaganda, like “majority rules”, and “pay your fair share”. WHERE are the words “fair share” in the Constitution, Bill of Rights or the Internal Revenue Code (Title 26)?? NO WHERE is “fair share” even suggested !! The philosophical concept of “fair share” comes from the Communist maxim, “From each according to their ability, to each according to their need! This concept is pure socialism. … America was made the greatest society by its private initiative WORK ETHIC … Teaching ourselves and others how to “fish” to be self sufficient and produce plenty of EXTRA commodities to if so desired could be shared with others who might be “needy”… Americans have always voluntarily been the MOST generous and charitable society on the planet.

Do changing words, change the end result? … By using different words, is it all of a sudden OK to ignore or violate the provisions or intent of the Constitution of the united States of America?????

The people (politicians) who believe in the SOCIALISTIC and COMMUNISTIC concepts, especially those who pass more and more laws implementing these slavery ideas, are traitors to their oath of office and to the Constitution of the united States of America… KNOW YOUR ENEMY …Remove the enemy from within and from among us.



Susanne Posel
Occupy Corporatism
March 16, 2013

In 1963, the Communist Goals were introduced into the Congressional Record under Appendix, pp. A34-A35.
Albert Herlong, House Representative from Florida, brought the “Current Communist Goals” that are outlined by Cleon Skousen in the book entitled “The Naked Communist”.

The 45 goals that were supposed in Congressional presentation by Herlong have either come to pass or in the process of being implemented. Without the knowledge of the American public, these ideals were introduced to our US government to alter the perspective of our Constitutional Republic to incrementally turn the tide from freedom to Communism.

The difference between Socialism and Communism is: “Socialism and communism are alike in that both are systems of production for use based on public ownership of the means of production and centralized planning. Socialism grows directly out of capitalism; it is the first form of the new society. Communism is a further development or ‘higher stage’ of socialism.”

The transition stage we are seeing from Constitutional Republic to Socialism is leading us to a Communist dictatorship.

In respect to gun-control, number 42 states: “Create the impression that violence and insurrection are legitimate aspects of the American tradition; that students and special-interest groups should rise up and use ["]united force["] to solve economic, political or social problems.”

In Indiana, Dan DeHaven, the Lake Station Schools Superintendent, stated that a teacher at Edison Junior-Senior High School was suspended for writing a message to his students on the chalkboard.

The message read: “A) You are idiots!!!!!!!! B) The guns are loaded!!! C) Care to try me ?????????”

Students took pictures of the message with their cell phones and alerted school staff members.

DeHaven explained that he will be speaking to the local police about the incident because “we take this situation very seriously; safety is very serious to us.”
In other over-reactions concerning gun control, a 7 year old child was suspended for allegedly shaping a Pop-Tart in a gun and saying “Bang, Bang!”

The school suspended the boy for two days, supporting the teacher’s contention that this was a threatening situation. The school maintained in a letter to the boy’s parents that: “A student used food to make an inappropriate gesture.”

Fort Myers, Florida was the scene of a brave teenager who took a gun from a classmate on a school bus who aimed the firearm “point blank” with the intent to shoot.

Although the teenager wrestled the weapon from his classmate, he was later suspended from school for being involved in an incident involving a gun. This suspension will remain indefinite until the results of an investigation can be finalized.

In the spirit of making our country safer, two schools in the Bronx, New York were put on lockdown after a student reported that another student may have a gun on the school premises. When the gun was located; it turned out to be a Nerf gun that fires foam darts. The lockdown lasted for hours.

Parents who came to retrieve their children were delayed because of the over-reaction of school officials.

Another instance of over-reaction occurred when a 5 year old was sent home from school for building a LEGO gun. The boy was actually suspended from school and sent home with a letter from Hyannis West Elementary School officials that explained to the parents that their son had built a “gun” during a stay at the after-school program.

The parent immediately recognized the insanity of the situation. The father remarked: “It’s not like he’s designing a machine gun.”

Gun control debates have included the idea that mental illness plays a big part as those who are diagnosed with a mental disorder can become violent without notice toward themselves or others. It is the public contention that such individuals must be stopped from ever being able to legally own a firearm.

A study published last year in the New England Journal of Medicine by Dr. William Cooper, pediatrics and preventive medicine professor at Vanderbilt University, claims that Ritalin and Adderall (two pharmaceutical drugs used to treat ADHD) can prevent the mind of hyperactive children from becoming criminals. Cooper contends that these drugs should continue to be administered through adulthood to prevent criminal activity later in life.

Cooper said: “There definitely is a perception that it’s a disease of childhood and you outgrow your need for medicines. We’re beginning to understand that ADHD is a condition for many people that really lasts throughout their life.”

The findings of the study showed:

• Thirty – seven percent of convicts were pre – diagnosed with ADHD
• It was likely that ADHD medication was used in 32% of male convicts and 41% of female
• ADHD suffers were likely to commit burglary or theft
• Four thousand of the 23,000 crimes researched were violent

According to the National Institutes of Health (NIH), ADHD is treated with stimulants such as Methylphenidate (Ritalin, Metadate, Concerta, Daytrana), Amphetamine (Adderall), or Dextroamphetamine (Dexedrine, Dextrostat). These drugs have been approved by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for children as young as 6 years old.

The accepted treatment of ADHD has a list of dangerous side effects such as:

• Being anti – social or withdrawn
• Feeling hopeless, worthless
• Extreme suicidal thoughts
• Panic attacks
• Insomnia
• Aggressive and/or violent behavior
• Sudden changes in mood/behavior

The Karolinska Institute is one of the leading pharmacological research institutions that clarify the field of clinical medicine with the push of the use of drugs to treat physiological and psychological issues. Thirty percent of medicinal training and 40% of medical academic research is conducted at the Karolinska Institute in Sweden and all lectures are translated into English and taught in universities in the US.

Dr. Andrew Adesman, chief of developmental and behavioral pediatrics at the Steven and Alexandra Cohen Children’s Medical Center, confirms through past research that adults who were diagnosed with ADHD as children are more likely to:

• Get into driving accidents
• Consistently lose jobs
• Divorce spouses
• Be arrested or commit some criminal activity

Adesman admits that not all children marked as ADHD go on to become criminals or divorcees, and that the majority of them simply grow out of the behavior. Yet, Adesman still maintains that despite the fact that ADHD is a phase of childhood that rarely carries into adulthood that “collectively, people with ADHD are at risk for a range of poor outcomes.”



By Kris Zane | Western Journalism

A dark, oppressive cloud hovering over America.

We are in the throes of the worst terrorist attack since 9/11. Poison-laced letters are making their way through the mail. Bomb threats are now a daily occurrence. Boston is being managed like a war zone, with other cities quickly falling in line.

With all of this going on, Barack Hussein Obama stood in the Rose Garden yesterday and threw what can only be described as a temper tantrum.

He didn’t get his way—universal background checks for all gun sales—and proceeded to threaten and cajole America for daring to engage in the democratic process.

If it would have been any other day in America, we would have chocked it up to a normal occurrence in the Obama administration.

But it was not a normal day. And there won’t be a normal day for a while.

How could Barack Obama stamp his foot and shake his fist in the midst of a crisis for something that a recent poll said about 4% of the public thinks is important? It doesn’t make sense. It is like something out of a Twilight Zone episode.

It only makes sense if the something that is eaten away at this country, oppressing us, and poisoning us like a toxic cloud, is Barack Hussein Obama.

North Korea is threatening nuclear war, the Middle East is slowly being taken over by the Muslim Brotherhood (who we happen to be in bed with), and our economy is on the verge of collapse as we approach a $20 trillion national debt.

And what is Barack Hussein Obama doing? Playing golf. On another vacation. Hosting a star-studded, multi-million dollar “soul music” celebration and throwing tempter tantrums.

It doesn’t make sense.

It only makes sense if the something that is eating away at this country is in fact Barack Hussein Obama.

And that is exactly what is happening.

It is time to accept the truth, however hard to swallow as Americans, that Barack Hussein Obama’s goal is to destroy the United States of America.

Go ahead, let everyone cry “conspiracy theorist” until hell freezes over. There is no other explanation.

Obama has turned America into a police state, with TSA agents’ presence expanding by the day.

Cameras peek into every nook and cranny of public space.

Bush’s Patriot Act has been discarded for something completely new: simply spy on everyone and everything.

The Utah Data Center in Bluffdale, built by an army of 10,000 construction workers and due to open in September, will be the biggest spy center in the world.  The one million square foot facility is so massive that it can store every single electronic communication for the next 100 years—and still have room to spare.

What exactly will the Utah Data Center be storing? Emails. Telephone calls. Tweets. Facebook posts. Travel records.  Credit card transactions. Bank records. Stock market trades. Google searches. In a word: everything. Oh, and by the way, this will all be done without a warrant, without a subpoena, and without any due process at all.

And this is just the beginning. What good is a surveillance state unless you have a totalitarian government to operate it?  And all totalitarian governments require some type of crisis to usher in the supposed saviors. For Hitler, it was hyperinflation, with the Reichstag fire as the cherry on top. With Obama, it will be the collapse of the dollar followed by total economic collapse.

Conspiracy theory?

According to a highly-placed source in the intelligence community, as reported in the widely read article “Intelligence Insider: Obama Administration Agenda to Kill U.S Dollar,” this is exactly what Obama is planning. The first thing to go will be the stock market, falling free fall, losing 95% of its value. Next, Obama will kill the dollar. Last but not least, the U.S. economy will be buried in a shallow grave in an act of Obamanation.

Progressives, wake up. Republicans, open your eyes. Obama’s no moderate, no liberal, and no Democrat. He’s a globalist, through in through.

The intelligence insider goes on to say that after the collapse of the stock market, the dollar, and finally the entire U.S. economy—long after the European Union has collapsed—a call for a world currency and world government will be shouted from the highest globalist mountains,  supposedly to avert another worldwide economic crisis—no doubt with Barry Obama as the Pied Piper leading us into destruction.

America will become only a dim memory.

Want to know what America—or what is left of America—will look like under a continued Obama presidency?

Remember how the Left cheered when their hero Senator Obama vowed to close Gitmo? When their Messiah won the presidency, he not only didn’t close Gitmo but put the terrorists’ trials in indefinite limbo.

According to a prisoner’s statement smuggled out on April 14:

I’ve been detained at Guantánamo for 11 years and three months. I have never been charged with any crime. I have never received a trial.

Yes, there’s trouble in paradise. Gitmo is a model of what America will become under Obama’s second term. Prepare for indefinite detention. Prepare for a total surveillance society. And prepare for a New World Order.

America is dying.  Welcome to Obama’s fundamental transformation of America.

























About these ads

Leave a Reply

Fill in your details below or click an icon to log in: Logo

You are commenting using your account. Log Out / Change )

Twitter picture

You are commenting using your Twitter account. Log Out / Change )

Facebook photo

You are commenting using your Facebook account. Log Out / Change )

Google+ photo

You are commenting using your Google+ account. Log Out / Change )

Connecting to %s


Get every new post delivered to your Inbox.

Join 81 other followers

%d bloggers like this: